Gsm-cellular Networks Pdf-book

GSM System and Products Overview SY1 Course Student Guide

"NORTHERN TELECOM AND NORTEL MATRA CELLULAR CONFIDENTIAL: Information contained in this document is the property of Northern Telecom and/or Nortel Matra Cellular. Except as specifically authorized in writing by Northern Telecom and Nortel Matra Cellular, the holder of this document shall keep the information contained herein confidential and shall protect same in whole or in part from disclosure and dissemination to third parties and use for evaluation, operation and maintenance purposes only". "You may not reproduce, represent, or download through any means, the information contained herein in any way or in any form without prior written consent of Northern Telecom and Nortel Matra Cellular". © Nortel Matra Cellular and Northern Telecom 2000

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

GSM System and Products Overview

Publication History Version

Date

Comments

04.01/EN

September, 97

Creation

04.02/EN

November, 97

Update miscellaneous mismatches

10.01/EN*

August, 98

V10 Release

11.01/EN

May, 99

V11 Release

12.01/EN

January, 2000

V12 Release

* Starting from V10, the document edition complies with the equipment version.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000 ii

GSM System and Products Overview

SY1 Course Introduction

1

GSM History

2

Basic Network Overview

3

Services

4

Cellular Principles

5

Radio Interface

6

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

7

Procedures

8

Base Transceiver Station Functions

9

S2000/S4000/S8000 BTS Families

10

Base Station Controller Functions

11

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family

12

TransCoder Unit: Functional Description

13

TCU: Physical Presentation

14

NSS Functions

15

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

16

OSS Functions

17

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

18

PicoNODE Family

19

Solutions of Exercises

20

Glossary

21

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000 iii

GSM System and Products Overview

Volume Composition No. 1

Title GSM System and Products Overview

Reference

Version/Edition

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000 iv

GSM System and Products Overview

Course Presentation This course is the main starting of the GSM (GSM900, GSM 1800 and GSM 1900) program. It provides a global overview of the digital radio communication system (i.e. NSS, BSS, OSS) in terms of architecture, cellular concepts, radio channel handling, cellular call control, and Nortel’s products as well as the associated techniques necessary for the understanding of GSM. Course Objectives Upon completion of this course, the participant will be able to:
describe the GSM system and its role in wireless communications worldwide,
quote the GSM network services,
describe the GSM cellular features,
describe the Radio Interface,
describe the steps of the main procedures (call establishment, location updating, handover, etc.),
describe the functions of NSS (Network Sub System), BSS (Base station Sub System), OSS (Operation Sub System) and MS (Mobile Station),
describe the software architecture of the GSM system,
identify and describe the NORTEL NETWORKS GSM products.

Prerequisites Before taking this course, a basic knowledge in transmission and switching, and/or cellular radio system, decibels, PCM links, LAPD, OSI layers, SS7 is required. An excellent way to obtain it is to attend the 2 days TL1 course (Telecommunications Overview).

Scope This course applies to the V12 version of the BSS and to the GSM O9 of the NSS. "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000 v

GSM System and Products Overview

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000 vi

GSM System and Products Overview

Table of Contents COURSE NOTES CONTENTS PUBLICATION HISTORY

ii

SY1 COURSE

iii

VOLUME COMPOSITION

iv

COURSE PRESENTATION

v

TABLE OF CONTENTS

vii

1. INTRODUCTION

1-1

GSM TRAINING CURRICULUM

1-2

BSS NORTEL TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS

1-4

SY1 COURSE

1-5

OBJECTIVES

1-6

2. GSM HISTORY

2-1

OBJECTIVES

2-2

BEFORE GSM: MOBILE TELEPHONY MILESTONES

2-3

ANALOG CELLULAR SYSTEMS AROUND THE WORLD

2-4

DEVELOPMENT OF THE GSM STANDARD

2-5

GSM SPECIFICATIONS

2-7

THE APPLICATION OF THE RADIO SPECTRUM

2-8

GSM FAMILY RADIO BAND SPECTRUM

2-9

GSM BENEFITS

2-10

GSM STANDARD SPREAD: SALES

2-11

DEVELOPMENT OF THE GSM STANDARD

2-12

EXPLOSIVE GROWTH IN WIRELESS DATA

2-13

INCREASING GSM DATA RATES

2-14

MOBILE DATA TECHNOLOGY EVOLUTION

2-15

GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE

2-16

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000 vii

GSM System and Products Overview GPRS AND EDGE

2-17

UNIVERSAL MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM

2-18

3. BASIC NETWORK OVERVIEW

3-1

OBJECTIVES

3-2

TRAFFIC/SIGNALING

3-3

NETWORK OVERVIEW

3-4

MOBILE STATION

3-5

SIM-CARD AND GSM MOBILE EQUIPMENT

3-6

THE SIM-CARD FUNCTIONS

3-7

SUBSCRIBER IDENTIFICATION

3-8

MOBILE IDENTIFICATION

3-9

MS CLASSMARK

3-10

TRENDS IN MOBILE STATION

3-11

BSS ARCHITECTURE

3-12

NSS ARCHITECTURE

3-13

CHECK YOUR LEARNING

3-14

4. SERVICES

4-1

OBJECTIVES

4-2

TELESERVICES

4-3

SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES

4-10

INTELLIGENT NETWORK SERVICES

4-16

CHECK YOUR LEARNING

4-23

5. CELLULAR PRINCIPLES

5-1

OBJECTIVES

5-2

RADIO DESIGN

5-3

ERLANG CONCEPT

5-4

FADING

5-5

COVERAGE OR TRAFFIC LIMITATIONS

5-6

CELL SECTORIZATION

5-7

OMNIDIRECTIONAL SITE ANTENNAS

5-8

BI AND TRISECTORIAL SITE ANTENNAS

5-9

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000 viii

GSM System and Products Overview CALCULATED CELL COVERAGE (TRISECTORIAL SITE)

5-10

CALCULATED CELL COVERAGE

5-11

CLUTTERS

5-12

LINK BUDGET PRESENTATION

5-13

COCHANNEL INTERFERENCE

5-14

THE FREQUENCY REUSE DISTANCE

5-15

INTERFERENCE LIMITS

5-16

FREQUENCY REUSE PATTERN

5-17

FREQUENCY PLAN

5-18

DIFFERENT TYPES OF CELLS

5-19

CELL LAYERING

5-20

FREQUENCY REUSE PATTERN

5-21

6. RADIO INTERFACE

6-1

OBJECTIVES

6-2

FUNCTIONS OF THE RADIO INTERFACE

6-3

GSM USES PAIRED RADIO CHANNELS

6-4

GSM BAND ALLOCATIONS (MHZ)

6-5

GSM TIME DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS (TDMA)

6-6

PHYSICAL CHANNEL

6-7

GSM DELAYS UPLINK TDMA FRAMES

6-8

PROPAGATION DELAYS

6-9

LOGICAL CHANNELS

6-10

FROM PHYSICAL CHANNELS TO LOGICAL CHANNELS

6-11

TRAFFIC CHANNELS (TCHS)

6-12

CONTROL CHANNELS

6-13

THE LOGICAL CHANNELS ON RADIO INTERFACE

6-14

LOGICAL CHANNELS DESCRIPTION

6-15

TRAFFIC AND CONTROL MULTI-FRAMING

6-17

TRAFFIC CHANNELS COMBINATION

6-18

DEDICATED SIGNALING CHANNELS COMBINATION

6-19

PHYSICAL CHANNEL AND LOGICAL CHANNELS

6-20

COMMON CHANNELS COMBINATION

6-21

BCCH COMBINED

6-22 "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000 ix

GSM System and Products Overview WHY 26 AND 51 FRAMES PER MULTIFRAME?

6-23

FROM SPEECH TO RADIO TRANSMISSION

6-24

SPEECH QUALITY - SOURCE CODING

6-25

CHANNEL PROCESSING

6-26

INTERLEAVING: TCH FULL RATE

6-27

BURST FORMATTING

6-28

BURST FORMATS

6-29

CIPHERING

6-31

MODULATION

6-32

DISCONTINUOUS TRANSMISSION FEATURES

6-33

CHECK YOUR LEARNING

6-34

7. ARCHITECTURE, FUNCTIONS AND PROTOCOLS

7-1

OBJECTIVES

7-2

BASIC ELEMENTS OF A CELLULAR SYSTEM

7-3

ARCHITECTURE OF A GSM SYSTEM

7-4

BSS ARCHITECTURE

7-5

BTS GENERAL ARCHITECTURE AND FUNCTIONS

7-6

BSC GENERAL ARCHITECTURE AND FUNCTIONS

7-7

TRAU ARCHITECTURE AND FUNCTIONS

7-8

NSS ARCHITECTURE

7-9

HOME LOCATION REGISTER

7-10

AUTHENTICATION CENTER

7-11

VISITOR LOCATION REGISTER

7-12

EQUIPMENT IDENTITY REGISTER

7-13

INTERWORKING FUNCTION

7-14

PROTOCOL MODEL

7-15

RADIO INTERFACE

7-16

ABIS INTERFACE

7-17

LAPD AND LAPDM FRAMES

7-19

ATER INTERFACE

7-20

A INTERFACE

7-22

PSTN/ISDN/PSDN INTERFACE

7-24

GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE

7-25

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000 x

GSM System and Products Overview CHECK YOUR LEARNING

7-26

8. PROCEDURES

8-1

OBJECTIVES

8-2

CONTENTS

8-3

DESCRIPTORS STORED IN SIM-CARD

8-4

DESCRIPTORS STORED IN THE NETWORK

8-5

DESCRIPTORS EMBODIED IN THE MS

8-6

GSM’S ACTORS

8-7

CELL SELECTION

8-8

IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT

8-9

REGISTRATION: THE VERY FIRST LOCATION UPDATE

8-10

INTRA-VLR LOCATION UPDATE

8-11

INTER-VLR LOCATION UPDATE

8-12

IMSI ATTACH

8-13

IMSI DETACH

8-14

AUTHENTICATION

8-15

CIPHERING

8-17

MOBILE ORIGINATING CALL

8-19

MOBILE TERMINATING CALL

8-20

CALL RELEASE

8-23

REASONS FOR HANDOVER

8-25

MOBILITY AND HANDOVER

8-26

HANDOVER PREPARATION

8-27

HANDOVER DECISION

8-28

HANDOVER EXECUTION

8-29

INTRA-BSC HANDOVER

8-30

INTER-BSC HANDOVER

8-31

INTER-MSC HANDOVER

8-32

EXERCISE

8-33

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000 xi

GSM System and Products Overview

9. BASE TRANSCEIVER STATION FUNCTIONS

9-1

OBJECTIVES

9-2

BSS ARCHITECTURE

9-3

CAPABILITIES OF A BTS

9-4

FUNCTIONAL ARCHITECTURE

9-6

GENERIC ARCHITECTURE

9-7

BCF

9-8

TRX

9-9

TRANSMISSION CHAIN

9-10

RECEPTION CHAIN

9-11

COUPLING SYSTEM

9-12

BTS CONNECTION MODES

9-13

10. S2000/S4000/S8000 BTS FAMILIES

10-1

OBJECTIVES

10-2

COVERAGE SOLUTION

10-3

DRX BASED BTS FAMILY

10-4

BTS S8000 OUTDOOR

10-5

BCF MODULE (FIRST VERSION)

10-7

COMPACT BCF MODULE (SECOND VERSION)

10-8

S8000 TRX

10-10

S8000 COUPLING

10-11

BTS S8000 INDOOR

10-12

BTS S8002

10-14

BTS S8006

10-16

BTS S2000L (LOW POWER)

10-18

BTS S2000H (HIGH POWER)

10-20

ENHANCED PACKAGING

10-21

HIGH POWER RF MODULE

10-22

S8000 DOWN-LINK

10-23

S8000 UP-LINK

10-24

BTS E-CELL

10-25 "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000 xii

GSM System and Products Overview S2000E/S4000 FAMILY

10-28

BTS S4000 INDOOR

10-29

BTS S4000 OUTDOOR

10-31

BTS S2000E INDOOR/OUTDOOR

10-33

DUAL-BAND CONFIGURATIONS

10-35

BTS CONFIGURATION TABLE

10-36

11. BASE STATION CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS

11-1

OBJECTIVES

11-2

BSC IN THE GSM NETWORK

11-3

BSC FUNCTIONS

11-4

SIGNALING IN THE BSS

11-6

GENERIC ARCHITECTURE OF THE BSC

11-7

BSC OMC-R CONNECTION OPTIONS

11-8

12. BSC 6000/12000/12000HC FAMILY

12-1

OBJECTIVES

12-2

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC

12-3

FUNCTIONAL ARCHITECTURE

12-6

PHYSICAL LAYOUT

12-7

DUPLEX OPERATION

12-8

BSC 12000

12-9

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC

12-10

GPRS SUPPORT

12-11

BSC 12000 UPGRADE TO BSC 12000HC

12-12

BSC PROVISIONING

12-13

BSC 12000 PRODUCT CONFIGURATION

12-14

BSC 12000 CONFIGURATION

12-15

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC

12-17

EXERCISES

12-18

NUMBER OF SITES THAT A BSC CAN HANDLE

12-21

CHECK YOUR LEARNING

12-22

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000 xiii

GSM System and Products Overview

13. TRANSCODER UNIT: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

13-1

OBJECTIVES

13-2

TCU FUNCTIONS

13-3

BENEFIT HAVING REMOTE TCUS

13-4

FUNCTIONAL DETAIL

13-5

SIGNALING ON THE BTS-TCU INTERFACE

13-6

SPEECH ON THE BTS-TCU INTERFACE

13-7

USER’S DATA RATE TREATMENT

13-8

CHECK YOUR LEARNING

13-9

14. TCU: PHYSICAL PRESENTATION

14-1

OBJECTIVES

14-2

HARDWARE LAYOUT

14-3

EXTERNAL COMMUNICATIONS

14-4

TCU CABINET

14-5

CHECK YOUR LEARNING

14-6

15. NSS FUNCTIONS

15-1

OBJECTIVES

15-2

NSS ARCHITECTURE

15-3

MOBILE SWITCHING CENTER INTERFACES

15-4

GATEWAY MSC FUNCTIONS

15-5

VISITOR MSC FUNCTIONS

15-6

MSC ARCHITECTURE AND FUNCTIONS

15-7

INTERWORKING FUNCTION

15-8

ECHO CANCELER

15-9

SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE CENTER

15-10

VOICE MAIL SYSTEM

15-11

INTELLIGENT NETWORK PLATFORM

15-12

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000 xiv

GSM System and Products Overview

16. NSS NORTEL: DMS AND GPP

16-1

OBJECTIVES

16-2

NSS NORTEL: DMS FAMILY AND PICONODE

16-3

SUPERNODE (SN)

16-4

DIGITAL MULTIPLEX SYSTEM (DMS) ARCHITECTURE

16-5

DMS CORE MODULES

16-6

SUPERNODE CONFIGURATION

16-7

NORTEL’S ENHANCED NETWORK (ENET)

16-8

LINK PERIPHERAL PROCESSOR (LPP)

16-9

LPP CABINET

16-10

PCM-30 DIGITAL TRUNK CONTROLLER (PDTC)

16-11

PERIPHERALS: ISM

16-12

PERIPHERALS: IOM

16-13

BILLING SERVER

16-14

SUPERNODE SIZE ENHANCED (SNSE)

16-15

MICRONODE

16-17

INCOMING CALL FROM THE PSTN TO THE GMSC

16-19

A CALL GOES TO THE VMSC THAT PAGES THE MS

16-20

NORTEL IWF: GSM PASSPORT NODE

16-21

GPP NODE

16-22

NORTEL’S IN PLATFORM: SERVICEBUILDER

16-25

CHECK YOUR LEARNING

16-26

17. OSS FUNCTIONS

17-1

OBJECTIVES

17-2

OSS PRESENTATION

17-3

NETWORK MANAGEMENT

17-4

CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT

17-10

FAULT MANAGEMENT

17-12

PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT

17-13

SECURITY MANAGEMENT

17-14

WHY AN OMC-R?

17-15 "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000 xv

GSM System and Products Overview OMC-R FUNCTIONS

17-16

COMMON FUNCTIONS

17-17

SERVER ADMINISTRATION

17-18

OMC-S FUNCTIONS

17-19

HIERARCHICAL ARRANGEMENT OF NMC AND OMC

17-20

CHECK YOUR LEARNING

17-21

18. OMC-R, TML AND OMC-S

18-1

OBJECTIVES

18-2

OMC-R

18-3

OMC-R ARCHITECTURE

18-4

HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE

18-5

REMOTE OPERATION TERMINAL APPLICATION

18-6

NETWORK ELEMENTS OPERATED BY OMC-R

18-7

IMPLEMENTATION OF THE OMC-R NETWORK

18-8

NEW MAN-MACHINE INTERFACE

18-9

NEW MMI: LOGICAL VIEW

18-10

NEW MMI: TOPOLOGICAL VIEW

18-11

ALARM WINDOW

18-12

BSS ON SITE MAINTENANCE WITH TML

18-13

BTS ON SITE MAINTENANCE WITH TML

18-14

BSC ON SITE MAINTENANCE WITH TML

18-18

TCU ON SITE MAINTENANCE WITH TML

18-19

OMC-S

18-20

SDM-FT PLATFORM

18-22

OMC-S ELEMENT MANAGER MAIN WINDOW

18-25

NETWORK CONFIGURATION WINDOW

18-26

FAULT MANAGEMENT

18-27

PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT

18-28

CHECK YOUR LEARNING

18-29

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000 xvi

GSM System and Products Overview

19. PICONODE FAMILY

19-1

PICONODE: A VERY SMALL GSM SYSTEM

19-2

RURAL AND COMMUNITY

19-3

CORPORATE/IN-BUILDING: CORPORATENET

19-4

PICONODE ARCHITECTURE

19-5

COMMUNITYNET

19-6

PICONODETM BTS

19-8

PICONODETM BSC

19-9

PICONODETM MSC

19-10

PICONODETM OMC

19-11

TM

COMBO

19-12

TM

SCALABLE GSM SOLUTIONS

19-13

PICONODE PICONODE

20. SOLUTIONS OF EXERCISES

20-1

CELLULAR PRINCIPLES: FREQUENCY REUSE PATTERN

20-2

BTS S8000: COUPLING SYSTEM FOR TWO TRX WITH DIVERSITY

20-3

BSC: TCU WARNING INFORMATION PATH

20-4

BSC: INCOMING CALL INFORMATION PATH

20-6

BSC: CALL-ESTABLISHED TRAFFIC PATH

20-7

21. GLOSSARY

21-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000 xvii

GSM System and Products Overview Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000 xviii

Introduction

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Section 1

PE/TRD/GR/0101

Introduction

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Introduction

1-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

1-1

January, 2000

Introduction GSM Training Curriculum 1 - BSS and NSS Courses

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

NSS System Courses 900 930 931 932 935 936 937 938 950 951 961 962 963 970 972 974

GSM Intelligent Networks Overview GSM DMS Overview GSM NSS Overview GSM Data Overview GSM HLR-PS (Provisioning Server) GSM Billing Mediation Device (GMBD) OMC-S Overview & Operation GSM GPP-IWF GSM DMS Maintenance Part 1 GSM DMS Maintenance Part 2 GSM09 Release Delta GSM10 Release Delta GSM11 Release Delta GSM-MSC/VLR Translations GSM HLR Service Datafill GSM CCS7 Transl. and Operations

NSS System Courses

3 days 3 days 2 days 1 day 3 days 3 days 2 days 5 days 10 days 10 days 2 days 1 day 2 days 10 days 5 days 5 days

Radio and Network Engineering Courses RSV1 RSV2 CNE RF0 CP1 CP2 RSQ1 RSQ2 SSE1 SSE2

Radio Site Verification RSV Measurement & Post-Processing Cellular Network Engine. Process RF Basics Cell Planning Fundamentals Cell Planning Project Radio Survey and RF Qualification Radio Measurements Site Survey and Site Engineering Site Survey Visit and Engineering Case Studies SSE3 Aerial Verification NETRF1 Network and RF Engineering Course

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

1 day 2 days 1 day 3 days 2 days 5 days 2 days 3 days 1 day 1 day 2 days 5 days

BSS Operation & Maintenance Courses

System Courses SY0 SY1 SYS TL1 TL4

GSM General Overview GSM System and Products Overview GSM System Overview Telecommunications Overview ATM Overview

2 days 5 days 3 days 2 days 1 day

BSS System Courses ARI BS21 NE2 NMO PR1 PR2 PR3 PR4 SR11 SR12 SY2

Advanced Radio Interface Description BSC 12000 and TCU Advanced Description BSS Optimization Parameters Network Monitoring and Optimization S8000 BTS Family Advanced Description S2000 L&H and e-cell BTS Advanced Description BSS Products Overview BSC and TCU 3G Advanced Description BSS Release V11 Overview BSS Release V12 Overview BSS Dimensioning

3 days 2 days 3 days

BSS System Courses

2 days

OM1/2 OM4 OM5 OM6 OM7

BSS Operation and Maintenance 10 days OMC-R Administration 4 days BSS Databuild 5 days S8000 BTS Local Maintenance 2 days BSS Performance Measurements Tools 2 days OM9 BSS Operation and Fault Handling 4 days OM10 Reconfiguration Tools 3 days OM31 BSC and TCU Local Maintenance3 days OMDV10-12 BSS Release for V10 Experts 3 days OMDV12 BSS Release for V11 Experts 2 days OM36 BSC, TCU and BTS S8000 Local Maintenance 5 days

BSS Operation & Maintenance Courses

BSS Installation & Commissioning

2 days

PIC1

1 day 2 days

PIC7 PIC10 PIC17 PIM8

2 days 1 day 1 day 2 days

BSC & TCU Installation and Commissioning. BTS S8000 Outdoor I&C BTS S8000 Indoor I&C BTS S8000 I&C BTS S2000 (H&L) I&C and O&M

Introduction

5 days 5 days 4 days 5 days 2 days

1-2

The BSS and NSS training courses are split into several families according to the different skills required to deal with GSM networks: • System: to acquire general knowledge about GSM, as well as a general overview of the equipment designed by Nortel Networks. • BSS System: to acquire a general knowledge on BSS system: products, dimensioning, optimization. • BSS Operation and Maintenance: to be able to operate and maintain a telecommunication network by fully using the OMC-R facilities and give an in-depth understanding of the BSS functions and equipment. • NSS System: to acquire knowledge on the operation and maintenance of the NSS part of the system. • Radio and Network Engineering: to be in charge of cell planning, BSS network topology, field tests, data fill or BSS parameters optimization. • Installation and Commissioning: to be able to install, cable, and run test on-site equipment.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

1-2

January, 2000

Introduction GSM Training Curriculum 2 - GPRS, UMTS, BSS Tools, GSM-R, and PicoNODE Courses GSM-R Courses

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

GPRS Courses TL2 TL3 GP0 GP1 GP10 GP2 GP3 GP4 GP5

Frame Relay Overview TCP/IP Overview GPRS General Overview GPRS Technical Description Passport Operation and Maintenance PCUSN Configuration and Operation SGSN Configuration and Operation GGSN Configuration and Operation OMC-D Operation

RL11

1 day 2 days 1 day 3 days 2 days 1.5 day 1.5 day 2 days 5 days

RL12 RL21 RL22 RL23 RL30 RL31 RL32 RL41 RL51 RL61 RL62

UMTS Courses UM0

UMTS Introduction

1 day

RL63 RL64

BSS Tools Courses CT1000 CT1000_NRP CT3100 CT3100OJT CT7100 CT7100_B CT7100_N CT7100_T

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

CT1000 Course Reconfiguration Procedures CT3100 Course On the job training GSM Network Monitoring and Optimization Tool (NSS and BSS) GSM Network Monitoring and Optimization Tool (BSS only) GSM Network Monitoring and Optimization Tool (NSS only) GSM Network Monitoring Tool (Call Trace/Call Path Trace) January, 2000

8 days 4 days 5 days 3 days

GSM-R System and Products Overview GSM-R deltas with standard GSM GSM-R BSS Optimization parameters GSM-R BSS Optimization parameters versus GSM GSM-R BSS dimensioning GSM-R IN Overview and datafill GSM-R NSS Overview GSM-R HLR Service Datafill GSM-R RF Engineering BTS S8002 I&C BTS S8002 local maintenance GSM-R performance measurements tools BSS O&M for GSM-R BSS Operations and Fault Handling for GSM-R

5 days 1 day 3 days 1 day 2 days 5 days 2 days 5 days 5 days 3 days 2 days 2 days 10 days 4 days

PicoNODE Courses

4 days

PN1 PicoNODE Product Overview PN2 PicoNODE OMC Network Operation PN3 PicoNODE OMC System Administration PN4 PicoNODE BSS Operation PN5 PicoNODE NSS Operation PN245 PicoNODE: From I&C to O&M

3 days 2 days 1 day Introduction

1 day 5 days 5 days 5 days 5 days 10 days 1-3

The BSS and NSS training courses are split in several families according to the different skills required to deal with GSM networks: • GPRS: an overview of this new system and advanced description of new nodes. • UMTS: an overview of this future system. • BSS Tools: to be able to use the new tools. • GSM-R: an overview and advanced description of this new system for railways companies. • PicoNODE: to be able to operate and manage this new product line (wireless access in rural or corporate areas).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

1-3

January, 2000

Introduction BSS Nortel Technical Publications

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

S4000/ S4000C 03 Indoor BTS OMC-R Architecture 06 and Reference

BSS Product Documentation Overview

BSS Overview

What’s new in the BSS V12 NTP suite

BSS Operating Principles

BSS Operating User

OMC-R Preventive & Corrective Maintenance

00

01

88

07

08

32

BSS BSS Operating Parameters Procedures User Guide

34

36

V11/ V12 O&M Evolutions

52

39

Maintenance Principles

50

TML (BSC/TCU) User Manual

51

TML (BTS) User Manual

41

BSC Maintenance Procedures

42

TCU Maintenance Procedures

ROT

14

TCU

16

BSC 6000/ 12000

22

S4000 Outdoor BTS

23

S2000H/L BTS

35

47

S4000 Smart BTS

43

48

S8000 BTS Maintenance Procedures

S2000/ S2000E BTS

53

49

S2000 H/L BTS Maintenance Procedures

84

S8002 BTS Maintenance Procedures

90

e-cell BTS Maintenance Manual

S8000/ S8002 BTS

63

e-cell BTS

92

General Information

Operations Manuals

PE/CDC/DD/0004 CD-ROM of GSM BSS NTPs

PE/CDC/DD/0026 CD-ROM of BSS Parameters User Guide

GSM-BSS Documentation

Reference Manuals

CT Tools (optional)

Fault Number Description S2000/ BSC/TCU S2000E S4000 BTS

S8000/ S2000H/L Advanced e-cell Maintenance S8002 BTS Procedures BTS

101

103

102

104

105

Maintenance Manuals

CT1000 User Manual

CT5100 CT7100 CT7100 Call Trace/ CT1000/ CT3100 Path Trace CT3100 Operating BSS CCM User Instal. CallAnalyzer Instal. Procedures User Manual Manual Manual User Manual Manual

29

38

54

118

20

21

60

46

S2000/ S2000E BTS Maintenance Procedures S4000 BTS Maintenance Procedures

© NORTEL PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Introduction

1-4

The BSS product documentation or BSS Nortel Technical Publication comprises 46 manuals. Kinds of manuals: Reference manuals detail each subsystem or equipment in terms of architecture, hardware and software of its modules and indicate general dimensioning rules. Maintenance manuals include both preventive and corrective maintenance and details the various maintenance procedure. The BSS Maintenance Principles describes the principles of maintenance and gives the list of faults. Generic site dossiers give a canvas to be used by the network operator, where he can collect any specific information for a site. General information: • The BSS Product Documentation Overview (00) is the general manual which introduces all the manuals of the BSS NTPs and includes the glossary. • The BSS Overview (01) is an overview of the digital cellular network and of its division into subsystem. Operating manuals: • The BSS Operating Principles gives the general principles of operation and a dictionary of GSM parameters and observation counters. • The BSS parameters User Guide aims at describing BSS GSM and Nortel parameters, formules and engineering issues for algorithms parameters.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

1-4

January, 2000

Introduction SY1 Course Organization

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

GSM System • Section 5: Cellular Principles • Section 6: Radio Interface • Section 7: Architecture, Functions and Protocols • Section 8: Procedures

• Section 1: Introduction • Section 2: GSM History • Section 3: Basic Network Overview • Section 4: Services

• Section 9: BTS Functions • Section 10: S2000/4000/S8000 BTS Families • Section 11: BSC Functions • Section 12: BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family • Section 13: TransCoder Unit Functions • Section 14: TCU Physical Presentation

• Section 15: NSS Functions • Section 16: NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP • Section 17: OSS Functions • Section 18: OMC-R, TML and OMC-S • Section 19: PicoNODE Family • Section 20: Solutions of Exercises • Section 21: Glossary

GSM Products PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Introduction

1-5

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

1-5

January, 2000

Introduction Objectives

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Upon completion of this course, the participant will be able to:
describe the GSM system and its role in wireless communications worldwide,
quote the GSM network services,
describe the GSM cellular features,
describe the Radio Interface,
describe the steps of the main procedures (call establishment, location updating, handover, etc.),
describe the functions of NSS (Network Sub System), BSS (Base station Sub System), OSS (Operation Sub System) and MS (Mobile Station),
describe the software architecture of the GSM system,
identify and describe the NORTEL NETWORKS GSM products. PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Introduction

1-6

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

1-6

January, 2000

Introduction Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

1-7

January, 2000

Introduction Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

1-8

January, 2000

GSM History

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Section 2

PE/TRD/GR/0101

GSM History

12.01/EN

January, 2000

GSM History

2-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

2-1

January, 2000

GSM History Objectives

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Provide an introduction to the world of mobile communications with particular emphasis on development to digital cellular radio.

PE/TRD/GR/0101

After completing this lesson you will be able to: - Relate the early mobile communication systems. - Show the benefits of digital radio transmission. - Relate the development and spread of the GSM standard. - Indicate the trend for wireless in the next years.

12.01/EN

January, 2000

GSM History

2-2

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

2-2

January, 2000

GSM History Before GSM: Mobile Telephony Milestones 1970

1876

10101010

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Electric transmission (Graham Bell)

Digital Technology (1st digital switch)

• • • ——— • • •

1897

1982

1st wireless transmissions (Marconi)

1st analog cellular network

1992

1946

10101010

1st public mobile telephone PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

1st GSM communication (digital cellular network) GSM History

2-3

1876: The telephone was introduced to the public at the Centennial Exposition of the United States in Philadelphia. Alexander Graham Bell was able to transmit speech electrically, in one direction only, over a copper wire circuit of several hundred feet in length. This “speaking telegraph” was quickly perfected for adequate two-way communication and was offered for business and residential service the following years. Within a short time there were thousands, then tens of thousand, and soon hundreds of thousand of paying customers. End of the 19th century: While the struggle to search for the ways to utilize the copper wire transmission facility more and more efficiently, a young German scientist named Heinrich Rudolf Hertz discovered a strange and wonderful phenomenon: from an electric spark there seemed to emanate invisible waves of force which could be captured at a distant location by a suitably constructed receiving device. Hertz’s own experiments extended only a few yards. 1897: Guglielmo Marconi shows the first wireless transmission over 15 km in Bristol. A few years later(1901), G. Marconi transmitted these waves overseas, and began to call it Radio. 1946: The first public mobile telephone service was introduced in twenty five American cities. Each system used a single, high-powered transmitter and large tower in order to cover distances of over 50 km in a particular market. Nevertheless these early FM push-to-talk telephone systems of the late 1940s used 120 kHz of RF bandwidth in a half duplex mode (only one person on the telephone call could talk at a time), even though the actual telephone-grade speech because of the kHz of baseband spectrum. The large RF bandwidth was needed because of the difficulty in mass producing tight RF filters and low-noise, front-end receiver amplifiers. 1970: A.Pinet introduced in France the first digital switch. 1982: The first commercial cellular system was turned on in Chicago. 1992: GSM, the first fully digital cellular system, was introduced on in Germany and in France.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

2-3

January, 2000

GSM History

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Analog Cellular Systems Around the World

1981 NMT The Nordic Solution Now 18 Millions Subscribers

450 MHz and 900 MHz

NORWAY, DENMARK FINLAND, SWEDEN, FRANCE (450 MHz)

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

1979 AMPS 800 MHz Now 25 Millions Subscribers

1985 TACS in UK 800 and 900 MHz

Dedicated developments

1985 1986 RADIOCOM 2000 C.450 FRANCE GERMANY 400 MHz 450 MHz 900 MHz

Japan • NTT cellular (1979) • JTACS (1988)

GSM History

2-4

There are several different types of analog cellular systems: • NMT450 and NMT900: Scandinavia, Benelux, Spain, Austria, France, Switzerland; • AMPS in more 34 countries: U.S.A., Canada, Argentine, Chile, Indonesia, Brazil, Australia, Republic of Congo (formerly Zaire); • TACS (Total Access Communication System) in UK Ireland and Italy; • R2000: France; • C450: Germany; • NTT (1979) cellular and JTACS (1988) in Japan. • RTMS: Italy; The world's first cellular system actually was implemented in 1979 by the Nippon Telephone and Telegraph company (NTT) in Japan. This system uses 600 FM duplex channels of 25 kHz in the 800 MHz band. In Europe, the Nordic Mobile Telephone system (NMT) was developed in 1981 for the 450 MHz band and uses 180 channels of 25 kHz. The extended European Total Access Cellular System (ETACS) was deployed in 1985 and is virtually identical to the US. AMPS system, except that the smaller bandwidth channels result in a slight degradation of signal-to-noise ratio and coverage range.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

2-4

January, 2000

GSM History Development of the GSM Standard 1982: Groupe Spécial Mobile (GSM) created within CEPT

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

1985: List of recommendations are settled and intensely supported by the industry. 1987: Initial MoU (Memorandum of Understanding) aside the drafting of technical specifications was signed by network operators of 13 countries: • time-scales for the procurement and deployment, • compatibly of numbering and routing plans, • tariff principles and definition of accounting. 1990: • The GSM specifications for the 900 MHz are frozen. • Specifications start for the 1800 MHz GSM systems. • GSM stands as "Global System for Mobile communications" PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

GSM History

2-5

1982: CEPT decides to establish a "Groupe Spécial Mobile" (the initial origin of the Term GSM) in to develop a set of common standards for a future pan-European Cellular Mobile Network. 1984: Establishment of three Working Parties to define and describe GSM features: • the radio interface, • transmission and signaling protocols, • interfaces and network architecture. 1985, 1986: Discussion and adoption of a list of recommendations to be generated by the Group Spécial Mobile. A so-called permanent nucleus is established to continuously coordinate the work, which is intensely supported by industry delegates. Thinking over a radio transmission prototype. 1987: The first Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) is prepared during mid-1987 and signed by 13 European countries in September 1987. Apart from the drafting of the technical specifications within the ad-hoc working groups, European public telecommunication operators worthy recognized the cooperation for commercial and operational aspects. The MoU serves as an adequate forum for discussion on pure operational matters. Its main purposes is to provide a framework for all the necessary measures to be taken by the signatories together to ensure the opening of a commercial service in their respective countries by 1991. The network operators plan the progressive implementation of the networks in each country so that transport routes between the countries of signatories could be brought early into the coverage of the respective systems. 1988: Validation and trials, especially the radio interface, show that GSM will work. With the establishment of the European Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI), Groupe Spécial Mobile becomes a technical committee: • GSM is embodied into European Telecommunications Standards, • GSM stands as "Global System for Mobile Communication" grant.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

2-5

January, 2000

GSM History Development of the GSM Standard 1991: First system trial are running.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

1992: Official commercial launch of GSM service in Europe. 1993: - The GSM-MoU has 62 signatories in 39 countries worldwide. In addition 32 applicants in 19 others countries. - GSM network are operational in Europe. - First commercial services also start outside Europe. - One million subscribers to GSM networks. 1995: Specification of GSM phase 2 are frozen.

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

GSM History

2-6

1991: First system-trial are running at Telecom 91 exhibition. The GSM Recommendations comprise: • more than 130 single documents; • include more than 5,000 pages. The GSM MoU of 1987 was later signed by more operators and amended by 1991 to accept members from non CEPT operators countries thus extend its scope to spread cooperation agreements with non-signatory bodies. 1993: Aside the GSM-MoU has 62 members (signatories) in 39 countries worldwide; and in addition 32 potential members (observers, applicants) in 19 other countries. GSM networks are operational in Denmark, Finland, France, Greece, Ireland, Italy, Luxembourg, Norway, Portugal, Sweden, Switzerland, United kingdom. The end of 1993 shows one millions subscribers to GSM networks, however more than 80% of them are to be found in Germany alone.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

2-6

January, 2000

GSM History GSM Specifications

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

12 SERIES OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

01 SERIES GENERAL

02 SERIES SERVICE ASPECTS

11 SERIES EQUIPMENT AND TYPE APPROVAL SPECIFICATIONS

03 SERIES NETWORK ASPECTS

10 SERIES SERVICE INTERWORKING

04 SERIES MS-BSS INTERFACE AND PROTOCOLS

09 SERIES NETWORK INTERWORKING

05 SERIES PHYSICAL LAYER ON THE RADIO PATH.

08 SERIES BSS TO MSC INTERFACES

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

07 SERIES TERMINAL ADAPTERS FOR MOBILE STATIONS

06 SERIES SPEECH CODING SPECIFICATIONS

GSM History

2-7

One important question was how far GSM should go in its specification work; that is, to what degree the system had to be specified so as to be identical in all countries, and how much could be left to the operators and suppliers to agree upon. Clearly, without identical air interfaces in all networks, the subscribers are not going to have free roaming between network. This was considered to be the absolute minimum degree of standardization, and these equipment were favored. One might have seen it as advantageous to specify everything in the system, including the hardware and the mobile station and even other parts of the system. It was agreed upon that there would be no attempt to specify the system in such detail. Basically, only the functional interfaces between the majors buildings blocks would be specified. This approach had several advantages, perhaps the most important of which is that for each major building block, the principle of functional specifications offers each operator, and thus the customer, the opportunity to purchase whatever make of equipment he wants, thus setting the stage for maximum competition between manufacturers. For instance the fact that an operator has purchased an exchange from a certain supplier does not force him to go on buying equipment from the same supplier. Standardized electrical interfaces as well as protocols are provided for both the fixed network and subscriber equipment. These include standardized rate adaptations compatible with conventional ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) definitions.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

2-7

January, 2000

GSM History The Application of the Radio Spectrum AM 0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9 1.0

Marine 1.2

1.4

1.6

1.8

2.0

2.4

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Short Wave - International Broadcast - Amateur 3

4

5

6

7

8

9

12

40

50

60

70

80

90 100

14

16

VHF

FM

VHF LOW Band 30

10

CB

120

140 160

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9 1.0

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

28 30 MHz

180 200

240

300 MHz

GPS

0.3

Land-Mobile

26

GSM1800, GSM1900

UHF TV 14-69

Broadcasting

24

VHF TV 7-13

Cellular UHF

18 20

10

1.2

12

Aeronautical Mobile telephony

1.4

14

1.6

16

1.8

2.0

18 20

2.4

3.0 GHz

24

30 GHz

Terrestrial Microwave Satellite

GSM History

2-8

In the early years of radio, only the lowest few megahertz of the radio spectrum were in use and they were used for point to point communications between fixed stations, mainly ships, and broadcasting. These applications were respectively called the fixed service, the mobile service and the broadcasting service. By international agreement, the spectrum then in use was divided into several frequency bands, different bands being allocated for each service. This concept of dividing the spectrum between the different links of radio service is still found to be wise and its application has been extended and elaborated to serve modern requirements. The international table of frequency allocations (World Radiocommunication Conference 1995) now covers the frequency range 9 kHz to 275 MHz, divided into hundreds of frequency bands, allocated for 33 different services.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

2-8

January, 2000

GSM History GSM Family Radio Band Spectrum

Uplink

915

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

915 876 880

890

915

1710

1785

1850

1910

P-GSM E-GSM

GSM 1900

GSM 1800

R-GSM 921 925

935

960

1805

1880

1930

1990

MHz

960 960

Downlink

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

GSM History

2-9

According to the resolution of the World Radiocommunication Conference in 1978, the European Telecom Authorities primarily reserved two frequency bands of twice 25 MHz: • 890 MHz to 915 MHz from mobile to the network, • 935 MHz to 960 MHz from base stations to the mobiles for use by cellular systems. By 1990, a newly allocated band of twice 75 MHz (1710 MHz to 1785 MHz for uplink and 1805 MHz to 1880 MHz for downlink) was formed for the Digital Communication System which is a version of GSM suited to the 1800 MHz frequency band. This application was initiated in the United Kingdom. Furthermore FCC has granted band of twice 60 MHz (1850 MHz to 1910 MHz for uplink and 1930 MHz to 1990 MHz for downlink) devoted to GSM networks. Two new frequency bands are supported: • the Extended GSM 900 band or E-GSM = P-GSM + 2x10 MHz, • the Railway GSM 900 band for Railways companies or R-GSM = E-GSM + 2x4 MHz.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

2-9

January, 2000

GSM History GSM Benefits Advantages of the GSM standard

Digital Advantages

$

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Worldwide market

Technology low cost

High resistance to interferences

Open system

Transmission data rate

Roaming Transmission Security

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

GSM History

2-10

The features and benefits expected in the GSM were: • superior speech quality (equal to or better than the existing analog cellular technology), • low terminal and services costs, • a high level of security (confidentiality and fraud prevention), • international roaming (under one subscriber directory number), • support of low power hand-portable terminals, • variety of new services and network facilities. It was a logical consequence of the prevailing reality that a measure of Inter-working compatibility with the services offered by other existing telecommunication networks was sought. In particular, the basis for the services in GSM standard can be found in the ISDN concept.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

2-10

January, 2000

GSM History GSM Standard Spread: Sales 300 250

60 Million users

Million users

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

70 50 40 30 20

PE/TRD/GR/0101

150 100 50

10 0

200

0

1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997

12.01/EN

January, 2000

dec 92 dec 93 dec 94 dec 95 dec 96 dec 97 dec 98

areas/ countries 7 18 41 67 97 105 110

dec 99

137

1996

1997

1998

13 34 65 113 189 233 240

customers (millions) 0.25 1.4 4.5 12.5 33 66 140

370

220

networks

1999

GSM History

2000

2001

Source: IDC Feb 98 GSM MoU Feb 98

2-11

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

2-11

January, 2000

GSM History Development of the GSM Standard

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

End 1999: 220 millions of subscribers 370 networks in 137 countries

Countries without GSM Network(s)

2005: Between 700 million and 1 billion expected. PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

GSM History

2-12

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

2-12

January, 2000

GSM History Explosive Growth in Wireless Data

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

1998 Data 70%

Data 4%

Voice 30% Voice 96%

2005

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

GSM History

2-13

Fixed data networks have been growing rapidly for the past 15 years. The PC or work station attached to a LAN has become the de-facto working environment. LANs connected to LANs on other sites around the world allow companies to improve communications and share data. With the advent of the internet people have become used to using a computer not only for work but for their personal lives or as a source of entertainment. Today’s wireless networks were designed primarily for voice, with a small data capability. As more and more people are using data applications, the wireless market needs to progress to provide data-on the-move and liberate users from the need to find an ethernet cable or a telephone jack. The Future Imagine writing a report on the train on the way home, your secretary rings to say the boss wants a video conference NOW!. He comes on line, and tells you the report must be out tonight, with photos of the new product which you can get from the Web. While still talking to the boss, you connect to the Web, down load some files, attach them to your report and send it to a defined group of people. All on the move. This scenario will require considerable more than the 9.6 kbps or 14.4 kbps offered in GSM today. Europe’s GSM operators currently see 2 to 3% of traffic as data. But enhancements to GSM, such as HSCSD, EDGE and GPRS will bring high data rates and get the users used to using data applications from a wireless terminal.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

2-13

January, 2000

GSM History Increasing GSM Data Rates

UMTS

photo web

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

E/GPRS

video clip

report

video report clip

photo

ISDN

e-mail web

PSTN

e-mail

web e-mail

GSM 0

video report clip

photo

10 sec

video report clip

photo photo

web

1 min

report

10 min

video clip

1 hour

Transmission Time

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

GSM History

2-14

GSM today We can currently use a data terminal attached to an MS to connect to any standard data service provided by the PSTN, ISDN or PDN networks as long as the network accepts a data rate of 9.6 kbps and the IWF is equipped. This includes access to the Web, e-mail, fax etc.. Use of these facilities is generally limited due to the speed of the communication. Internet use is expensive and slow due to the limited data rate and the circuit switched nature of the GSM system. GSM 2+ HSCSD allows 14.4 kbps in one TS as from 1Q99 and multiple timeslots in the future. It is however, still a circuit switched system which will supply expensive connections unless the operators pricing schemes are imaginative. It will help those who use data over GSM today and encourage others to use the services but it does involve a capacity penalty for the network.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

2-14

January, 2000

GSM History Mobile Data Technology Evolution 2M

intranet

30 min delay

t cke a p

throughput kbps

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

1M

Mobile Mobile Data Data Rate Rate Explosion Explosion in in Next Next 44 Years Years

alternative: A2 100 k

64 k

it cu cir

10 k

9.6 SMS

1k

HSCSD 14.4 GPRS

1998

1999

EDGE

2000

2001

UMTS

2002

timeframe

FTSE -100 inde x

GPRS = General Packet Radio Service HSCSD = High Speed Circuit Switched Data EDGE = Enhanced Data rate for Gsm Evolution UMTS = Universal Mobile Telecomunication System PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

GSM History

2-15

Up to V10* the data services were limited to 9.6 kbps. A new service has been standardized in ETSI to reach 14.4 kbps user rate (AUIR) on one TS. This enhancement is a part of a global strategy aimed at offering higher data rates. This new data rate is the result of a new channel coding on the radio interface. The BSS provides two modes: • transparent data service, • non transparent data service, using RLP protocol between MS and IWF.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

2-15

January, 2000

GSM History General Packet Radio Service

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

IP (Internet/Intranet)

GPRS PLMN

X.25 PSPDN

Corporate Intranet

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

GSM History

2-16

GPRS is the first major revolution in GSM data, providing speeds over 100 kbit/s on a pseudo-packet switched radio interface and a real packet switched NSS. This will encourage users to connect to high-speed applications across the wireless network and optimises the network resources for data transmission. There are however some limitations and the first implementations will have mobility constraints. However, it is likely to attract users to internet type services and provides operators with a natural migration path towards 3G systems.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

2-16

January, 2000

GSM History GPRS and EDGE Enhanced Data rate for Gsm Evolution "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

New highly spectrum-efficient modulation for higher bit rates GMSK modulation replaced with 8-Phase Shift Keying: throughput x 3 Applicable to both HSCSD and GPRS Rates expected to reach 300 kbps (E-HSCSD) and 380 kbps (E-GPRS)

2000

UMTS EDGE 170

GPRS HSCSD

circuit

14,4 1

12.01/EN

packet

43,2

GSM

PE/TRD/GR/0101

384 380 300

10

January, 2000

100

1000

10000

speed kbps log scale

GSM History

2-17

Enhanced Data rate for Gsm Evolution or EDGE is often referred to in GPRS context as the combination of the two technologies is seen by some groups in the mobile industry as an alternative for UMTS. This makes EDGE an alternative for operators without an UMTS license who wish to offer medium-speed mobile data services. EDGE is being defined for both GPRS and GSM data services. EDGE is a redefinition of the GSM modulation and coding scheme from GMSK to 8-PSK. It gives up to three times higher throughput compared to GSM, using the same bandwidth. This will enable end-user data rates of maximum 48 kbps per Time Slot for GPRS and 28.8 kbps per TS for GSM services. By combining multiple TSs as with GPRS, data rates of 384 kbps can be achieved.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

2-17

January, 2000

GSM History

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Universal Mobile Telecommunication System ✔ Wireless office - Business – Tele conference – Sales order placement – Files transfer – Intranet services ✔ Travel - Car Centric Application – Video and graphic oriented navigation tool – Traffic intelligent information system – Emergency services – Location based yellow pages

30 min delay

alternative: A2

✔ Entertainment / Education / Personal Communication – Video/music on demand – Interactive games / Tele-tourism – Virtual school – Video telephony

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

GSM History

2-18

UMTS, or more precisely IMT2000, will at first provide a capacity advantage for wireless data networks that become overcrowded. But it has to provide more than that. The higher data rates will allow applications such as video and multimedia to be a real option from a wireless terminal. And, the more open architecture will provide a service environment allowing a wide range of services to be developed by operators and service specialists. Total global roaming is one of the objectives of the specifications. UMTS will take over from GSM 2+ systems to provide higher capacity and data rates. This will allow new applications to be developed but will require new terminals. The most obvious scenario is for existing GSM operators to migrate through GSM 2+ to GSM/UMTS hybrid networks.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

2-18

January, 2000

GSM History Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

2-19

January, 2000

GSM History Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

2-20

January, 2000

Basic Network Overview

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Section 3

Basic Network Overview

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Basic Network Overview

3-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

3-1

January, 2000

Basic Network Overview

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Objectives

After completing this lesson you will be able to: • List the 3 sub-systems of a GSM system and their interfaces. • List the different equipment in each GSM sub-system.

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Basic Network Overview

3-2

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

3-2

January, 2000

Basic Network Overview Traffic/Signaling

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Traffic «bla bla bla...»

Signaling

« RING ! » riiiiing

Network

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Basic Network Overview

3-3

The network can carry two types of information: • Traffic: it concerns all the «user to user» information. It can be voice as well as data. • Signaling: the network also requires to carry information for its own working. Their purposes are numerous: traffic data routing, maintenance, security... These data are usually not visible from user’s point of view. There exists several signaling types: • PTS (Per-Trunk Signaling): signaling and voice component are transmitted on the same facility. PTS requires the voice component to be completely built, even if the call can’t be completed. • CCS (Common Channel Signaling): two separate paths are used for information transfer (one for traffic, another for all-related signaling information). Thus, CCS allows the voice component to be built separately which allows resources to be saved. For instance, no voice facilities would be assigned to the call if the dialed number is busy. GSM works with CCS(#7)

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

3-3

January, 2000

Basic Network Overview Network Overview

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

BTS

NSS

BSS BSC

PSTN

MSC

MS

OMC-R PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OSS

OMC-S

Basic Network Overview

3-4

A GSM system is basically designed as a combination of three major subsystems: the Network SubSystem (NSS), the radio subsystem called the Base station SubSystem (BSS), and the Operation SubSystem (OSS). The Network SubSystem (NSS) includes the equipment and functions related to end-to-endcalls, management of subscribers, mobility, and interfaces with the fixed network (PSTN). It is built on the switch of the system called Mobile-services Switching Center (MSC). The Base station SubSystem (BSS) includes the equipment and functions related to the management of the connection on the radio path. It mainly consists of Base Transceiver Stations (BTS) communicating with the Mobile Station (MS) and one Base Station Controller (BSC) managing the flow of information between the BTSs and the MSC. The Operation SubSystem (OSS) mainly contains Operation and Maintenance Center for NSS (OMC-S) and Operation and Maintenance Center devoted to the BSS (OMC-R). It is connected to all equipment in the switching system and to the BSC (BTSs are not connected to the OSS). Any mobile network or PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network) is related to a public fixed network, commonly to the PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

3-4

January, 2000

Basic Network Overview Mobile Station

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Mobile Station

SIM Card

Global GSM Mobility Card The Smart Card to use

=

Handset

Battery

battery

+

+ f153454

GSM

2W jmhfod kgdjipj

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Basic Network Overview

3-5

The Mobile Station (MS) is composed of three parts: • the handset includes the radio equipment (receiver-transmitter) and the Man-Machine Interface (MMI), • the SIM card (Subscriber Identity Module-card): this smart card allows the identification of any subscriber (not only of his equipment) by the network. In particular, he can borrow any mobile without changing anything from the network point of view since he keeps the same SIM-card, • the battery.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

3-5

January, 2000

Basic Network Overview SIM-Card and GSM Mobile Equipment

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

SIM-Card

=

Global GSM Mobility Card The Smart Card to use

+

Calling line 0609225831

GSM Contains: - IMSI

Subscriber knows - Called party number = MS-ISDN - PIN

Handset PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Basic Network Overview

3-6

The GSM committee has introduced an important powerful innovation by using a Smart Card in conjunction with a mobile telephone. Thus GSM subscribers are provided with a Subscriber Identity Module card (SIM-Card) with its unique identification at the very beginning of the service. The subscriber is identified within the system when he inserts the SIM-Card in the mobile equipment and switches it on. This provide a considerable amount of flexibility to the subscribers since they can use any GSM-specified mobile equipment. With the SIM-Card the idea of "personal communication" is already realized: the user only needs to take his smart card on a trip. You can rent a mobile equipment unit at the destination, even in other country, and insert your own SIM-Card. Any call you make will be charged to your home GSM account. Also the GSM system is able to reach you at the mobile unit you are currently using. The Mobile Station (MS) includes radio equipment and the man machine interface (MMI) that a subscriber needs in order to access the services provided by the GSM network. Mobile Stations can be installed in vehicles or can be portable or hand-held stations. The mobile station includes provisions for data communication as well as voice. Mobile Stations transmit and receive messages to and from the GSM over the air interface to establish and continue connection through the system. Each mobile station has an International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) that is permanently stored in the mobile unit. Upon request, the MS sends this number over the signaling channel to the network. The IMEI is used to identify mobile units that are reported stolen or operating incorrectly.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

3-6

January, 2000

Basic Network Overview The SIM-Card Functions Credit Card Size

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

µ SIM-Card

Global GSM Mobility Card The Smart Card to use

15 mm 25 mm

GSM

Permanent data: - Unique mobile subscriber identity through IMSI number, - Authentication parameter Ki, - Authentication algorithm A3, - Generating encryption key Kc algorithm A8.

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Microchip with stored user information

Removable data: - Temporary Mobile Subscriber Number, - Location Area Identification. Basic Network Overview

3-7

The SIM-Card is a removable smart card, the size of a credit card, and contains an integrated circuit chip with a microprocessor, random access memory, and read-only memory. Many MSs use the µ SIM-Card which can be snapped out of the credit card SIM, if required. When a mobile users want to make a call, they insert their SIM-Card and provide their Personal Identity Number (PIN), which is compared with a PIN stored within the SIM-CARD. The PIN can also be permanently bypassed by the subscribers if authorized by the service provider. Disabling the PIN code simplifies the call setup but reduces the protection of the user's account in the event of a stolen SIM-CARD.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

3-7

January, 2000

Basic Network Overview Subscriber Identification

IMSI

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Nature

International Mobile Subscriber Identity

Mobile Station Integrated Services Digital Network Nb

Conformity with E212

Similar to ISDN, Conformity with E164/E213

Identify a PLMN worldwide

MCC

MNC

Meaning

Mobile Country Code

Mobile Network Code

Nb. digits

3

2

Format

MS - ISDN

Identify the subscriber of a PLMN

H1 H2

MSIN

x x x ......... x x x

Mobile Subscriber Ident. Nb H1 H2 = Identity of HLR within the home PLMN

max 10

National Significant Mobile Number

CC

NDC

M1 M2

SN

xx xx xx xx

Country National Mobile Subscriber Code (national definition) (where Destination subscription Code * M1 M2 = nbr of logical HLR has been made)

1 to 3

2 to 4

total max 15

* This code does not identify a geographical area but an operator PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Basic Network Overview

3-8

The International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) is the primary identification of the subscriber within the GSM network and is permanently assigned to him. The Mobile Subscriber ISDN Number (MSISDN) is the number that the calling party dials in order to reach the GSM subscriber. It is used by the land networks to route calls toward an appropriate GSM network. MSISDN is stored in HLR.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

3-8

January, 2000

Basic Network Overview

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Mobile Identification

PE ED TY OV PR AP

TAC Type Approval Code

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

FAC

SNR

SP

Serial number

(SPare)

Final Assembly Code

Basic Network Overview

3-9

Stored inside the Mobile Equipment. Used to replace IMSI or TMSI when both are unavailable (example: Emergency calls without SIM-Card) or when required by the network (for maintenance). Can be used for EIR database updating (when existing): • TAC = 6 digits describing the type of equipment, • FAC = 2 digits for identification of the factory, • SNR = 6 digits for the serial number of the device.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

3-9

January, 2000

Basic Network Overview MS Classmark

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Classmark

Power classes

Revision level (Phase 1, 2, 2+)

Class

RF power Encryption algorithm (A5/1,A5/2) Frequency (900/1800/1900) Short message

1 2

8 W*

3

5W

4

2 W**

5 * ** PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

GSM 900

GSM 1800

GSM 1900

1 W**

1 W**

0.25 W

0.25 W

4W

4W

0.8 W Typical value for car mounted Typical value for handheld

Basic Network Overview

3-10

The type of MS must be given to the NSS at the beginning of each new connection, because this type can change between calls. The subscriber may insert this SIM-Card into another Mobile Equipment (ME). The classmark of each MS can contain up to five parameters: • revision level, • RF power capability, • encryption algorithm: A5/1, A5/2, • frequency capability: P-GSM (2 x 25 MHz), E-GSM (2 x 35 MHz), R-GSM MHz), GSM 1800, GSM 1900,

(2 x 4

• short message capability. This classmark is sent when the system establishes the radio link between MS and the Base Transceivers Stations. The power class information is the maximum power the MS is able to transmit and is used by the network for several procedures: selection, power control, handover.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

3-10

January, 2000

Basic Network Overview

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Trends in Mobile Station

Hands-free

Pocket

Fax PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

Booster 2W 5W 2W 8W

Dual-band 900-1800 900-1900

PC

Organizer January, 2000

Data

Basic Network Overview

Java 3-11

Trends for MS are: • Hands-free (2 W + booster 5 W). • Increasing autonomy: - idle mode: 40 hours to 140 hours, - communication mode: 4 hours to 15 hours, • Supplementary features (e.g. display of calling number). • Additional features (e.g. voice recognition). • Connection with terminals for data transmission: - Modem on PCMCIA board for Laptop PC. - Modem integrated. • Dual-band terminal (GSM 900/1800 MHz). • Radio organizer (Nokia 9000). • Versatile terminal (under JAVA softwares): fax, internet, pager, organizer.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

3-11

January, 2000

Basic Network Overview BSS Architecture

MSC

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

A Interface

Radio Interface

TCU S2000H&L BTS

NSS

Ater Interface

Public Telephone Network

BSC

OMC-R

Abis Interface

MS

S8000 Outdoor BTS Radio Interface

OMN Interface

S8000 Indoor BTS

Sun StorEdge A5000

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

BSS January, 2000

Basic Network Overview

MS 3-12

The Base Station SubSystem (BSS) is a set of equipment (aerials, transceivers and a controller) that is viewed by the Mobile Switching Center through a single A interface as being the entity responsible for communicating with mobile telephones or Mobile Stations (MSs) in a certain area. The radio equipment of a BSS may be composed of one or more cells, such a BSS may contain one or more Base Transceiver Stations (BTSs). The interface between the BSC and the BTSs is called an Abis interface. The BSS includes two types of equipment: • the Base Transceiver Station (BTS functionally includes also the TRAU) in contact with the mobile stations through the radio interface, • the BSC, the latter being in contact with the Mobile Switching Center. A BSS contains only one Base Station Controller (BSC). The function split is basically between a transmission equipment, the BTS, and the BSC.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

3-12

January, 2000

Basic Network Overview NSS Architecture EIR

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

AuC

PSTN

BSC

MSC BSC

VLR

HLR

MSC

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Basic Network Overview

3-13

BSCs of a same area are connected to a switch. In a GSM system this switch is called MSC (Mobile Switching Center). MSCs are connected to each others. Usually, each MSC is associated to four databases. The Visitor Location Register (VLR) memorizes information about the subscribers physically present in a geographic area. If a subscriber leaves this area, this information is stored in the VLR of another MSC. Each Home Location Register (HLR) is related to a precise number of subscribers. The information present in a subscriber’s HLR are quite similar to these contained in the VLR of the area where he is but, here, this information is static. Thus the VLR stands for a copy of the HLR more easily available (the VLR and the MS are in the same area). They are always linked, since the HLR memorizes the identity number of the VLR where it can find its subscriber. Authentication Center (AuC): Radio channel use sets a problem of communication safety. In particular operators have to pay attention to the fraudulent resources use. Therefore the network is provided with a system of user authentication. The Equipment Identity Register (EIR) is a list of all the Mobile Equipment: it contains valid and invalid mobile equipment. When a communication comes from the PSTN to a given subscriber, it enters the network in the MSC that contains the subscriber’s HLR. This MSC is called GMSC (Gateway MSC).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

3-13

January, 2000

Basic Network Overview Check Your Learning

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

1- How many sizes of SIM-Card are there?

2- What is an IMSI? a MSISDN? an IMEI?

3- What is a PIN code?

4- Is it possible for a given subscriber to have several MSISDN?

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Basic Network Overview

3-14

1- How many sizes of SIM-Card are there?

2- What is an IMSI? a MSISDN? an IMEI?

3- What is a PIN code?

4- Is it possible for a given subscriber to have several MSISDN?

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

3-14

January, 2000

Basic Network Overview Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

3-15

January, 2000

Basic Network Overview Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

3-16

January, 2000

Services

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Section 4

PE/TRD/GR/0101

Services

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Services

4-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

4-1

January, 2000

Services Objectives

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

This section explores the services that are provided in a GSM network. After completing this section you will be able to: • Relate the services that can be offered to GSM subscribers

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Services

4-2

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

4-2

January, 2000

Services Teleservices 1 - Telephony

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Hello Speaking

Originated call

1

Speaking Hello

Terminated call

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

1

Services

4-3

Teleservices cover regular telephony, emergency calls, voice messaging, and short messages handling. The most important service provided by GSM users is telephony which enables bi-directional speech calls to be placed between GSM users and any telephone subscriber who is reachable through the general telephony network. Fixed telephone subscribers worldwide as well as mobile network subscribers or subscribers of specific networks connected to a public telephone network can be reached. Before either Mobile Originated or Mobile Terminated calls can be established, the mobile telephone must be switched on and registered into the system.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

4-3

January, 2000

Services Teleservices

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

2 - Emergency Call

Global GSM Mobility Card The Smart Card to use

Emergency 112

GSM

Do not require a SIM-Card while "112" is invoked PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Services

4-4

To place an emergency call enter 112 followed by SEND. Additional means to place such call are also allowed by a dedicated button. The Mobile Telephone supports the initiation of an emergency call without a SIM present in it, regardless of the call being accepted or not by the network. Note that calls to national emergency services may be standard for the country of the serving GSM network (number 17 to call the police in France, number 911 to make an emergency call in U.S.A.). However, with the exception of code "112", these are not treated within the GSM network as "teleservice emergency call" and would require a valid IMSI.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

4-4

January, 2000

Services Teleservices 3 - Short Message Cell Broadcast

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

me ssa ge A

me ssa ge

eA sag me s

B

Information Provider A

eA sag mes B ge ssa me

ge sa es m

m

mess age B

B

ge sa es

Information Provider B

A

GSM Network PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Services

4-5

The cell broadcast enables an Information Provider to submit short messages for broadcasting to a specified area within the GSM network. The cell broadcast service has the following features: • The cell broadcast message is sent (on control channels) in a limited area, defined by the originator of the message, by agreement with the GSM Operator. • The mobile telephone only receive the broadcast message in idle mode. • The short message function running in the mobile is able not to store broadcast messages which are not wanted or which have already been received. • The mobile telephone does not send acknowledgment. • The GSM network continuously sends cell broadcast messages so that all such messages are sent in turn, an then repeated. On the other hand, the cycle time is short enough for important messages to be received by travelers (subscribers) moving through a group of cells. • The maximum length of each cell broadcast message will be 93 characters and GSM specifications allows up to 15 of these 93 character messages treated as segment of a longer message.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

4-5

January, 2000

Services Teleservices 4 - Short Message Service

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Radio PLMN

SMS-MO/ PP

SMS-SC Radio PLMN

SMS-MT/ PP

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Services

Copyright © 1996 Northern Telecom

4-6

Short Message Service (SMS) allows the point to point transmission of a short message to/from MS, using their IMSI. A short message is an alphanumeric string that can be up to 160 characters long (140 octets). Two different types of short message are defined: • short message MT/PP (Mobile Terminated / Point to Point), • short message MO/PP (Mobile Originated / Point to Point). Point to point messages may be sent or received when the MS is engaged on a call (voice or data), or in idle mode. However, messages which overlap the boundary of such a call, or during a handover, may be lost, in which case they will be sent again. Messages may be input to the SC from a fixed network customer by means of a suitable telecommunication service either from the fixed network or from a mobile network customer. An acknowledgment indicates that the GSM Network has successfully transferred the message to the mobile telephone or the SC. Optionally, the SC may offer final delivery notification to the originator. This delivery report indicates whether this particular message has been correctly received at the receiving station or not, to the extent that the SC is able to establish this. It does not indicate whether the message has been read. If the delivery report is negative, it includes the failure cause. The delivery report is sent to the originator, if reachable, as soon as the information is available.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

4-6

January, 2000

Services Teleservices 5 - Fax

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Alternate Speech and Fax:

Automatic fax:

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Services

4-7

Fax transmissions are possible via a PLMN only with a Fax-group3 (14.4 kbps). Two modes are available: • manual mode allows to switch alternatively from voice transmission to fax transmission, • automatic mode allows to send and receive a fax without any human intervention; however, voice transmission is impossible in this mode.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

4-7

January, 2000

Services Teleservices

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

6 - User's Data Call Features

Teleservices voice

PE/TRD/GR/0101

Embodied bearer treatments for radio transmission

Teleservices Fax G3, SMS

Cable that bears data

Data / Fax kit adaptation

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Services

4-8

Connections can be made with a suitable data/fax kit adaptation either to other Mobile Station or to other data users on circuit-switched (PSTN). The slide gives an example of a suitable data/fax kit and a computer that are directly connected to the MS. In the case of making a Fax-call to a PSTN subscriber, the GSM network automatically selects the suitable modem for the link to the similar modem at the remote end.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

4-8

January, 2000

Services Teleservices 7 - Voice Messaging Please leave a message after the tone

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Busy

Forward to voice mail box

1

Voice mail box

GSM network You have 3 voices messages...

Voice message server

Retrieving the voice messages

Warming up... PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Services

4-9

Another service derived from telephony is voice messaging. Many operators offer it as a basic feature. It enables a voice message to be stored for later retrieval by the mobile recipient, either because he was not reachable at time of the call or because the calling party choose to access the voice mailbox of the GSM subscriber directly.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

4-9

January, 2000

Services Supplementary Services 1 - Line Identification

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Calling Party CoLP CLIR


Calling Line Identification

Cnted line 0609173957

presentation

(CLIP)

restriction

(CLIR)


Connected Line Identification presentation

(CoLP)

restriction

(CoLR)

Called Party CLIP CoLR

Calling line 0609225831


Calling Name Presentation (CNAP) PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Services

4-10

Calling line identification presentation (CLIP) provides the ability to indicate the ISDN number of the calling party with possible additional address information to the called party. This identity is provided to the called subscriber before answering, thus enabling him to make the decision of whether to take the call or not. Calling line identification restriction (CLIR) enables the calling party not to send any address information to the called party. Connected line identification presentation (CoLP) provides the GSM caller with the phone number he has reached. Connected line identification restriction (CoLR) enables the called party not to send its phone number to the calling party. Calling Name Presentation (CNAP) provides the calling party name instead of the ISDN number. However, this service is not yet specified by GSM recommendations.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

4-10

January, 2000

Services Supplementary Services

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

2 - Call Transfer and Call Forwarding

PE/TRD/GR/0101

 unconditional

(CFU)

 on busy

(CFB)

 on no reply

(CFNRy)

 on not reachable (CFNRc)

12.01/EN

January, 2000

1

Services

2

4-11

Call forwarding unconditional (CFU) allows a called mobile subscriber to have the network send all incoming calls, which are addressed to the called mobile subscriber’s directory number, to another directory number. Call forwarding on mobile subscriber busy (CFB): allows a called mobile subscriber to have the network send the incoming calls, which are addressed to the called mobile subscriber’s directory number and which meet mobile subscriber busy, definition to another directory number. Call forwarding on no reply (CFNRy) allows an called mobile subscriber to have the network send the incoming calls, which are addressed to the subscriber’s directory number and which meet no reply, to another directory number. Call forwarding on MS not reachable (CFNRc) provides for a mobile subscriber to have the network send all incoming calls, which are addressed to the called mobile directory number and meet the not reachable definition, to another directory number.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

4-11

January, 2000

Services Supplementary Services 3 - Waiting / Hold and Multi Party WAIT 2

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

1

HOLD

1

2

Waiting / Hold:

1

Multi Party:

1

Max = 5 persons

2

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

2

Services

4-12

Call waiting (CW): provides a mobile subscriber with the possibility of being notified of an incoming call while his mobile telephone is in the busy state. Subsequently, the user can either answer, reject, or ignore the incoming call. Both the call waiting and call hold (described further) options are the same as those offered by the PSTN. Call Hold (HOLD): allows a served mobile subscriber to interrupt communication on an existing call and then subsequently, if desired, to reestablish communication. Multi party service (MPTY): • This Supplementary Service provides a mobile subscriber with the ability to have a multi-connection call, in other words a simultaneous communication with more than one party. • A precondition for the multi-party service is that the served mobile subscriber is in control of one active call and one call on hold, both calls having been answered. In this situation the served mobile subscriber can request the network to begin the multiParty service. • Once a multiParty call is active, remote parties may be added, disconnected or separated (i.e.. removed from the multiParty call but remain connected to the served mobile subscriber). • The maximum number of remote parties is 5.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

4-12

January, 2000

Services Supplementary Services

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

4 - Call Barring

 Outgoing (BAOC)  Outgoing international (BOIC)  Outgoing international except home PLMN country (BOIC-exHC)

 Incoming (BAIC)  Incoming when roaming outside (BIC-Roam)

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Services

4-13

Barring of all outgoing call (BAOC): makes it possible for a mobile subscriber to prevent all outgoing calls. Barring outgoing international calls (BOIC): allows a mobile subscriber to prevent all attempted outgoing calls. BOIC except those directed to the home PLMN country (BOIC-exHC) Barring of all incoming international (BAIC). Barring of all incoming calls when roaming outside the home GSM network country (BIC-Roam): makes it possible for a mobile subscriber to prevent all incoming calls that would otherwise be terminated at his directory number. This only applies to the case when the mobile subscriber roams outside his home GSM network.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

4-13

January, 2000

Services Supplementary Services 5 - Call Completion (CCBS)

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

NEW!

Unable to place a call.

BUSY ...

Speaking

1

Speaking

2

This call in state

Reinitiate the call

Ring !

Ring !

1

Idle

SPEAKING

Call is established

HELLO 1

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Services

4-14

Completion of calls to busy subscribers (CCBS): allows a calling mobile subscriber who encounters a busy called subscriber to be notified by the system operator when the busy called subscriber becomes free and have the operator re-initiate the call if the caller so desires. This feature has to be supported by both the originating and the terminating networks.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

4-14

January, 2000

Services Supplementary Services 6 - Advice of Charge

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Advice of Charge Information (AoCI) information on progress of the cost of the call

Advice of Charge Charging (AoCC)

Insert a SIM credit Card Completion of call need charging

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Services

4-15

Advice of charge Information (AoCI): informs the user of the real-time information on progress of the cost of the call. Advice of charge Charging (AoCC): the mobile may be a money-operated mobile telephone or a standard mobile station that can display the charging information and can accept either coins or charge a credit-card.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

4-15

January, 2000

Services Intelligent Network Services IN and CAMEL

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Main IN Services:

☎ ☎ ☎ ☎ ☎ ☎

Personal Number Virtual Private Network (VPN) Sponsored Cell & Call Prepaid Calling Location Inquiry Geo Zone

The aim of the CAMEL (Customized Application for Mobile network Enhanced Logic) is to provide GSM network operators with the ability to create specific services in their home network, and export these services to their subscribers when roaming outside the home network. CAMEL introduces the ability to provide location dependent IN type of services to mobiles subscribers.

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Services

4-16

The Intelligent Network or IN is a switching network concept. Its idea is to make GSM services system an open system; that is to say new services modules can always be added on the previous system without changing its architecture. Basic call processing is performed by the switch and when it recognizes that a call requires an IN service, this service processing is provided by another entity, located either in the same site or in a remote site. This concept allows to implement numerous new services such as: • Personal Number: gives the GSM subscribers more control over incoming calls, • Virtual Private Network: a set of corporate services that enables similar functions to those of private network, among a group of GSM subscribers, • Sponsored Cell and Call: allows a third party, as sponsor, to play announcement at the beginning of the call, • Prepaid Calling: allows subscriber to pay in advance for the calls they will make. To communicate between Intelligent Network platforms, GSM specifications define CAMEL (Customized Application for Mobile network Enhanced Logic). The aim of the CAMEL is to provide network operators with the ability to create specific services in their home network, and export these services to their subscribers when roaming outside the home network. CAMEL introduces the ability to provide location dependent IN type of services to mobiles subscribers: Location Enquiry and Geo Zone.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

4-16

January, 2000

Services IN Services: Virtual Private Network Closed User Group

25 c/min c 1 4 7

*

2 5 8 o+

4197 4446

25 c/min

Location & Time dependant routing

4197

** 0 # 7PRS8TUV9WXY 4GHI 5JKL 6MNO 1 2ABC3DEF

Copyright © 1996 Northern Telecom

Corporate Numbering Plan

Wireline Access

Lower rate for on-net calls

c 1 4

London

7

*

2 5 8 o+

3 6 9

Bristol

Copyright © 1996 Northern Telecom

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Location & Time dependant screening

3 6 9

X

5696

Copyright © 1996 Northern Telecom

Copyright © 1996 Northern Telecom

X

5696

25 c/min 4446 Speed Dialing

50 c/min

924 63256 Copyright © 1996 Northern Telecom

Copyright © 1996 Northern Telecom

Copyright © 1996 Northern Telecom

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Services

4-17

Virtual Private Network (VPN) is a set of corporate services that enables private network like features among a group of GSM subscribers and wireline users; thus, corporations can distribute GSM phones to their employees, providing them with many of the services that they use on their existing corporate network: •

Private Numbering Plan: subscribers can reach all members of the corporate private network, GSM as well as wireline, by dialing their usual internal number instead of the longer, harder to remember, public number.

•

Off Net Calling: subscribers are allowed to call public numbers that are outside the corporate private network.

•

Forced On Net Calling: when a subscriber makes a call to a member of the corporate private network using their public number (he must also be provisioned with Off Net Calling), the feature recognizes the call as a private call and treats it as such (appropriate billing, etc.).

•

White (/Black) List Screening: subscribers with White (/ Black) List, can only (/ can not) place calls to numbers listed on it.

•

Geographic Routing: specific numbers can be configured to route calls differently depending on the location of the caller.

•

Time Screening (/ Routing): some specific numbers can be configured to restrict access (/ to route calls differently) depending on the time of the day, day of the week, day of the year or whether the day is a statutory holiday.

•

Privileged Routing: specific numbers can be configured to route calls differently depending on the identity of the caller.

• Closer user group (CUG): provides the possibility for a group of subscribers, connected to the GSM network and or to the PSTN/ISDN, to communicate only among themselves or receive external calls; emergency calls still are available. "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

4-17

January, 2000

Services IN Services: Prepaid Calling

Las cos t call Newts $ 0.5 is $ bala 0 24.5 nce 0

5542 1139 1464 228 99494 6/91

6/99

Copyright © 1996 Northern Telecom

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

SCOOBY DOO

Your account balance is $ 24.50

Copyright © 1996 Northern Telecom

Account status enquiry and notification

Multiple recharging options

Copyright © 1996 Northern Telecom

RANK1ONE VALID DATES

✓ Multiple Tariff Plans ✓ Tariffs using fixed charge, CC, NC, distance, time & day, roaming charges... ✓ Possible language selection by subscriber ✓ Bulk account loading for easy provisioning

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Flexible features for easy service packaging

Services

4-18

Prepaid Calling enables subscribers to control their phone call expenditure, by deciding how much to spend and limiting themselves to that amount if required. Subscribers pay in advance for their calls and get their calls released when the balance becomes null; thus, subscribers get a cost-control (useful for rental companies, hotels, special events, parents wanting to give mobiles to their children). With Prepaid Calling, subscribers are able to: • make and receive calls (service is totally transparent to the subscriber during normal use), • be notified of a low balance or a pending expiry date (if the threshold is reached, the subscriber can be notified by warning tones before the call is taken down), • use Voice Mail, • query the status of their account at any time from any phone and recharge their account. The subscriber can also be informed of his account balance and of the cost of his last call, at the end of each call, via a short message. Additionally, the Operator can apply different rates to calls and manage the life of prepaid subscriptions. Nortel’s prepaid solution currently supports all major recharging options, for increased service usage and enhanced customer satisfaction: • automatically, by vouchers (e.g. scratch card), • automatically, by credit card, • manually (through Customer Services), by any means of payment. "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

4-18

January, 2000

Services

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

Today, up to 50 % off on handbags !

Sponsors can target specific customers by sponsoring some of their calls...

January, 2000

Copyright © 1996 Northern Telecom

Your next two minute calling is brought to you free today by The leather Shop located on first level of the Central Shopping Centre. Come and visit us Today, up to 50 % off on handbags !

Sponsors can also change their announcements on the phone

Copyright © 1996 Northern Telecom

...made from specified locations at predefined times of day

Copyright © 1996 Northern Telecom

Calls from this location are sponsored. Today buy one dinner at Bellini’s on Keith Street, near the cinemas, and get one free!

Copyright © 1996 Northern Telecom

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

IN Services: Sponsored Cell & Call

Service can be offered via access code or through subscription

Services

4-19

Sponsored Cell & Call allows a third party (the sponsor) to play a promotional announcement at the beginning of a call and for this service, pays for part of the ongoing call. The main features of Sponsored Cell & Call are: Choice to sponsor the call & choice of sponsor based on one or more of the following: • the calling party location, • the calling party profile (age ...), • time of day, day of week, • destination (emergency, freephone ...). Sponsor can change his announcement on the phone. User can specify certain destinations as not sponsored. User can have the choice of having his call sponsored or not. User can cut through the announcement, but the call is not sponsored. User can be prevented from cutting through the announcement.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

4-19

January, 2000

Services IN Services: Location Inquiry The closest restaurants are:

Copyright © 1996 Northern Telecom

Promotional Informations: call #15

The Palace on 11 Bourke Street Chinese food Phone 55 0407 press 2 to connect

The closest restaurants are: The Tower, Tower Hill, Phone 56 4589, Press 1 to connect

Today’s special at The Anchor is Maine lobster soup

Copyright © 1996 Northern Telecom

The Anchor St Catherine Dock Phonce 56 2548 Press 2 to connect

Be the first ten caller and get a free cocktail !

Cell dependent information

Possible customization of announcement directly by the advertiser

Direct connection to advertisers PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Copyright © 1996 Northern Telecom

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

The Wind Jammer on 132 Flinton Street Sea food Phone 55 1968 press 1 to connect

Services

4-20

Location Inquiry provides GSM subscribers with information on where to locate useful services in their current vicinity. It enables easy connection to any service they are interested in and wish to talk to. However, while GSM subscribers are out of the office or away from home, they do not have access to this information easily e.g. yellow pages, guides. Most of time, they may be even more reliant on this information because they often are in a foreign environment, e.g. in another part of town or out of town. The Location Inquiry service brings in a third party known as the “Advertiser” who seeks to sell their products/services using the operator’s network. Location Inquiry may also list services such as hospitals, doctors, pharmacies, etc. and be promoted as a personal security service. The main features of Location Inquiry are: • location dependent information based on subscriber’s cell, • possible customization of the announcement by the advertiser (special offer of the day ...).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

4-20

January, 2000

Services IN Services: Geo Zone

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

1 - Outgoing Calls

This call is being made outside of your home zone. Wait to complete it or hang-up now.

Copyright © 1996 Northern Telecom C o p y r ig h t © 1996 N o r th e r n T e le c o m

Copyright © 1996 Northern Telecom

Office Zone

Wide Area Cellular

Home Zone

15 c/min

50 c/min

10 c/min

Specific rates applied to calls made from Home/Office zone Multiple zones can be defined

Notification of current zone before call set-up: • when in home/office zone and/or • when out of zones

Different rates applied to calls made from specific locations PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Services

4-21

The main features of the outgoing side of Geo Zone are: • zone dependent tariffing of outgoing calls: - up to 4 zones per subscriber, - each zone has its own tariff, • information on the current zone available to the subscriber via: - announcement or tones at the beginning of the call, - optionally by a display on the mobile (in which case it must support it, which means specific development on the handset).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

4-21

January, 2000

Services IN Services: Geo Zone 2 - Incoming Calls

When you are at home, you are called directly

You are going to be charged 5 c/min for this call.

When you are away from home, you decide if the call is routed to:

Wait to accept it or hang-up now. Copyright © 1996 Northern Telecom

Voice mail Copyright © 1996 Northern Telecom

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Calling the “fixed” number

OR With Notification

Your Caller pays fixed line rate You pay nothing

Copyright © 1996 Northern Telecom

Your Caller pays fixed line rate You pay the “forwarding leg”

Your Caller pays fixed line rate You pay nothing

Notification of current zone before incoming call is connected: when in home/office zone and/or • when out of zones

Fixed network service with built-in mobility PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Services

4-22

The main features of the incoming side of Geo Zone are: • routing of incoming calls according to the subscriber’s location: - if the subscriber is in his Geo Zone, the call is routed to his mobile handset, thus he does not have to pay anything, - if the subscriber is out of his Geo Zone, the call can be either routed to his voicemail, or to his mobile handset; in the last case the subscriber pays for the forwarding leg, • information on the current zone available to the subscriber, when receiving a call via: - announcement or tones before the call is connected.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

4-22

January, 2000

Services Check Your Learning

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

1- What are the three categories of services defined in GSM?

2- What are the two types of short messages?

3- What are the two required pieces of equipment for data exchanges in GSM (one in the MS, the other in the MSC)?

4- What are the user data rates which were selected for GSM?

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Services

4-23

1- What are the three categories of services defined in GSM?

2- What are the two types of short messages?

3- What are the two required pieces of equipment for data exchanges in GSM (one in the MS, the other in the MSC)?

4- What are the user data rates which were selected for GSM?

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

4-23

January, 2000

Services Check Your Learning (continue)

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

5- What is the CLIP supplementary service?

6- What is the CoLP supplementary service?

7- What is the MPTY supplementary service?

8- What is the call forwarding supplementary services?

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

Services

January, 2000

4-24

5- What is the CLIP supplementary service?

6- What is the CoLP supplementary service?

7- What is the MPTY supplementary service?

8- What is the call forwarding supplementary services?

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

4-24

January, 2000

Services Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

4-25

January, 2000

Services Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

4-26

January, 2000

Cellular Principles

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Section 5

PE/TRD/GR/0101

Cellular Principles

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Cellular Principles

5-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

5-1

January, 2000

Cellular Principles Objectives

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Provide an introduction to the concept of cellular radio networks. After completing this lesson you will be able to: • Explain what a radio cell is • List the various types of cells • Explain what a clutter is • Have basic notions on Link Budget • Explain what an Erlang is • Explain what a frequency reuse pattern is • Have basic notions on Link Budget

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Cellular Principles

5-2

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

5-2

January, 2000

Cellular Principles

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Radio Design

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Cellular Principles

5-3

The first step in designing a GSM cellular network consists in dimensioning the cells which are the basic elements of the system. The size of the cell is dependant on several parameters and must be determined on a case per case basis at the implementation stage, even if the preliminary design stage takes few cell models. Both technical and economical aspects influence the design. The first layer of the above drawing indicates that before implementing a network, an operator will list and use his locations as much as possible, for economical reasons. As a result the given position and height of the location will influence the range of the cell. The exact situation and height of the pole and antennas can also be determined or imposed by the microwave links. The marketing requirements are translated into coverage areas with their associated quality of service and traffic needs. The operator is given a limited number of radio channels which leads to limited resources in a given cell, depending on the chosen frequency reuse policy. It appears then that a cell is determined by two factors: one is radio range depending on antenna height, environment, quality of service… and the other is traffic or subscribers per cell.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

5-3

January, 2000

Cellular Principles Erlang Concept

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Erlang is the unit of statistical resource use.

Average number of busy channels during the period of observation (usually, the peak hour). Example: One user speaking on the phone for three minutes out of one hour will need: 3/60 = .05 ERLANG or 50 mErl

Erlang B: At some time some users can need the resource simultaneously: the use of the resource is associated with a blocking rate.

Erlang C: When users request the resource at the same time, instead of rejecting the extra calls, users are requested to wait some time before getting the line. PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Cellular Principles

5-4

The Erlang B formula used to compute the resource number is quite complicated: AN N!

Br = 1+

AN A + ... + N! 1!

A good approximate result can be obtained by using the following formula:

N = A + kA1/2 where: N is the number of resources needed to provide A Erlangs with the Br, Blocking Rate expressed in 10 at power -k: Br = 10-k For Erlang C, the concept of blocking rate is no more used. The calls instead of being rejected, when no resource is available, are held for a given time, queuing is used. That is to say, the user has a probability of waiting more than a given time before getting the line. As an example, using the first formula, 117 resources provide 100 Erlangs at 1% blocking rate. If the approximate formula is used, 117 become 120. When queuing is implemented, 1% blocking is converted into 1% probability of waiting more than 0.1 second or 1‰ probability of waiting more than 0.38 second. Generally the values used for a mobile subscriber are in the 20 to 50 mErl range at 1% to 5% blocking rate.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

5-4

January, 2000

Cellular Principles Fading Example of Field Strength Variation for GSM 1800 -10

Zoom on Short Term Fading Measurement Free Space

-30

Field Strength (dBm)

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

-20

≅ λ/2

-40

±2m -50 -60 -70

Long Term Fading -80 -90 0

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

3500

4000

4500

5000

-100

Distance (m) PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Cellular Principles

5-5

Information exchanged between MS and BTS is transported by means of radio waves which are attenuated, reflected or diffracted, on their path. The received signal is the sum of different signals resulting from these effects, sometimes constructive, sometimes destructive. Free-space loss is calculated using the following formula: Loss (dB) = 32.4 + 20*log(d) + 20*log(f) where d is the distance between BTS and MS expressed in km and f the frequency expressed in MHz. In practice, the radio waves are not in free-space propagation conditions and the term depending on distance can vary from 20*log(d) for free space to 40*log(d) for very dense urban, depending on the environment. Practical expressions of path loss are given here, depending on frequency and environment. They come from several measurements, are statistical and represent the mean variation to which short term and long term fading have to be added:

GSM 900

GSM 1800

Rural (BTS antenna at 100 m)

Urban (BTS antenna at 50 m)

90.7 + 31.8log(d)

123.3 + 33.7log(d)

Rural (BTS antenna at 60 m)

Urban (BTS antenna at 50 m)

100.1 + 33.3log(d)

133.2 + 33.8log(d)

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

5-5

January, 2000

Cellular Principles Coverage or Traffic Limitations TRAFFIC LIMITED AREA (10000 subscriber per km2) "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

COVERAGE LIMITED AREA (-75 dBm at cell edge)

COVERAGE LIMITED AREA (-70 dBm at cell edge) PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Cellular Principles

5-6

At the advent of GSM, subscribers were very few, and the radio resources available in each cell were sufficient to cope with the call requests. As subscriber numbers grew, some dense urban cells became congested, and the need of extra radio resources appeared. The solution was to add extra sites to provide extra channels even if the radio coverage was good enough. This is called cell splitting. For radio coverage, the use of a link budget calculation sheet is necessary. The size of the cell in this case is determined by the signal strength necessary at the edge of the cell. For capacity limited areas, the BTS manages a given maximum number of subscribers. To determine the number of sites necessary to provide the service is simply to divide the amount of subscribers located in the area by the number of subscribers managed by one site.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

5-6

January, 2000

Cellular Principles

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Cell Sectorization

OMNI

TRI

BI PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Cellular Principles

5-7

Three types of site coverage are shown, on the same scale: omni, bi and tri. Each site is equipped with optimum antennas. Sectorization provides higher cell range thus allowing reduction of number of sites and easier frequency reuse.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

5-7

January, 2000

Cellular Principles

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Omnidirectional Site Antennas

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Cellular Principles

5-8

These pictures show one omni antenna as well as an omni site with space diversity. On the right are printed the vertical radiation patterns with no electrical tilt (top) and with electrical tilt (bottom). Mechanical tilt is not used on omni antennas.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

5-8

January, 2000

Cellular Principles

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Bi and Trisectorial Site Antennas

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Cellular Principles

5-9

These two pictures illustrate bi and trisector sites with space diversity.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

5-9

January, 2000

Cellular Principles

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Calculated Cell Coverage (Trisectorial Site)

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Cellular Principles

5-10

This coverage map coming from a trisectorial site, illustrates the statistical representation. It more obviously appears that an hexagon is not sufficient to represent a cell. Some areas can be provided with coverage very far away from the average range of the cell in line of sight conditions which can cause interference.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

5-10

January, 2000

Cellular Principles Calculated Cell Coverage

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

P

2

PE/TRD/GR/0101

1

P’

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Cellular Principles

5-11

To be able to make a GSM call, the first condition is to get sufficient signal strength. But this is not enough, this signal must be understandable by the mobile which means not to receive two similar signals from two different BTS using the same frequency. As an example points P or P’ on the picture may receive good signal from sites 1 and 2, but depending on the relative levels and frequencies, the communication can be performed successfully or not. Interference can occur at the MS side where two or more BTSs having the same frequency are received with similar levels. Similarly at the BTS side when two mobiles communicating with two different BTS can be received by one with similar levels.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

5-11

January, 2000

Cellular Principles

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Clutters

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Cellular Principles

5-12

Radio waves behave differently depending on the environment, and the radio range can vary from few hundred meters to several kilometers. It is then important to classify the different types of environment included in the area to be provided with GSM service. As an example the map presented above shows a city and its surroundings, classified into fourteen types of environment or clutters. A link budget is established for each clutter, defining a specific cell size. Example of Dense Urban clutter Areas within urban perimeter. This includes dense urban areas with dense development where built-up features do not appear distinct from each other. It also includes built-up features of the downtown district with heights below 40 m.

Example of Mean Urban clutter Areas with urban perimeter. The mean urban clutter should have mean street density with no pattern, the major streets are visible, the built-up features appear distinct from each other. Some small vegetation could be included. Average height is below 40 m. "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

5-12

January, 2000

Cellular Principles Link Budget Presentation Parameters

Antenna Gain (65°) 18 dBi

Frequency 1800 MHz Base Height 40.0 m Mobile Height 1,5 m Environment Urban

Jumper Loss 0.5 dB

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Feeder Loss 3 dB

Penetration Factor 15 dB

Sensitivity

Body Loss 3 dB

-110 dBm Coupling system Tx loss 4.5 dB

RXm

Outdoor Minimum Field 95%: -80 dBm

Cable Loss 0 dB

Coverage Range 95%: 810 m

Antenna Gain -2 dB

TX

RX

Output Power 30 dBm

RXd

Sensitivity Max TX Output Power 44.8 dBm

-100 dBm

Options Rx Diversity Gain: 5 dB

Base Station PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Mobile

Overlapping Margin: 0 dB Cellular Principles

5-13

The purpose of the link budget calculation is to determine the range of the cell with given equipment and quality of service in a specific environment. • First of all the technical characteristics of the BTS and the MS are taken into account: output power and input sensitivity as well as the feeder losses and antenna gain on the BTS side and body losses and antenna gain on the MS side. • Secondly, quality of service is specified using various elements: percentage of area covered inside the cell (ex: 95%), indoor penetration losses (ex: 18 dB), overlapping margin (ex: 3 dB). • Thirdly, environment is specified (ex: urban) with antennas height, for both BTS and MS. Radio wave propagation losses are dependent on frequency (GSM 900 or 1800), and environment. This is taken into account in the link budget. The above diagram illustrates all the elements used in the link budget for determining the maximum path loss for the radio waves, from BTS to MS (downlink) and from MS to BTS (uplink). The worst case or lowest path loss allowed will be used to calculate the cell range in the specified conditions.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

5-13

January, 2000

Cellular Principles Cochannel Interference

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Power

Power

Wanted signal

Interfering signal

f1

Frequency

f1

Frequency

Power combined signal The two signals are superimposed

f1 PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Cellular Principles

Frequency 5-14

Cochannel interference occurs when two signals are being transmitted by two different cells on the same frequency and both are received by the same telephone mobile. The two signals are then superimposed, interfering with one another and creating a signal that cannot be recognized.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

5-14

January, 2000

Cellular Principles The Frequency Reuse Distance

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Reuse distance D

Frequency Group A1

Other frequencies

Other frequencies

R

Frequency Group A1

R

Wanted signal Interfering signal

PE/TRD/GR/0101

C I

=

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Cellular Principles

5-15

γ

1æDö

ç 6 èR

C = "useful" signal I = Interfere signal γ = Constant depending on the environment type. Ex:

down-town

γ=4

rural

γ = 2.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

5-15

January, 2000

Cellular Principles Interference Limits

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Ia2 (+41dB) C (0 dB) Ia1 (+9 dB)

Ic (-9 dB)

F1 PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

+ 200 kHz + 400 kHz Cellular Principles

5-16

GSM specifications state that system and equipment must operate with specific ratios of carrier to interference: • C/Ic or useful signal over interfering signal at same frequency may be as low as

9 dB,

• C/Ia1 or useful signal over interfering signal at ± 200 kHz may be as low as

-9 dB,

• C/Ia2 or useful signal over interfering signal at ± 400 kHz may be as low as dB,

-41

• C/Ia3 or useful signal over interfering signal at ± 600 kHz may be as low as dB.

-49

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

5-16

January, 2000

Cellular Principles Frequency Reuse Pattern A4

C3

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Trisectorial Site

A2

Distance of frequency reuse

C1

B2

A4

B4

12.01/EN

January, 2000

A3

C2

B2

B2

C4

C3

C2

4*3 Reuse Pattern of 12 cells

B4

A2

B1

A3

C1

A4

B3

C1

B4

C2

A1

B4 A2

B1

C1

A3

C3

A2

B1

C3

A4

A4

C4

A1

B2

C4

B3

C1

A2

B3

A1

C3

B4

C2

A3

B2

PE/TRD/GR/0101

B1

C3

A2

C4

A1

B4

A4

B3

C1

B2

Cellular Principles

5-17

Channels are reused at regular distance intervals. The mechanism that governs this process is called frequency planning. The slide shows an example of N =12 frequency plan where the available frequencies of a GSM network are placed. This set of 12 cells is called a frequency reuse pattern and is generally used for BCCH frequency plan.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

5-17

January, 2000

Cellular Principles

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Frequency Plan

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Cellular Principles

5-18

A practical example of 4*3 reuse frequency pattern is displayed here, one color represents a frequency group.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

5-18

January, 2000

Cellular Principles Different Types of Cells CONCENTRIC - CELL: macro cell with system coverage limitation inside another macro

EXTENDED - CELL: macro cell with system coverage extension (≤ ≤ 120 km) for coasts...

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

MACRO - CELL: antenna radiating ‘above’ roofs ---> Wide Coverage (≤ ≤ 35 km)

• High sensitivity to interference • Requires "secured" Frequency reuse pattern

PICO-CELL: Antenna inside building ---> Very small coverage

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

MICRO-CELL: Antenna ‘below’ the roofs ---> small coverage

• High isolation from interferences • A few Frequencies intensively reused

Cellular Principles

5-19

As capacity needs increase, various solutions have to be implemented to provide local extra capacity. Micro cells provide coverage to one or several streets as well as indoor coverage improvement. Pico cells provide specific service in given buildings, shopping malls, conference halls… Concentric cells allow provision of extra capacity close to the site by adding TRXs with system limitations reducing their coverage range.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

5-19

January, 2000

Cellular Principles Cell Layering

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Macrocell Antenna

Macrocell Umbrella cell

2 layers model

Microcell Antenna

µ cell 1 µ cell 2

Fast speed vehicle

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Microcell Pedestrian

Slow speed vehicle after direction change

Cellular Principles

5-20

Micro-cells can be seen as an efficient design for mobile network to improve: • indoor propagation, • network capacity. The actual solution consists in creating a two layers model: • macro-cell or ‘umbrella’ cell layer dedicated in priority to fast speed users, • micro-cells layer, dedicated to slow speed mobile (pedestrian, traffic jam).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

5-20

January, 2000

Cellular Principles Frequency Reuse Pattern Exercise

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

A1

PE/TRD/GR/0101

A1

B1

C1

A3

C3

A2

B2

C2

B3

B1

A3

A4

C4

12.01/EN

C1

C3

A2

C2

B2

B3

B4

January, 2000

Cellular Principles

5-21

This exercise depicts the advantages of the frequency reuse pattern assuming the following data for bandwidth, and number of cells, over the same service area to be covered. Assumptions: • Operator bandwidth: 9.6 MHz (48 freq.). • 36 cells (12 tri-sectorial sites). • Channel spacing: 200 kHz. • TDMA: 8 channels per carrier. Questions: What are the number of channels available within this area for these two cases: • 1° case: reuse pattern = 12 cells? • 2° case: reuse pattern = 9 cells?

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

5-21

January, 2000

Cellular Principles Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

5-22

January, 2000

Radio Interface

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Section 6

PE/TRD/GR/0101

Radio Interface

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Radio Interface

6-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-1

January, 2000

Radio Interface Objectives

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Provides an introduction to the Radio Interface

After completing this lesson you will be able to: • Explain the purposes of the radio interface • Show how GSM organizes its radio channels • Identify the physical channels and the logical channels • Relate basic steps that GSM must perform for the successful transmission over the radio interface • Explain how GSM use its logical channels at call setup

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Radio Interface

6-2

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-2

January, 2000

Radio Interface Functions of the Radio Interface

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

• Speech and user's data • Signaling

PE/TRD/GR/0101

BTS

BTS-2

BTS-1

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Radio Interface

6-3

The radio interface in the GSM system is responsible for maintaining communication between the fixed network and mobile subscribers. The radio interface serves two major functions in the GSM system. • To transport user information, both speech and data: - Bi-directional speech transmission at rate of 13 kbps (full rate). - Bi-directional data transmission: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 bps. • To exchange signaling messages between the mobile station and the network (e.g. call in progress indication and preparation and execution of handovers). • Signaling by preemption over the existing communication. - Signaling over a dedicated channel. The transmission resource used to fulfill this radio need is the channel.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-3

January, 2000

Radio Interface GSM Uses Paired Radio Channels

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Case of GSM 900

Uplink 890 MHz

Frequency

0

channel #

Downlink 915 MHz 935 MHz

124

0

BTS

Frequency

960 MHz

channel #

124

Example: Channel 48

Duplex spacing = 45 MHz Frequency band spectrum = 2 x 25 MHz Channel spacing = 200 kHz PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Radio Interface

6-4

A pair of channels are used for full duplex communications. Thus GSM uses both the uplink and the downlink bands of a given spectrum. In other words, a channel refers to a pair of frequencies used for a cellular radio talk path. One is used for cell site to mobile transmission while the other is used for mobile to cell site transmission. GSM signal requires channels spacing of 200 kHz.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-4

January, 2000

Radio Interface

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

GSM Band Allocations (MHz)

GSM systems

Uplink

Downlink

Band

Duplex Spacing

Duplex channels

GSM 900 E-GSM (900) R-GSM (900)

890-915 880-915 876-915

935-960 925-960 921-960

2x25 2x35 2x39

45 45 45

124 174 194

GSM 1800 GSM 1900

1710-1785 1850-1910

1805-1880 1930-1990

2x75 2x60

95 80

374 299

Frequencies are in MHz

Carrier frequency = ARFCN = Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Radio Interface

6-5

The carrier frequency is designated by the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN). If we call Fl(n) the frequency value of the carrier ARFCN n in the lower band, and Fu(n) the corresponding frequency value in the upper band, we have: P-GSM 900: Fl(n) = 890 + 0.2*n

(1 ≤=n ≤=124)

Fu(n) = Fl(n) + 45,

E-GSM 900: Fl(n) = 890 + 0.2*n

(0 ≤=n ≤=124)

Fu(n) = Fl(n) + 45,

Fl(n) = 890 + 0.2*(n -1024) (955 ≤=n ≤=1023)

Fu(n) = Fl(n) + 45,

(0 ≤=n ≤=124)

Fu(n) = Fl(n) + 45,

Fl(n) = 890 + 0.2*(n -1024) (955 ≤=n ≤=1023)

Fu(n) = Fl(n) + 45,

GSM 1800:

Fl(n) = 1710.2 + 0.2*(n-512) (512 ≤=n ≤=885)

Fu(n) = Fl(n) + 95,

GSM 1900:

Fl(n) = 1850.2 + 0.2*(n-512) (512 ≤=n ≤=885)

Fu(n) = Fl(n) + 80.

R-GSM 900: Fl(n) = 890 + 0.2*n

Frequencies are in MHz.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-5

January, 2000

Radio Interface GSM Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) Frame and Physical Channels Time-slot

TDMA frame

TDMA frame

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

(frames repeat continuously)

Time 0

4.615 ms

9.23 ms

Physical channel # 2 = recurrence of time-slot # 2

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Radio Interface

6-6

A frame (TDMA), 8 successive Time-Slots (TS), has a duration of 60/13 ms or 4.615385 ms. A TS, has a duration of 15/26 ms or 0.576923 ms. A physical channel is made of the recurrence of the same TS taken from successive frames.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-6

January, 2000

Radio Interface Physical Channel BTS

time

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

n+1

TDMAs n TS

7

0

n-1

MS1 MS2

MS3 0 PE/TRD/GR/0101

FDMA 12.01/EN

1

January, 2000

//

123

ARFCN

Radio Interface

6-7

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-7

January, 2000

Radio Interface GSM Delays Uplink TDMA Frames

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

BTS side

The start of the uplink TDMA is delayed of three time-slots

TDMA Frame (4.615 ms)

0

1

2

3

4

5

R

R

R

R

R

T

T

T

T

T

6 R

7 R

R

Downlink TDMA BTS

T

T

T Down link

MSs side MS1

R

Up link T

R

T

MS2 Fixed transmit delay of three time-slots PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Radio Interface

6-8

The start of an uplink TDMA frame is delayed with respect to downlink by a fixed period of three Time Slots. Why? Staggering TDMA frames allows the same TS number (TN) to be used in both the down and uplink while avoiding the requirement for MS to transmit and receive simultaneously.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-8

January, 2000

Radio Interface

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Propagation Delays

M2

BTS Frame reference

d1>>d2

d2

TS0

TS1

TS2

Propagation Delay τp

TS3

TS4

M1

TS5

TS6

TS7

Bits Overlapping

MSs transmit

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Radio Interface

6-9

On the radio path, propagation delays can not be ignored. Indeed, 1 km corresponds to a propagation delay of 3.33 µs (compare to a bit period of 48/13 = 3.7 µs). But the BTS receives continuously, and has its own scheduling. The mobile station must itself balance the propagation delay, in order to avoid overlapping in the frame received by the BTS. This is why the system takes into account these timing delays and orders the mobile station to transmit with an anticipation called the Timing Advance.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-9

January, 2000

Radio Interface Logical Channels Traffic and Control Channels TDMA frame

TDMA frame

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

(frames repeat continuously)

Voice transmitted over the physical channel #2 defines a logical traffic channel

Information (e.g. to set up a call) transmitted over the physical channel #1 defines a logical control channel

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Radio Interface

6-10

The specific type of information carried on a physical channel are known as a logical channel. Logical channels can be split into two main categories: • Traffic channels full rate (TCH/ F) and half rate (TCH/ H) which carry user’s data and speech. • Signaling channels, also known as control channel.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-10

January, 2000

Radio Interface From Physical Channel to Logical Channels TDMA Frame = 4.615 ms

Time Slot

Logical channels multiplexing

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

0 12 345 67 01 234 56 701 23 45 67

LOGICAL CHANNELS • Traffic • Broadcasted signaling

• Dedicated signaling • Associated signaling

TS = 577 µs

MESSAGE TYPE

Physical Channel

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

different message types = different logical channels

Radio Interface

6-11

A Physical Channel (a TS, defined by a fixed position (0-7) on a given TDMA frame) is used to broadcast messages containing different kinds of information: • traffic messages for speech and data, • signaling messages for different procedures and supplementary services, • synchronization messages for synchronization between the mobile station and the BTS, • measurements messages for uplink report of the downlink measurements, • control messages to manage the access to the network. All these kinds of messages are classified and separated in Logical Channels. Depending on the quantity of information to transmit and on their consistency, several logical channels may be grouped into one physical channel, in order to occupy its successive TS as much as possible (optimization of the resources number by maximizing the occupancy time of each).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-11

January, 2000

Radio Interface Traffic Channels (TCHs)

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

BSS sp ee ch

BSC MSC

BTS

TC H

or da ta

sp ee ch o

TC H rd ata

Full rate TCH carries: • speech (13 kbps) • user’s data (300 bps up to14.4 kbps) Half rate TCH carries: • user’s data (300 bps up to 4.8 kbps)

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Radio Interface

6-12

Traffic Channels (TCH) are intended to carry either encoded speech or user data both in the up and downlink directions in a point to point communication. There are two type of Traffic Channels (TCHs) that are differentiated by their traffic rates as follows: • A full rate TCH that carries information (speech and data) at a gross rate of kbps. The raw data rate for each TCH is 13 kbps for speech.

22.8

• A half rate TCH (TCH / H) carries information (encoded speech or data) at half of the full rate channel with a gross rate of 11.4 kbps. The allowed combining of user data rate with full and half rate are as follows: • Full rate speech (TCH /F). • Half rate speech (TCH /H), not available at the present time. • 14.4 kbps full rate data (TCH / F14.4). • 9.6 kbps full rate data (TCH / F9.6). • 4.8 kbps full rate data (TCH / F4.8). • 2.4 kbps full rate data (TCH / F2.4). • 4.8 kbps half rate data (TCH / H4.8). • 2.4 kbps half rate data (TCH / H2.4).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-12

January, 2000

Radio Interface Control Channels GSM Channels

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Traffic Channels (TCHs)

Full rate

TCH /F

Half rate

Control Channels

Broadcast Channels (BCHs)

Common Control Channels (CCCHs)

Downlink

Downlink

(down uplink)

TCH /H FCCH

12.01/EN

Uplink Fast

Traffic Multiframing PE/TRD/GR/0101

Dedicated Control Channels (DCCHs)

SCH

BCCH PCH

AGCH

CBCH

RACH SDCCH

Signaling Multiframing January, 2000

Radio Interface

Slow

FACCH

SACCH

Traffic Multiframing 6-13

Control channels are intended to carry signaling or synchronization data. Three are defined: Broadcast Channels (BCHs), Common Control Channels (CCCHs), Dedicated Control Channels (DCCHs). Broadcast channels are point to multipoint unidirectional (downlink) control channels from the the fixed subsystem to the mobile telephone. • First, BCHs include a Frequency Control Channel (FCCH) that allows an MS to accurately tune to a Base Transceiver Station (BTS). • Then BCHs contain the Synchronization Channel (SCH), which provide TDMA frame oriented synchronization data to a MS. • Last, BCHs include the Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH) intended to broadcast a variety of information to MSs, including cues necessary for the MS to register in the network. Common Control Channels (CCCHs) are point to multipoint channels that is primarily intended to carry signaling information for access handling functions. The CCCHs include: Paging Channel (PCH), which is down channel used to page (call terminating) MSs. • Access Grant Channel (AGCH) that is a downlink channel used to assign a MS to a specific Dedicated Control Channel (DCCH). • Cell Broadcast Channel (CBCH), which is down channel used to broadcast miscellaneous short messages to the MSs. • Random Access Control Channel (RACH) is an uplink channel which allows MS to initiate a call. Dedicated Control Channels are point to point, bi-directional control channel. Two types of DCCHs are used: • Stand-alone Dedicated Control Channels (SDCCH) whose allocation is not linked to the assignment of a traffic channel (TCH). It bears information about authentication, location updates, and assignment to traffic channels (TCHs). • Otherwise, Associated Control Channels are linked to the allocation of a traffic channel (TCH). The Fast Associated Control Channel (FACCH) or burst stealing is a control channel obtained by preemptive dynamic multiplexing on a TCH. The Slow Associated Control Channel (SACCH), also know as a continue data stream, is allocated together with a TCH or a SDCCH.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-13

January, 2000

Radio Interface The Logical Channels on Radio Interface TS

01234567

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

BTS

MS

Frequency correction Synchronization

FCCH

TCH

SCH

FACCH

Traffic (speech-data) Associated Signaling

BCCH

Broadcast control

RACH

Access request

SACCH SDCCH

PCH

Subscriber paging Answer to Access request

CBCH

AGCH

Radio Measurement + SMS Dedicated Signaling Broadcast info

FCCH CBCH

Broadcast info Dedicated Signaling Sys InFo 5, 6 + SMS Traffic (speech data)

SCH

SDCCH SACCH

RACH PCH

TCH

AGCH

Associated Signaling FACCH PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

M.S. Pre-synchronization

BCCH Access request Subscriber paging Answer to Access request

Radio Interface

6-14

Three groups of logical channels: 1. Traffic channels (TCH), and associated channels (FACCH, SACCH): Number computed from Erlang B law, starting from offered traffic, according to the traffic model. 2. Dedicated signaling channels (SDCCH, SACCH, CBCH): Number computed from Erlang B law, using figures given by the traffic model. The CBCH is optionally used; when activated, it uses permanently one SDCCH resource. 3. Common channels (CCCH), BCCH and synchronization channels (FCCH, SCH) Theoretical studies on message exchanges on radio interface have shown that one common channel is sufficient, whatever the offered traffic on CELL. “BCCH combined”: common channel pattern for small capacity cells (O1): - Signaling channels SDCCH/SACCH are included in same frame as common channels: AGCH

: Access Grant CHannel

PCH

: Paging CHannel

BCCH

: Broadcast Control CHannel

RACH

: Random Access CHannel

CBCH

: Common Broadcast CHannel

SACCH : Slow Associated Control CHannel

CCCH

: Common Control CHannel

SCH

FACCH

: Fast Associated Control CHannel SDCCH : Stand-alone Dedicated Control CHannel

FCCH

: Frequency Control CHannel

TCH

: Signaling CHannel

: Traffic CHannel

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-14

January, 2000

Radio Interface Logical Channel Description (1/2) SDCCH MESSAGES

TCH MESSAGES

• Request for a SDCCH assignment

• Full rate speech at 13 kbit/s

• Request for the end of channel

• Half rate speech at 6.5 kbit/s

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

assignment

• Full rate data at 9.6, 4.8, or 2.4 kbit/s

• Order of commutation from SDCCH to

• Half rate data at 4.8 or 2.4 kbit/s

TCH

• Handover Access message (uplink)

FACCH MESSAGES

SACCH MESSAGES

• Connection establishment from

• System Information 5, 5bis, 5ter and 6

SDCCH to TCH

(connected mode)

• End validation of a SDCCH-TCH

• Measures:

commutation

- power level of the communication - quality level of the communication - level on the beacon frequency of

• Characteristics of the future used BS

after handover

the neighboring cells

• Connection establishment to BS after

handover

• Timing Advance

• Validation of an handover

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

• Power Control Radio Interface

6-15

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-15

January, 2000

Radio Interface Logical Channel Description (2/2) AGCH MESSAGES

FCCH MESSAGES

• For dedicated channel assignment:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

• no message is sent (all bits 0)

- frequency number - slot number - frequency hopping description - Timing Advance (1st estimation) - MS identification

SCH MESSAGES • Frame Number • Base Station Identity Code (BSIC)

RACH MESSAGES

BCCH MESSAGES

• Service request:

- emergency call - answer to an incoming call - outgoing call - short message - call re-establishment - inscription

• System Information type 1, 2, 2bis,

2ter, 3, 4, 7, 8 (idle mode)

CBCH MESSAGES

PCH MESSAGES

• Specific information

• messages containing a mobile

For example: - weather - road information PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

identity for a call, a short message or an authentication Radio Interface

6-16

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-16

January, 2000

Radio Interface Traffic and Control Multi-Framing Control channel

Traffic channel Frame 4.615 ms

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

26 traffic frames = 120 ms

1326 frames

0

1

0

2

3

1 0

1

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

21 22 23 24 25

3

1

0

51 control frame = 235.38 ms

4

2

4

3

0

1

2

3

4

51 x 26 traffic frames = 6.12 s

2

2

TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

26 x 51 control frames = 6.12 s

3

4

5

46 47 48 49 50

46 22

47 23

48

49

24

50 25

2042 2043 2044 2045 2046 2047

1 Hyperframe = 2,715,648 frames= 3h 28 min. 53 s 760 ms January, 2000

Radio Interface

6-17

Introducing to Multi Framing Higher order frames, called traffic multiframes, consist of 26 TDMA frames and have a duration of 120 ms (26 x 4.615 ms). This 26 DTMA multiframe carries Traffic Channels (TCHs), Slow Associated Control Channel (SACCH), and Fast Associated Control Channel (FACCH). Similarly, a 51-frame multiframe, called a control multiframe, has a duration of 235.365 ms (51 x 4.615 ms) and supports Common Control Channels (CCCHs), Broadcast Channels (BCHs) and Stand Alone Control Channels (SDCCHs). One Superframe consists of 51 traffic multiframes or 26 control multiframes, in other words contains 51 x 26 TDMA frames with a total duration of 6.12 seconds (51 x 120 ms). The highest order frame is called a hyperframe and consists of 2,048 superframes, or 2,715,648 frames (2048 x 51 x 21). The time duration of the hyperframe is 3 hrs, 28 min., and 52.76 sec (2,715,648 x 4.615 ms). This long period of hyperframe is called the GSM time. Thus to organize the information transmitted on each carrier, GSM defines several time intervals ranging from 0.9 µs (exactly the time duration of a quarter of one bit) to a hyperframe interval of more than three hours (GSM time). As we have just seen, the cycle of a multiframe and superframe is different for speech and control channels. This arrangement enables a receiver to decode all the control channels along with the traffic channel (TCHs) because of the timing of the traffic multiframe always moving in relation to the control channel multi frame. Otherwise, if two multiframes were exact multiples of each other, the control channel time slot would be permanently masked by the TCH time slot activities.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-17

January, 2000

Radio Interface Traffic Channels Combination Logical Channel Mapping (1/5) Full Rate - Downlink & Uplink "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

26 frames = 120 ms

T T T T T T T T T T T T A T T T T T T T T T T T T

time

Half Rate - Downlink & Uplink 26 frames = 120 ms

T0 T1 T0 T1 T0 T1 T0 T1 T0 T1 T0 T1 A 0 T1 T0 T1 T0 T1 T0 T1 T0 T1 T0 T1 T0 A 1

T : TCH PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

Ti : TCH

sub-channel n° i

January, 2000

A : SACCH

SACCH Ai :sub-channel n° i

time

: IDLE

Radio Interface

6-18

Full rate speech transmission When a Mobile Station is in communication mode, speech is coded every 20 ms in blocks. These blocks are coded in 8 half-bursts, whose information quantity is equivalent to 4 entire bursts. Then, one burst has to be delivered every 5 ms. But in reality a burst is transmitted every 4.615 ms. So, in 26 frames lasting 120 ms, 24 bursts are used for speech transmission. One free burst is used for SACCH. The other one is an idle burst. During this burst, the mobile is not idle, but it uses this time to monitor the neighboring cells frequencies. Half rate speech transmission (not often used because of lower quality) When the half rate speech transmission is in use, the 26 frames of a given time slot can be separated between two users, since only 12 coded speech bursts are used per user. So, in 26 frames lasting 120 ms, the odd burst numbers are restricted to one user, and the other numbers are for the other one. SACCH bursts are in the 13th and 26th positions. In this case, the monitoring is more frequent. Full rate speech: 13 kbit/s

Half rate speech: 5.6 kbit/s

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-18

January, 2000

Radio Interface Dedicated Signaling Channels Combination Logical Channel Mapping (2/5) Downlink

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

51 frames = 235 ms

D0

D1

D2

D3

D4

D5

D6

D7

A0

A1

A2

A3

D0

D1

D2

D3

D4

D5

D6

D7

A4

A5

A6

A7 time

Uplink 51 frames = 235 ms

A5

A6

A7

D0

D1

D2

D3

D4

D5

D6

D7

A0

A1

A2

A3

D0

D1

D2

D3

D4

D5

D6

D7

A4 time

A : SACCH PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

D : SDCCH

: IDLE

Radio Interface

6-19

The dedicated channels are combined into two multiframes of 51 frames. In the uplink and the downlink directions, the configuration is almost the same one, only shifted by 15 frames. The dedicated channels combination broadcasts a group of 8 SDCCH frames (2 groups of 4 consecutive SDCCH frames), each of them is associated to 4 consecutive SACCH frames. Each different group is used by a different dedicated communication. The multiframe configuration is shown on the above figure. So 8 users can use the same physical channel simultaneously, and the different communications associated to their SACCH signaling are spread on a cycle of 102 frames (2 51-multiframes). In such a multiplexing cycle, 6 frames are unused (idle TS).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-19

January, 2000

Radio Interface Physical Channel and Logical Channels Common Channels Combination Multiframe m

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Multiframe m-1

C

Multiframe m+1

51 frames = 235.38 ms

FS

B

C

FS C

C

FS C

C

FS C

C

FS C

C

FS

B

time

Frames repeat continuously

PCH/AGCH

BTS

Physical Channel ARFCN (n)

Logical Channels PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

F : FCCH

TS (s)

S : SCH

SCH BCCH FCCH

B : BCCH

C : PCH/AGCH

Radio Interface

MS

: IDLE 6-20

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-20

January, 2000

Radio Interface Common Channels Combination Logical Channel Mapping (3/5) Downlink "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

51 frames = 235 ms

FS

B

C

FS

C

C

FS

C

C

FS

C

C

FS

C

C time

Uplink 51 frames = 235 ms RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR time

F : FCCH PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

S : SCH January, 2000

B : BCCH

: AGCH

C /PCH

R : RACH

: IDLE

Radio Interface

6-21

Downlink way The downlink direction is used to combine FCCH, SCH, BCCH, PCH and AGCH: • FCCH and SCH are always transmitted consecutively (SCH always follows FCCH). Over 51 frames, the pairs are located at the 0-1, 10-11, 20-21, 30-31 and 40-41 positions. • BCCH uses 4 frames per multiframe (Frame Number 2 to 5) and sometimes 4 other frames (6 to 9) for BCCH ext (see p. 2-22). • PCH and AGCH form the CCCH blocks (9 groups of 4 frames). They can have different configurations, depending on the cell capacity and are dynamically defined in SI Type 3 (management of these channels). • The 51th frame is unused. Uplink way The uplink direction is reserved for RACH. The configuration is simple: all the 51 frames broadcast RACH messages. So all the mobile station can request a dedicated resource to access the network on each TS 0 of a specific TDMA frame in the cell.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-21

January, 2000

Radio Interface BCCH Combined Logical Channel Mapping (4/5) Downlink

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

51 frames = 235 ms

FS

B

C

FS

C

C

FS

D0

D1

FS

D2

D3

FS

A0

A1

FS

B

C

FS

C

C

FS

D0

D1

FS

D2

D3

FS

A2

A3 time

Uplink 51 frames = 235 ms

D3

RR

A2

D3

RR

A0

A3

RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR

D0

D1

RR

D2

A1

RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR

D0

D1

RR

D2 time

: AGCH

F : FCCH S : SCH B : BCCH C /PCH PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

R : RACH

A : SACCH

D : SDCCH

Radio Interface

: IDLE 6-22

In the case of a low capacity cell, it is possible to combine on the same physical channel some dedicated channels with some common control channels. Their configuration is done on 2x51 frames and is indicated in the SI type 3. This combination contains all the channels of dedicated and common combinations: FCCH, SCH, BCCH, PCH, AGCH, SDCCH, SACCH and RACH. Downlink way From a common control combination, FCCH, SCH and BCCH keep their configuration (FCCH+SCH: 0, 10, 20, 30 and 40; BCCH: 2 to 5) for both multiframes. PCH and AGCH are still dynamically configured but only on the bursts: 6-9 (except when extended BCCH are used), 12-15 and 16-19, for both multiframes. On the bursts left, 4 blocks of 4 SDCCH TSs, each of them associated with a SACCH block of 4 TSs, and one idle TS at the end of each multiframe. Each different group is used by a different sub-channel. Uplink way On 102 frames, 27 RACH frames are kept and the other ones are replaced by 4 blocks of 4 SDCCH TSs, each of them associated with a block of 4 SACCH TSs.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-22

January, 2000

Radio Interface Why 26 and 51 Frames per Multiframe? 0 1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

FS

10

B

C

FS

20

C

C

30

FS

C

C

12

FS

C

C

FS

50 0 1

C

C

FS

TTTTT TTTTTTTATTTTTTTTTTTT

TTTTTTTTTTTTATTTTTTTTTTTT 01

40

25 0 1

12

25

Downlink message

Uplink message

Mobile activity

Rx

Tx

Rx Rx (n)

Tx

Rx (n)

Rx

Tx

Neighboring BTS (downlink) Measurement Window PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Radio Interface

6-23

During a communication, the Mobile Station has to listen to the beacon frequency of the neighboring cells (which list is provided to the MS through SACCH) in order to get presynchronized with the neighboring sites. This pre-synchronization is useful for an eventual handover, so that the mobile station can access the assigned channel. The MS can decode beacon frequency information only during the idle window of the TCH multiframe. Indeed, during data exchanges, the mobile has not enough time to decode information between receipt, broadcast (3 TSs later), and new receipt (5 TSs later), since it has to change the frequency and to process some data. However, between transmission and reception (4 TSs), the MS is able to perform level measurement on a neighboring cell. But the MS must find time to decode the synchronization information broadcasted on SCH of the neighboring cells and read and decode BCCH information for new cells. For this, the MS uses the idle TS (TS 26 on the traffic multiframe) that provides a larger observation window and processing time. Since 26 and 51 have no common divider and 26*2=51+1, the idle slot of the TCH multiframe shifts forward a frame in the 51-multiframe: 0, 26, 1, 27, 2,... We are sure that the MS has been able to pre-synchronize with a neighboring site (FCCH+SCH decoding) after at most 11 successive decoding at the idle TS level.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-23

January, 2000

Radio Interface From Speech to Radio Transmission

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Speech

Speech

Step 1

Digitizing and source coding

Source decoding

Step 2

Channel coding

Channel decoding

Interleaving

De-interleaving

Step 3

PE/TRD/GR/0101

Burst deformatting

Burst formatting

Step 4

Ciphering

Step 5

Modulation

Step 6

Transmission

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Deciphering

Demodulation equalization

Diversity

Radio Interface

6-24

From speech to radio signal, several operations are performed. The reverse transformations are performed on the receiver side. Main operations are the following: • Digitizing: Speech blocks are first digitized to obtain digital blocks: 20 ms speech = 260 bits. • Source coding uses low bit rate code for air interface. • Channel coding uses codes enabling detection and correction of signals errors. The result is a flow of code words (456 bits long). • Interleaving and burst formatting spread the bits of several code words to expand data of the same block in different bursts. The results is a succession of blocks, one block for each channel burst. • Ciphering modifies the contents of these block through a "secret recipe" known only by the mobile telephone and the Base Transceiver Station, thus protecting data from eavesdropping. • Modulation transforms the binary signal into an analog signal at the right frequency and moment using Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying (GMSK). • Transmission amplifies and radiates the resulting signal as radio waves via an antenna. • Diversity are different techniques used to provide the reception quality. • Demodulation: From the radio waves captured by the antenna, the portion of the received signal which is of interest to the receiver is demodulated. • Deciphering reverses the encryption "secret recipe". • Burst de-formatting and de-interleaving puts the bits of the different burst back in order to rebuild the code words. • Channel Decoding reconstructs the source information from the output of the demodulator using added redundancy to detect or correct possible errors. • Speech decoding operates as suitable filters receiving the voice parameters, then performs them out analog speech.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-24

January, 2000

Radio Interface

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Speech Quality - Source Coding Codec Type

Mean Opinion Score (MOS)

Rate (kb/s)

PCM A law GSM EFR CDMA 13 D-AMPS GSM FR CDMA 8

4.25 4.2 4.2 4 3.8 3.4

64 12.2 13 8 13 8

Quality

MOS

Excellent Good Fair Poor Bad

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

5 4 3 2 1

January, 2000

Listening Effort Required Complete relaxation possible, no effort. Attention necessary, no appreciable effort. Moderate effort. Considerable effort. No meaning understood with feasible effort.

Radio Interface

6-25

Since each telecommunication system has its own intrinsic characteristics and limitations, specific voice CODECs have been designed for each system with the objective of achieving the best trade-off between voice quality, robustness to errors and network capacity. As a result, the voice quality differ from one system to another. The advent of new speech compression codecs for wireless systems has provoked intense interest in comparisons of subjective voice quality over these codecs. Estimates of subjective quality are typically given as Mean Opinion Scores (MOS) obtained from listening tests. Voice quality is a subjective parameter. By asking a group of normal telephone listeners to rate the quality of telephone speech samples, we can obtain an estimate of the quality that would be achieved on various types of connections. In particular, we use subjective listening tests to characterize the voice quality of speech compression codecs used in wireless and other systems where bandwidth efficiency is at a premium, because there are no objective measures that can estimate voice quality effectively.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-25

January, 2000

Radio Interface Channel Processing Overview 20 ms

Speech blocks

A

20 ms

B

C

260 bits "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

20 ms

260 bits

260 bits

Source coding Channel coding

A

B

456 bits

A A A A 5 6 7 8

Normal burst PE/TRD/GR/0101

B B B B B B B B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Interleaving

8 Bursts

A5 B1

C

456 bits

A6 B2

A7 B3

B5 C1

A8 B4

B6 C2

456 bits

8 Sub blocks of 57 bits

B7 C3

C C C C 1 2 3 4

B8 C4

3

57 bits

1

26 bits

1

57 bits

3

Tail

Information

CRL

Training

CRL

Information

Tail

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Radio Interface

6-26

After having transformed speech blocks (20 ms) into digital blocks, channel coding adds redundancy. The purpose of channel coding is to improve poor transmission quality due to disturbances such as noise, interference, or multipath propagation (resulting from the reflections of the transmitted signal from buildings, etc.). Channel coding consist in adding, some redundant information, to the source data calculated from this source information: • Convolutional codes and block codes: for correction purposes. • Fire code: detection and correction of “bursty” errors. • Parity code: error detection. Each channel has its own coding and interleaving scheme. A common structure of 456 coded bit is interleaved and mapped onto bursts. The blocks are interleaved and spread into segments which are combined with flags and a training sequence to build up the burst. Ciphering is applied to these burst and the resulting data is used to modulate the carriers.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-26

January, 2000

Radio Interface Interleaving: TCH Full Rate 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...

...

452 453 454 455

456 coded bits

Divide 456 bits in 8 sub-blocks

4

5

6

1 9 •• • 449

7

0

2 10 •• • 450

1

2

3 11 •• • 451

3

4 12 •• • 452

4

5

5 13 •• • 453

6

6 14 •• • 454

7

7 15 •• • 455

0

1

57 Rows

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

0 8 •• • 448

2

reordering & partitioning out

3 diagonal interleaving bit interleaving burst

b0 b1 PE/TRD/GR/0101

b56 12.01/EN

January, 2000

b0 b1 Radio Interface

b56 6-27

After channel coding, speech coded information (TCH Full rate) are classified into blocks. See how they are spread into bursts.

456 bits

These 456 bits are reordered into a 8 x 57 array, line by line. The initially close bits are separated. The array is split into 8 columns of 57 bits. In this way, each 57 bits block contains bits which were all distant each other. Each 57 bits block shall be grouped with another one in order to create a burst which contains 114 information bits. Each of the 4 first blocks is grouped with each of the 4 last blocks of the previous segment. In the same way, each of the 4 last blocks is grouped with each of the 4 first blocks of the next segment. In a burst, containing 2 57 bits blocks, it is possible to increase bit spreading. The first block uses the even positions and the second one uses the odd positions inside the burst. The proximity of initially successive bits are now destroyed. Each speech block of 456 bits (20 ms) is so spread over 8 bursts.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-27

January, 2000

Radio Interface Burst Formatting Normal Burst 1 frame: 4.615 ms "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

0

1

2

DATA 3

3

S 57

1

4

Training S sequence 26

1

Burst 148 bits

5

6

Guard Band

DATA 57

7

3

8.25

Guard

156.25 bits 0.577 ms

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Radio Interface

6-28

A basic unit of measure in transmission on a radio path is a burst, a series of 114 modulated bits of information. Bursts have a finite duration and occupy a finite part of the radio spectrum. Bursts are sent in time and frequency windows called slots. The normal burst shown in this slide is made of: • • • •

Tail bits: three "0" bits at the beginning and end to help avoid loss of synchronization. Information: speech, data, and signaling. A training sequence: a list of bits known by the receiver allowing it to demodulate the burst. Stealing flags (S): indicate if information is either user's data (includes speech) or signaling data for call in state. • A guard band: bits where nothing is transmitted to allow for overlap due to the variable distance from the mobile telephone to the Base Transceiver Station. This is necessary if the timing advance is not exactly right. • Normal Burst bears traffic channels, its associated channel (slow and fast), Stand Alone, and the broadcast Control Channels (BCCHs).

Other burst are defined with regard to their time-amplitude profile: • Access burst: used in the uplink direction during initial phase of transmission when propagation delay (timing advance) between the mobile telephone is not yet known. The training sequence and tail are longer than those of a normal burst to increase the probability of demodulation success. • Frequency correction burst: to enable the mobile telephone to find and demodulate a synchronization burst to the same cell. • Synchronization burst: time synchronization of the mobile station, the first burst a mobile telephone needs to be able to demodulate. • Dummy burst: dummy sequence to replace data if there is nothing to transmit, for example, Broadcast Control Channel filling. "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-28

January, 2000

Radio Interface Burst Formats Frequency Correction Burst (FCCH) "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Tail

Data

3 bits

Tail

142 fixed bits (0)

3 bits

Guard Period 8.25 bits

156.25 bits (0.577 ms)

Synchronization Burst (SCH) Tail

Data

3 bits 39 encrypted bits

Extended Training Sequence

Data

64 synchronization bits

39 bits

Tail

Guard Period

3 bits 8.25 bits

156.25 bits (0.577 ms)

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Radio Interface

6-29

Frequency correction burst A frequency correction burst contains 142 fixed bits for the frequency correction and 3 tail bits at the beginning and the end. The guard period corresponds to a transmission time of 8.25 bits. It is used on FCCH in order to enable the mobile to find and demodulate a synchronization burst in the same cell. Its structure is simple, since its bits are all equal to 0 (no information is transmitted). When this burst is modulated, the result is a pure sine wave at the carrier frequency plus 1625/24 Hz due to the modulation. This frequency is in fact the information carried by this burst. It provides the frequency needed to understand the following bursts of the same physical channel. Synchronization burst A synchronization burst contains 64 bits for the training sequence, twice 39 for the information, 3 tail bits at the beginning and the end. The guard period corresponds to a transmission time of 8.25 bits. It is used on SCH, in the downlink direction, for time synchronization of the mobile station. It is the first burst a mobile needs to be able to demodulate. It is the reason why its training sequence is longer than the one of other bursts.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-29

January, 2000

Radio Interface Burst Formats Normal Burst Tail

Data

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

3 bits 57 encrypted bits

Training Sequence 1

26 bits

Data 1

Tail

57 encrypted bits

Guard Period

3 bits 8.25 bits

156.25 bits (0.577 ms)

Dummy Burst Tail Dummy Sequence 3 bits 58 mixed bits

Training Sequence 28 midamble bits

Dummy Sequence Tail 58 mixed bits

Guard Period

3 bits 8.25 bits

156.25 bits (0.577 ms)

Training Sequence

Tail 8 bits

Access Burst Data

Tail

41 synch bits 36 encrypted bits 3 bits

Guard Period 68.25 bits

156.25 bits (0.577 ms) PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Radio Interface

6-30

Normal burst A normal burst contains 26 bits for the training sequence, plus 2 times 58 bits for information. More precisely, there are twice 57 information bits and two stealing flags, which indicate if information is traffic or signaling. There are also out three tail bits, and 8.25 bits for the guard period. Dummy burst The dummy burst structure is the same as for the normal burst. But information bits are replaced by mixed bits: this burst is used to replace data if there is nothing to transmit. It is the case for BCCH and TCH filling when they are transmitted on the beacon frequency. Access burst An access burst contains 41 bits for the training sequence, 36 bits for the information, 8 and 3 tail bits at respectively the beginning and the end of the burst. The guard period is of 68.25 bits. It is used on RACH, in the uplink direction, during initial phase of transmission when the propagation delay between the mobile station and the BTS is not yet known. The training tail sequences are longer than those of a normal burst to increase the probability of demodulation success.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-30

January, 2000

Radio Interface Ciphering

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Burst to be transmitted

Data

Plain data: Ciphering sequence: XOR: Ciphered data (transmitted): Ciphered sequence: XOR: Recovered data:

12.01/EN

January, 2000

S

Data

0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0..... 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0..... 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0..... 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0..... 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0.....

Received burst PE/TRD/GR/0101

S

Data

S

Training S sequence

Radio Interface

Data

6-31

Ciphering, or encryption, is a procedure that provides additional security for the subscriber. Ciphering is not a channel coding. It is performed after the encoding and interleaving of different channel and is done independently of whether the channel is a signaling channel or a traffic channel. Ciphering is only done on the two data segments. Thus ciphering is achieved by performing an exclusive OR (XOR) operation between a pseudo-random bit sequence (which was computed through A5 algorithm by the ciphering key allowed to user for a call and the burst number) and the 114 useful bits of a normal burst. Deciphering, in turn, applies exactly the same operation, since XOR twice with the same data leads back to the original value. Last, it is worth noting that the whole specification of the encryption algorithm (A5) is distributed under conditions by the Association of European Operators which have signed the GSM Memorandum of Understanding (MoU). GSM uses two A5 types of algorithm: • Encryption algorithm A5-1 which contains European and United States technical software that could not directly or indirectly exported to any either embargoed or restricted country. • Encryption algorithm A5-2 which contains software that do not require license or approval.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-31

January, 2000

Radio Interface Modulation GMSK Modulation

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Bit 0 Bit 1

phase shift + 90 ° phase shift - 90 °

I = sin (Ω Ωt + ϕ)

Q GMSK Modulator

'1'

GMSK Signal

- 90 ° + 90 °

Q = cos (Ω Ωt + ϕ)

PE/TRD/GR/0101

'0'

I Carrier Frequency

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Radio Interface

6-32

GSM modulation GMSK (Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying) is a “constant envelope” modulation scheme. This choice has been mainly made to avoid specific need of linear amplifier. GMSK relies on MSK scheme using Gaussian low pass filtering. MSK MSK is a continuous phase shift. It allows the RF vector to rotate during one bit period on a circle (constant amplitude) from one phase state to the other: • phase shift = + 90 ° when bit b = 0, • phase shift = - 90 ° when bit b = 1, As a result, the phase shift of +90 ° or -90 ° during one bit period by MSK is equivalent to a frequency shift so MSK also can be seen as FSK (Frequency Shift Keying). MSK has steady phase transitions however with a dip at any bit change caused by rapid change of the frequency (+/- Df). This leads to a very broad RF spectrum. Gaussian filter The data signal is base band filtered by a Gaussian filter to obtain GMSK modulation. The phase transition does not have dips any more and the bandwidth of the spectrum has considerably decreased.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-32

January, 2000

Radio Interface Discontinuous Transmission Features

speech decoder

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Hearpiece Digital to Analog Converter

Comfort noise function

Microphone

speech encoder Analog to Digital Converter

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

From receiver

To transmitter

Voice Activity Detection

Radio Interface

6-33

Pauses in normal speech occur at a rate that makes speech appear to have about 50 per cent activity. This means that a telephony channel is only used for speech transmission about half the time a speaker is using the phone. Since transmit time is further reduced when Discontinuous transmission (DTX) is used, the power consumption of hand-held terminals is reduced, which gives users the option of fitting their terminal with smaller batteries. Furthermore these functions tend to reduce interference in adjacent cells and to mobile station close to the base transmitters when suspending radio transmission when the coder detects a speech pause. The GSM speech coder features this with: • Voice Activity Detection (VAD) that determines the presence or absence of speech at the microphone. Note this function has to work well even when there is high level of background noise, such as in a car. • Confort Noise function: The total absence of sound in the ear piece would annoy the user at the receiving end of a radio channel and the handset appears to be dead. Thus the users tend to speak too loudly when there is total silence in the ear piece. There needs to be a minimum of conventional background noise present during pause. This is accomplished by transmitting silent descriptor (SID) frames at a rather slow rate of once every 480 ms. Then upon receiving this SID frame, the receiving speech decoder has to fake an existing wireline connection by generating some background noise.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-33

January, 2000

Radio Interface Check Your Learning

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

1- Why does GSM use paired radio channels?

2- How many time-slots does a GSM TDMA contain?

3- What is a GSM physical channel?

4- Why does GSM delay the uplink TDMA frame?

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Radio Interface

6-34

1- Why does GSM use paired radio channels?

2- How many time-slots does a GSM TDMA contain?

3- What is a GSM physical channel?

4- Why does GSM delay the uplink TDMA frame?

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-34

January, 2000

Radio Interface Check Your Learning (continue)

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

5- What are the logical channels?

6- What does a traffic channel carry?

7- Why does GSM use the channel coding?

8- Why does GSM use the interleaving?

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Radio Interface

6-35

5- What are the logical channels?

6- What does a traffic channel carry?

7- Why does GSM use the channel coding?

8- Why does GSM use the interleaving?

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-35

January, 2000

Radio Interface Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

6-36

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Section 7

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

7-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-1

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Objectives

After completing this lesson you will be able to: • List the 3 sub-systems of a GSM system and their interfaces; • List the different equipment in each GSM sub-system; • Indicate functions for each equipment; • List the interfaces in each sub-system, indicate if it is standard or not and identify the main protocol used on it.

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

7-2

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-2

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Basic Elements of a Cellular System

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

To another PSTN

To another exchange service area

PSTN

Switch

To another PSTN

To another exchange service area

January, 2000

Exchange service area

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

7-3

Today's wireless communications systems are based on a composite wireless and wired system as shown in this slide where the wireless segment of the communication system is shown as a cluster of seven hexagonal cells. Each cell is essentially a radio communication center where a mobile subscriber establishes a call with a land telephone through the switch and the Public Switching Telephone Network (PSTN). This composite platform enables us to communicate with anyone at any time, from anywhere within the service area. Switch and PSTN are essentially multiple points serving as system intelligence.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-3

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols Architecture of a GSM System Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) ISDN, PSDN

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Signaling System No.7

Network and Switching Sub-system

GMSC VLR

SS7

MSC VLR

HLR-AUC EIR

A-interface

Base Station Sub-system

BSS

BSC

Um (radio) interface

Cell 3 Cell 1

Abis Interface

BTS Cell 2

OMN interface (X.25)

TRAU

Operation SubSystem

OMC-R

OMC-S

BTS

MS PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

7-4

A GSM system is basically designed as a combination of three major sub-systems: the Network and Switching Sub-system (NSS), the radio sub-system called the Base Station Sub-system (BSS), and the Operation Sub-System (OSS). The Network and Switching Sub-system includes the equipment and functions related to end-to-end-calls, management of subscribers, mobility, and interfaces with the fixed network (PSTN). In particular, the NSS consist of Mobile Switching Centers (MSC), Visitor Location Registers (VLR), Home Location Registers (HLR), Authentication Center (AUC), and Equipment Identity Register (EIR). The Base Station Sub-system includes the equipment and functions related to the management of the connection on the radio path. It mainly consists of one Base Station Controller (BSC), and several Base Transceiver Stations (BTSs), linked by the Abis interface. An optional equipment, the Transcoder / Rate Adapter Unit (TRAU) so called TransCoder Unit (TCU) within Nortel BSS products, is designed to reduce the amount of PCM links. The Operation Sub-System is connected to all equipment in the switching system and to the BSC. OSS mainly contains Operation and Maintenance Center for NSS (OMC-S) and Operation and Maintenance Center devoted to the Radio subsystem (OMC-R). In order to ensure that network operators will have several sources of cellular infrastructure equipment, GSM decided to specify: • the radio interface (or air interface or Um interface), between the BTS and the MS, • the A interface, between the NSS and the BSS.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-4

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols BSS Architecture

MSC

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

A Interface

Radio Interface

TCU S2000H&L BTS

NSS

Ater Interface

Public Telephone Network

OMC-R

Abis Interface

BSC

MS

S8000 Outdoor BTS Radio Interface

OMN Interface

S8000 Indoor BTS

Sun StorEdge A5000

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

BSS January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

MS 7-5

The Base Station Sub-system (BSS) is a set of equipment (aerials, transceivers and a controller) that is viewed by the Mobile Switching Center through a single A interface as being the entity responsible for communicating with mobile telephones (MSs) in a certain area. The radio equipment of a BSS may be composed of one or more cells, such a BSS may contain one or more Base Transceiver Stations (BTSs). The interface between the BSC and the BTSs is called an Abis interface. The BSS includes two types of equipment: • the Base Transceiver Station (BTS functionally includes also the TRAU) in contact with the Mobile Stations through the radio interface, • the BSC, the latter being in contact with the Mobile Switching Center. A BSS contains only one Base Station Controller (BSC).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-5

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols BTS General Architecture and Functions BTS Transmission coupler

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

COUPLING SYSTEM

- Encodes, encrypts, modulates, feeds the RF signal to the antenna

Reception coupler

- Decrypts and equalizes the signal then demodulates

Antenna Duplexer

- Interface between Antennas and TRXs of each cell

TRX (Transceiver-Receiver)

- Mobile call detection - Uplink channel measurements - Timing advance - Frequency hopping

BCF (Base Common Functions) Abis interface

BSC

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

- Multiplexes speech and user's data channels to BSC. - Multiplexes signaling channels to BSC. January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

7-6

As stated, the primary responsibility of the BTS is to transmit and receive radio signals from a mobile unit over the air interface Um. To perform this function completely, the signals are encoded, encrypted, multiplexed, modulated, and then fed to the antenna system at the cell site. In order to keep the mobile synchronized, BTS transmits frequency and time synchronization signal over a devoted channel called a Frequency Correction Channel. Functions performed by a BTS are: • encodes, encrypts, multiplexes, modulates and feeds the RF signals to the antenna, • time and frequency synchronization signals transmitted from BTS, • voice communication through a full rate or half rate (enable) speech channel, • the received signal from the MS is equalized, decoded, and decrypted before demodulation, • timing advance computation, • uplink radio channel measurements, • mobile random access detection, • Frequency Hopping management.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-6

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols BSC General Architecture and Functions BSC

- Radio Resource management for its BTSs

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

- Intercell hand-over

Processing Unit

- Allocation of channels for communication - Reallocation of frequencies among BTSs

X.25 controller

O&M

Switching matrix

- Time and frequency synchronization to BTSs - Controls frequency hopping PCM controller

BTS

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Abis interface

PCM controller

A interface

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

To Network SubSystem

7-7

BSC architecture mainly involves a processor unit, a switching matrix, and trunk control units (PCM and X.25). Note that through the Processing Unit and the X.25 controller, the BSC downloads new software releases from the O&M Center. In turn, all data of interest to the O&M is buffered and forwarded to the O&M Center when being asked or transmitted periodically. The Base Station Controller (BSC) is connected to the Mobile Switching Center on one side and to the BTSs on the other. Functions performed by a BSC are: • performs the Radio Resource (RR, explained below) management for the cells under its control. It assign and release frequencies for all MSs in its own area, • performs the Intercell hand-over for MSs moving between BTSs in its control, • reallocates frequencies to the BTSs in its area to meet locally heavy demands during peak hours or on special events, • controls the power transmission of both BTSs and MSs in its area, • provides the time and frequency synchronization reference signals, broadcast for each BTS.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-7

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols TRAU Architecture and Functions Converts the 13 kbps GSM speech frame either into a 64 kbps T1 PCM µ-law or into an E1 PCM A-law

Routes the users' data stream to suitable Inter-working function

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

TRAU Transcoder Controller

T1 trunk up to 92 user's and control channels

Ater BSC

interface

A External PCM Interface

12.01/EN

January, 2000

MSC

interface

E1 trunk up to 120 user's channels PE/TRD/GR/0101

T1 trunk = up to 24 user's channels

Transcoder

E1 trunk = up to 31 user's channels Architecture, Functions and Protocols

7-8

Depending on the relative cost of transmission plan, there is some benefit in having the Transcoder/ Rate adapter Unit (TRAU) at the Mobile Switching Center (MSC) location. Moreover, in that case, the TRAU is still considered functionally as a part of the Base Station SubSystem (BSS). The TRAU is a device that takes 13 kbps speech (or data) multiplexes and two of them, to convert into standard 64 kbps data: • within the BTS, the 13 kbps speech (or data) are brought up to level of 16 kbps by inserting additional synchronizing data to make up the difference between a 13 kbps speech or lower data rate, • the TRAU converts the 13 kbps speech into 64 kbps T1 µ-law or E1 A-law PCM time slots, • furthermore the TRAU routes the users' data stream to a suitable device that inter-works with the recipient modem. It is worth noting that: • four traffic channels are multiplexed on a 64 kbps PCM circuit at the Ater interface, • one T1 trunk carries up to 92 traffic and control channels, • one E1 trunk carries up to 120 traffic and control channels.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-8

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols NSS Architecture Site 1

Site 2 AUC

H

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

HLR

D

BSS

D

VLR

BSS

VLR G-interface

B-interface A-interface

MSC

GMSC

Other GSM, PSTN, ISDN

E

IWF

Billing Server

12.01/EN

A-interface Other GSM, PSTN, ISDN

E-interface

F

PE/TRD/GR/0101

B-interface

C-interface

January, 2000

F EIR

SMS-SC

E

IWF

Billing Server

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

7-9

The distributed architecture of the Network and Switching Sub-system is organized with MSCs, servers and data bases, linked by interfaces normalized (B to G). There are two types of MSC to provide switching services to a defined part of the PLMN: • MSC, used to establish traffic channels and to switch signaling messages between PLMN entities and other GSM networks or fixed networks, • Gateway MSC (GMSC), is a specialized MSC managing the central data base HLR, containing permanent and dynamic subscriber data. All the information requested by the different functions is stored in four types of data bases connected to (or included in) the MSCs: • HLR or Home Location Register: permanent data specific to each subscriber, including service profile, location and billing options, • VLR or Visitor Location Register: in order to minimize access to the HLR, MSC uses this data base, which contains working data for subscribers moving within its coverage area (LAs), • Network security and access control are provided by the Authentication Center (AUC) and by the Equipment Identity Register (EIR): - AUC: to ensure that only authorized users have access to the network, - EIR: to maintain lists of stolen, faulty and valid equipment identities. NSS includes also specific equipment such as: • Inter-Working Functions (IWF): to provide the different bearer services offered by the network, • Short Message Services-Service Center (SMS-SC): used to store and forward point to point short messages, • Billing Server. These equipment or software elements are running applications more or less operator dependent.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-9

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols Home Location Register

HLR "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Subscriber Management Center

Permanent records - MSISDN - IMSI - Subscriber's service provision

Temporary records - VLR address - Ciphering items (Kc, Sres, Rand)

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

7-10

The Home Location Register (HLR) is a database that holds information upon the subscribers. It performs the following functions: • Handling of permanent subscribers data: - Identification: IMSI, MSISDN. - Subscription information: related services options (Teleservices, Bearer Services and Supplementary Services). - Service limitations (e.g. roaming limitation). • Handling of temporary subscribers data: - Current VLR address where the subscriber roams. - Provide VLR with 5 ciphering items. • Dialogue with the AUC database (see next slide).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-10

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols Authentication Center

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

AUC Ki

Ciphering Triplets RAND

5

HLR Request

Security A3, A8 algorithms

SRES, Kc, RAND

IMSI

AUC provides

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

7-11

The Authentication Center (AUC) is a database that contains the secret authentication key Ki of each subscriber and generates security related parameters to protect the network operator and subscribers against fraud. The same Ki is to be found in the subscribers SIM card and is used to generate these ciphering items named triplets: • a RANDom number RAND, • a Signature RESponse SRES, using A3 algorithm, • a ciphering Key Kc, using A8 algorithm and computed each time authentication is performed. Software keys Kc and SRES are never passed over the air interface. The two algorithms A3 and A8 are operator dependent. For security reason AUC has often an internal interface with the HLR. However this is a choice of implementation, it is up to HLR to start security algorithms located in AUC.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-11

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols Visitor Location Register

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

VLR LA1

Permanent records - IMSI - Subscriber’s service provision

LA3

Temporary records

LA2

- Ciphering items (Kc, Sres, Rand) - LAI - TMSI

LA4

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

7-12

When a mobile station enters the LA borders, it signals its arrival to the MSC that stores its identity in the Visitor Location Register (VLR). The information necessary to manage the MS is contained in the HLR and is transferred to the VLR so that it can be easily retrieved if so required. The Location Registration procedure allows the subscriber data to follow the movements of the MS. For such reason the data contained in the VLR and in the HLR are more or less the same. Nevertheless, the data are present in the VLR only as long as the MS is registered in the area related to that VLR. The VLR supports a mobile paging, and tracking subsystem in the local area where the mobile is presently roaming. The detailed functions of VLR are as follows: • Works with the HLR and AUC on authentication. • Relays cipher key from HLR to BSS for encryption and decryption. • Controls allocation of the new TMSI numbers that can be periodically changed to secure a subscriber's identity. • Supports paging (incoming calls). • Tracks the state of all mobile in its area.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-12

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols Equipment Identity Register

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

EIR Black list (barred ME)

IMEI

White list (valid ME)

Mobile Equipment

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Gray list (faulty ME)

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

7-13

The Equipment Identity Register (EIR) is a database that performs a screening function within the network. It keeps track of all valid and invalid Mobile Equipment by storing their International Mobile Equipment Identities (IMEI). Data for the Equipment Identity Register are provided by: • Manufacturers of Mobile Equipment which provide complete lists of IMEI for the Mobile Stations that they produce. • Other network operators which provide lists of malfunctioning Mobile Equipment. • Police organizations which provide lists of stolen Mobile Equipment. The Equipment Identity Register actually maintains three lists of International Mobile Equipment Identities: • The black list contains a list of all Mobile Equipment (ME) that are barred from using the network (e.g.: stolen). • The white list contains a list of all the serial numbers of International Mobile Equipment Identities that have been allocated in the Global System for Mobile Communications countries. • The gray list contains a list of faulty Mobile Equipment. This equipment will be logged but not barred. The GSM Recommendations state that the service providers should decide how often they wish to check the validity of the Mobile Equipment with the EIR. "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-13

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols InterWorking Function

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

BSS

Mobile Switching Center

PSTN

Modem

MS

Data + DTE signals Rate adaptation DTE signaling

Modem

IWF

Land-DTE

DTE PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

7-14

Because of GSM providing a wide range of data services to its subscribers, GSM interfaces with the various public and private data networks currently available. It is the aim of the Inter-Working Function (IWF) to provide this interfacing capability. Networks to which IWF presently provides interface as follows: • PSTN, • ISDN, • Circuit-switched public data networks (CSPDN), • Packet-switched public data networks (PSPDN). It provides the subscriber with access to data rate and protocol conversion facilities so that data can be transmitted between GSM Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) and a land line DTE (the recipient). Furthermore it allocates a suitable modem from its modem bank when required. This is the case when a GSM DTE, a Fax machine, exchange data with a land Fax machine which works over analog modem (V32). The IWF also provides direct connect interfaces for customer-provided equipment such as X.25 PADs. Different protocol conversion may be required for signaling and traffic messages. This includes data rate adaptation and the addition of signaling bits reformatting. The IWF is a part of the Mobile Switching Center. "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-14

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols Protocol Model

NSS

MS

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

CM

CM

MM

BTS

RR

O&M RR

L A P D m

L A P D m

RADIO

RADIO

12.01/EN

O&M R

RSM

R R S

M

B D S T S M A A P P

PCM

Abis Interface January, 2000

BSSAP

BSSAP

L A P D

L A P D

Um Interface PE/TRD/GR/0101

MM

BSC

B RR D S T S M A A P P

M A P

I S U P /

T C A P

SCCP

SCCP

MTP3

MTP3

MTP3

MTP2

MTP2

MTP2

PCM

PCM E1/T1

MTP1

T U P

SCCP

A-Interface

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

7-15

Connection Management (CM) and Mobility Management (MM) messages are transparent to the BSS, they are delivered at end-to-end users (MS and NSS) by the relaying of underlaying protocols (LAPDm, LAPD, SS7). To establish a connection with the MS, CM must require MM, which in turn requires RR to open the radio connection. The RR procedures handles set-up, re-establishment, handover, TCH mode modify and release of calls. The MM procedures provides registration, location and authentication of MS. The CM procedures provides: • Supplementary Services (SS). • Call Control (CC). • Short Message Service (SMS).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-15

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols Radio Interface Protocols Involved Level 3

Connection ConnectionManagement Management

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Mobility MobilityManagement Management Radio RadioResource ResourceManagement Management Level 2 = LAPDm Logical Channels

Multiplexing

RACH

Level 1 Physical Channels

BCCH

TC0

PCH AGCH

SDCCH

TC11 SACCH TC13

FACCH

TC24

SACCH

IDLE

(example) PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

7-16

This Interface located between MS and BTS (also called the Radio interface) has these features: • Totally normalized. • Full inter-operability between Mobile Stations and infrastructure from different manufacturers. Organized in 3 levels: • Level 1 physical support: - Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) frame and FDMA. - Logical channel multiplexing. • Level 2 LAPDm Protocol (modified from LAPD): - No flag. - No error retransmission mechanism due to real time constraints (window = 1). • Level 3 Radio interface layer (RIL3) Protocol involves three sub-layers: - Radio Resource Management (RR): paging, power control, ciphering execution, handover. - Mobility Management (MM): security, location, IMSI attach/detach. - Connection Management (CM): Call Control (CC), Supplementary Services (SS) Short Message Services (SMS), Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) facilities.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-16

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols Abis Interface

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

1 - Presentation

Data

300, 1200, 1200/75, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400 bit/s • Radio • O&M

LAPD

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

PCM

PCM

Speech 1 TS = 4 channels

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

7-17

Message exchanges between the BTS and the BSC: • Traffic exchanges. • Signaling exchanges for call set up and BTS operation and maintenance. Physical access between BTS and BSC: PCM digital links at 2.048 Mbit/s (E1) or 1.544 Mbit/s (T1), carrying 32 or 24 timeslots at 64 kbit/s. Speech: • Conveyed in timeslots at 4 x 16 kbit/s (remote transcoders). Data: • Conveyed in timeslots at 4 x 16 kbit/s. • The initial user rate, which may be 300, 1200, 1200/75, 2400, 4800 9600 or 14400 bit/s is adjusted to 16 kbit/s.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-17

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols Abis Interface 2 - Protocols BTS side

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

TRX

BSC side

BCF

RSM O&M

RSL

RSM = Radio Subsystem Management

Level 3 layer

O&M

RSM O&M

RSL = Radio Signaling Link

LAPD Level 2 layer

OML

O&M = Operation and Maintenance

RSL

OML

OML = Operation and Maintenance Link

Level 1 layer

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

7-18

This interface located between BTS and BSC has these features: • Partly normalized. • No inter-operability (currently) proprietary. Organized in 3 levels: • Level 1 PCM transmission (E1 or T1): - Speech coded at 16 kbit/s and sub-multiplexed in 64 kbit/s time slots. - Data which rate is adapted and synchronized. • Level 2 LAPD protocol: Standard HDLC procedure: - RSL = Radio Signaling Link. - OML = Operation and Maintenance Link. • Level 3 application protocols: - RSM = Radio Subsystem Management. - O&M = Operation and Maintenance procedure.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-18

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols LAPD and LAPDm Frames

0 to 260 octets F

Information

FCS

Control

Address

F

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

LAPD SAPI

TEI

N (S)

N (R)

End of frame

Start of frame

0 to 21 octets

information

Control

Address

LAPDm N (R)

N (S)

SAPI

FCS F SAPI TEI PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

: : : :

Frame Check Sequence Flag Service Access Point Identifier Terminal Equipment Identifier

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

7-19

For each BSC and related BTS terminal port (TEI), three types of links may be activated depending on the SAPI parameter value: The Radio Signaling Link: • Radio resource management procedures SAPI = 0. • Short messages, point to point SAPI = 3. The Operation and Maintenance Link: O&M procedures SAPI = 62. LAPD messages: • downlink: - OML: software download, channel configuration, - RSL: paging, HO command, • uplink: OML notification (event report), and RSL channel requirement. LAPDm frames are derived from LAPD frames: • no flags for synchronization, • without TEI and FCS, • with shorter address, • with shorter control field.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-19

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols Ater Interface

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

1 - Presentation

Speech 1 TS = 4 channels Data 300, 1200, 1200/75, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400 bit/s LAPD

• O&M SS7 X.25

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

7-20

Purpose Handling messages between BSC and TCU (TransCoder Unit). Characteristics Physical access at 1.544 Mbit/s or 2.048 Mbit/s (24 or 32 time slots at 64 kbit/s) carrying: • Reserved signaling channels according to CCITT No. 7 (CCS7). • Speech and data channels (16 kbit/s). • BSC - TCU signaling link (LAPD). • O&M data to OMC-R (X.25) via MSC (through the Network only). Ater interface links carry up to: • 120 communications (E1). • 92 communications (T1).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-20

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols Ater Interface 2 - Traffic Channel and Signaling Links

Ater interface

A interface

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

TCU LAPD TS 1

O&M

SS7 TS

BSC

SS7 TS

Speech TS

Transcoding

Data TS

Rate Adaptation

MSC

Speech TS

Data TS

OMC X.25 TS 2 *

X.25 TS 2 *

PCM link

PCM link

* if used PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

7-21

Signaling messages are carried on specific timeslots (TS): • LAPD signaling TS between the BSC and the TCU. • SS7 TS between the BSC and the MSC. • X.25 TS 2 reserved for specific configurations. TS 1 carries LAPD protocol and is reserved for management messages between the BSC and the TCU. It is used by the BSC for: • TCU monitoring (mixer, PCM interface, transcoder and control units, LAPD signaling terminal, etc.). • TCU configuration (BSC-TCU signaling link, A-interface PCM, semaphore channels, Ainterface circuits, synchronization and transcoding functions). • TCU initialization. • TCU software downloading. • A and Ater interfaces management. • Synchronization management. • Transcoding management. SS7 TS is intended for BSC-MSC link and is dedicated for BSSAP messages transportation. TS 2 is reserved if the O&M data are transmitted to the OMC-R via a PCM link’s TS, managed by the A-interface. Signaling messages on the LAPD TS 1 are processed only by the TCU. SS7 TS and TS 2, if they are reserved, are switched by the TCU but remain transparent to it. "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-21

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols A Interface 1 - Presentation

NSS

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

BSS

Speech/Data 1 TS = 1 channel SS7

X.25

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

7-22

Message exchanges between the MSC and the BSS (TCU): • Users traffic transport (speech + data). • Signaling transport. Physical access BSS MSC: PCM digital links. User’s traffic transport Each time slot corresponds to a traffic channel on the radio interface. The 64 kbit/s speech rate adjustment (A-law or µ-law) and the 64 kbit/s data rate adaptation are performed at the TCU. Signaling transport CCITT signaling system 7 (SS7). Two parts: • The Message Transfer Part (MTP). • The Signaling Connection Control Part (SCCP).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-22

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols A Interface 2 - Protocols BSS

NSS

A-interface

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

To other processes within the BSS To air interface transmission equipment

DTAP

BSS MAP

DTAP

Distribution function

BSS MAP

Other applications, (eg call control)

Distribution function

SCCP

SCCP

MTP

MTP

To other users of the SCCP and MTP

Physical layer

DTAP: Direct Transfer Application Part BSSMAP: BSS Management Application Part PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

SCCP: Signaling Connection Control Part MTP: Message Transfer Part

BSS: Base Station Subsystem MSC: Mobile services Switching Centre

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

7-23

This Interface located between TRAU and MSC has these features: • Totally normalized to allow multivendor equipment. • Full interoperability in most cases and after testing. Based on CCS7 protocol (either ETSI or ANSI). The MTP layers (2 to 3) provide the basic transport system for all CCS7 signaling messages and are responsible for signaling network management and signaling message handling: • Level 1: defines the physical characteristics for a 64 kbit/s signaling data link. • Level 2: ensures secure signaling link by providing error detection and correction, signaling link alignment and error monitoring. • Level 3: ensures that signaling messages are routed through the network in correct sequence and without loss or duplication even in case of link failure. So, MTP finds the destination signaling point and SCCP will deliver the message. The SCCP addressing allows routing to the application within the same network (through the address) or to an external network (through Global translations) using class 0 for connection mode and class 2 for connection oriented mode. A distribution function is added on top of the SCCP to discriminate the BSSMAP from DTAP. The BSSAP is a GSM CCS7 protocol and handles signaling involving MS, the BSS and the MSC. The BSSAP is divided into two parts: • The BSSMAP which consists of messages to be processed either by MSC or BSC (RR). • The DTAP which consists of messages to be transmitted transparently regarding the BSS (MM, CM). "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-23

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols PSTN/ISDN/PSDN Interface

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

GMSC

TUP

ISUP

Toll offices

DUP

Application layer

TUP

ISUP

DUP

Message transfer MTP

MTP

Physical layer

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

7-24

Interface between MSC and: • Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). • Integrated Service Data Network (ISDN). • Packet Switched public Data Network (PSDN). Normalization: • Country dependent. • Inter-operability after local adaptations. The User part is built on services of the MTP to provide connectionless signaling for setting up, monitoring and clearing down the voice or data trunks of GSM CCS7 calls at the PSTN interface taking into consideration that it is connection-oriented at the A interface due to SCCP functions. The User part transports signaling messages associated with the connection between two users in a network. It supplies the trunk signaling capabilities which enable network-wide feature transparency for some network services. There are three main families of user part protocol depending on the application: • The Telephone User Part (TUP) interface with PSTN network. • The ISDN User Part (ISUP), interface with ISDN network. • The Data User Part (DUP), interface with PAD on PSDN network. "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-24

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols General Packet Radio Service GSM/ NSS

PSTN/ISDN

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

BSS GGSN

Internet or Intranets

GPRS/ NSS

PCU SGSN

New standard for efficient data packet routing and transport to and from Packet Data Networks. Service offering includes: – direct IP connectivity – Point-to-Point or Point-to-Multipoint Add-on to GSM, using existing BSS infrastructure

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

7-25

General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) is a packet radio access technique based on GSM radio to transfer data in an efficient manner optimizing the use of network resources. It provides packet radio access to external Packet Data Networks, for instance to the Internet. It offers direct IP connectivity, in a Point-To-Point (PTP) or Point-To-Multipoint (PTM) data transmission mode. GPRS is an add-on to existing GSM networks, i.e., it makes use of the existing GSM radio infrastructure. With Nortel’s GPRS core nodes, Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN) and Gateway GPRS Support Node (GGSN), the upfront investment for operators for initial deployment of GPRS services is limited. Nortel is currently developing the building blocks of GPRS, including: • Packet Control Unit Support Node (PCUSN), • Serving Gprs Support Node (SGSN), • Gateway Gprs Support Node (GGSN). PCUSN and SGSN entities are hosted both on Nortel Magellan Passport, and GGSN on Contivity Extranet Switch 4500.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-25

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols Check Your Learning

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

1- What are the three components of a GSM system?

2- What does a BSS consist of?

3- What are the external interfaces and the internal interfaces of a BSS?

4- What are the main functions of a BTS?

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

7-26

1- What are the three components of a GSM system?

2- What does a BSS consist of?

3- What are the external interfaces and the internal interfaces of a BSS?

4- What are the main functions of a BTS?

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-26

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols Check Your Learning (continue)

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

5- Which technique does help saving links between BTS and BSC?

6- What are the main functions of the BSC?

7- What does the NSS contain?

8- What are the main function of a MSC?

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

7-27

5- Which technique does help saving links between BTS and BSC?

6- What are the main functions of the BSC?

7- What does the NSS contain?

8- What are the main function of a MSC?

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-27

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols Check Your Learning (continue)

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

9- What is the role of the HLR?

10- What is the role of the VLR?

11- What are the three entities of layer 3 involved in the radio interface?

12- What is the layer 2 protocol involved in the Abis interface?

13- What is the Mobile Application Part?

PE/TRD/GR/0101

9-

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols

7-28

What is the role of the HLR?

10- What is the role of the VLR?

11- What are the three entities of layer 3 involved in the radio interface?

12- What is the layer 2 protocol involved in the Abis interface?

13- What is the Mobile Application Part?

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-28

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-29

January, 2000

Architecture, Functions and Protocols Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

7-30

January, 2000

Procedures

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Section 8

Procedures

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Procedures

8-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-1

January, 2000

Procedures Objectives

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Learning the basic procedures, the main call procedures, mobility and roaming features that GSM operates. After completing this lesson you will be able to: • List the GSM procedures that can be activated from MS switch-on until MS switch-off • Explain the main procedures: cell selection, location update, call set-up, call release, handover

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Procedures

8-2

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-2

January, 2000

Procedures Contents 1- Descriptors that GSM uses. 2- GSM ’s actors 3 - Procedures: "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

• Cell selection • Immediate Assignment • Location updates - Registration - Intra-VLR and Inter-VLR - IMSI attach/detach • Authentication • Ciphering • Mobile Originating call • Mobile Terminating call - Paging - End to end • Call release - MS initiated - PSTN initiated • Handovers

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Procedures

8-3

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-3

January, 2000

Procedures

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Descriptors Stored in SIM-Card Global GSM Mobility Card

MNC = 01 (FTM) 10 (SFR) 20 (Bytel)

MCC = 208 (France) 234 (G-B)

The Smart Card to use

GSM IMSI = 15 digits max

Mobile Country Code

Mobile Network Code

3 digits

2/3 digits

Mobile Subscriber Identification Number (MSIN) 8 digits: H1 H2 X X X X X X

NMSI

LAI Mobile Country Code

Mobile Network Code

3 digits

2/3 digits

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Location Area Code LAC

Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity 4 octets

Procedures

8-4

These descriptors are used in different phases of call setup: • International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) is the proprietary identifier of the mobile subscriber within the GSM network and is permanently assigned to him; it consists of MCC, MNC and MSIN: - Mobile Country Code (3 digits) is allocated to the operator country, - Mobile Network Code (2 or 3 digits) is allocated to each operator, - Mobile Subscriber Identification Number (8 digits) is allocated by the GSM network (HLR). • GSM network can assign a Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity (TMSI) to identify the mobile on a local basis (within VLR), allocated to visiting mobile subscribers and correlated with IMSI. • Location Area Identity (LAI) defines a part of a MSC/VLR service area in which a MS can move freely without updating location; it consists of MCC, MNC and LAC. • National Mobile Subscriber Identity (NMSI) consists of the MNC and the MSIN.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-4

January, 2000

Procedures Descriptors Stored in the Network MS-ISDN

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Country Code CC

National Destination Code

Subscriber Number (SN) M1 M2 X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Must be dialed to make a call to mobile subscriber

MSRN

Country Code CC

National Destination Code

Country Code CC

National Destination Code

CC = 33 (France)

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

Roaming Number (RN)

HO-number

NDC = 607, 608, 604 (FTM) = 609, 603 (SFR) = 660, 661, 618 (Bytel) January, 2000

Procedures

Is a PSTN-like number used to reach a roaming MS Is a PSTN-like number to track the MS which hands over to another MSC during call-in-state

8-5

The Mobile Subscriber ISDN Number (MS-ISDN) is the number that the calling party dials in order to reach the GSM subscriber. It is used by the land networks to route calls toward an appropriate GSM network. MSISDN is stored in HLR. The Mobile Subscriber Roaming Number (MSRN) is allocated on a temporary basis when the MS roams into another numbering area. Thus the MSRN shall have the same structure as international ISDN number in the area in which it is allocated. Visited MSC allocates a MSRN upon the VLR request which in turn was requested by the HLR. Upon reception of the MSRN, HLR sends it to the GMSC, which can now route the call to the MSC/VLR exchange where the called subscriber is currently registered. HO number is used for inter-MSC Handovers, to establish a circuit from the serving MSC to the new MSC.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-5

January, 2000

Procedures Descriptor Embodied in the MS

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

IMEI enables the operator to check the Mobile Equipment Identity at call setup and make sure that no stolen or unauthorized MS is used in the GSM network

PE ED TY OV PR AP

TAC Type Approval Code

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

FAC

SNR

SP

Serial NumbeR

(SPare)

Final Assembly Code

Procedures

8-6

Stored inside the Mobile Equipment. Used instead of IMSI or TMSI when both are unavailable (example: Emergency calls without SIM card) or when required by the network (for maintenance). Can be used for EIR database updating (when it exists): • TAC = 6 digits describing the type of equipment. • FAC = 2 digits for identification of the factory. • SNR = 6 digits for the serial number of the device. IMEI may be temporary stored within MSC/VLR to minimize signaling within the Network.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-6

January, 2000

Procedures GSM ’s Actors NSS BSS

Public Switched Telephone Network

MSC

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

BSC BTS

VLR

HLR

AUC Fixed subscriber

Mobile subscriber PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Procedures

8-7

These are the GSM actors that are involved in the following procedures.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-7

January, 2000

Procedures Cell Selection

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Purpose: get synchronization with the GSM network prior establishing any communication.

1

1 BTS-5

1

1

BTS-4

H FCC

1 BTS-3

5

SCH

CH BC

12.01/EN

January, 2000

3 4

BTS-1

This cell

BTS-2

PE/TRD/GR/0101

2

Procedures

8-8

1- MS scans the whole spectrum and stores the strongest level carriers (30 in GSM 900, 40 otherwise). 2- MS tunes to the frequency correction channel (FCCH) of the strongest carrier (BTS-1). 3- MS reads data from the synchronization channel (SCH). 4- MS reads data from broadcast channel (BCCH). 5- MS camps on this BCCH if it is suitable for the MS; otherwise it tries selection on the next strongest beacon carrier.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-8

January, 2000

Procedures Immediate Assignment BTS

MS

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

1

CHANNEL REQUEST

RACH

2

CHANNEL REQUIRED CHANNEL ACTIVATION

4

IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT

AGCH

6

OR 6

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

5

MSC

BSC

3

CHANNEL ACTIVATION ACK. IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT COMMAND

Immediate Assignment

5

CM SERVICE REQUEST

SDCCH or TCH LOCATION UPDAT. REQU.

SDCCH or TCH

January, 2000

Procedures

8-9

The Immediate Assignment procedure is always initiated by the MS and may be triggered by a Paging Request or by a Mobile Originating Service request. Procedure 1- The MS sends a CHANNEL REQUEST message (RACH). 2- The BTS decodes this message and indicates it to BSC through CHANNEL REQUIRED message. 3- The BSC asks BTS to activate a dedicated channel: SDCCH or TCH (if no SDCCH available). 4- Acknowledgement by BTS 5- The BSC sends an IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT COMMAND message to the MS (via the BTS); the MS has to seize the indicated dedicated channel including these values: initial Timing Advance and initial maximum transmission power. 6- Then the MS can request a service on the dedicated channel through: • SERVICE REQUEST message including the access reason (call setup, paging etc.), • LOCATION UPDATING REQUEST message for location.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-9

January, 2000

Procedures Registration: the Very First Location Update 1

1 2

BSS

TMSI Release

3 TMSI

BSC

3 "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

2

IMSI

5

MSC 5 6

BTS

2

6

3

TMSI 5

IMSI VLR id

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

VLR

HLR

LAI

January, 2000

4

Procedures

IMSI TMSI LAI

8-10

1- Channel allocation (Connection request procedure): • the MS sends (on RACH) a CHANNEL REQUEST message, • the network responds with IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT (on dedicated channel). 2- The MS sends to BSS a LOCATION UPDATING REQUEST message with IMSI. 3- The VLR triggers and monitors the Authentication procedure and can also activate Ciphering procedure. 4- The VLR stores the LA of the MS and informs the HLR which: • stores VLR identity, • downloads the subscriber profile, if the MS is allowed to roam. 5- The VLR may assign a TMSI and sends it to the MS in the LOCATION UPDATING ACCEPT message. 6- The MSC releases the connection.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-10

January, 2000

Procedures Intra-VLR Location Update

1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

2

1

BSS

TMSI + old LAI new TMSI

2 BSC 3 4

MSC 3 4

BTS

2 New TMSI

TMSI

3 New LAI

VLR IMSI TMSI LAI

IMSI not Required

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Procedures

8-11

1- Channel allocation (Connection request procedure). 2- The MS sends to the BSS a LOCATION UPDATING REQUEST message (with TMSI and old LAI), relayed to the VLR through the MSC. 3- The VLR stores the new Location Area Identity, then if required assigns a new TMSI and responds to the MS with LOCATION UPDATING ACCEPT message. 4- The MSC releases the connection.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-11

January, 2000

Procedures Inter-VLR Location Update BSS

1 2

TMSI + old LAI

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

newTMSI

5

1 2 BSC

MSC

5 7

BTS

7

2 TMSI New TMSI 5

New LAI

New VLR

Old VLR IMSI, TMSI Old LAI

3

RAND, SRES, 4 Kc

IMSI,TMSI LAI RAND, SRES, Kc

6

IMSI not Required

HLR 6 new VLR id

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Procedures

subscriber data

8-12

1- Channel allocation (connection request procedure). 2- The MS sends to BSS a LOCATION UPDATING REQUEST message, (with TMSI + old LAI) relayed to the VLR through MSC. 3- The new VLR asks the old VLR for MS identity and ciphering items. 4- The old VLR backs new VLR IMSI, RAND, SRES, Kc. 5- The new VLR assigns a TMSI and sends it to the MS over a LOCATION UPDATING ACCEPT message (with cipher mode if required). 6- The new VLR informs the HLR which sends subscriber data and asks the old VLR to erase the previous MS data. 7- The MSC releases connection.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-12

January, 2000

Procedures IMSI Attach

1

CHANNEL REQUEST IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT

BSS 2

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

3 LOCATION UPDATING

REQUEST (IMSI Attach) Authentication 4 Procedure

BSC

3 4

BTS

MSC

5

LOCATION UPDATING 5 ACCEPT (LAC, TMSI)

4

VLR 6

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Procedures

8-13

The IMSI attach procedure is used (if required by the network), to indicate the IMSI as active in the network and is performed by using the Location updating procedure. Procedure 1- MS requests (on RACH) a dedicated channel with CHANNEL REQUEST message using a random number. 2- BSS assigns a dedicated channel (on AGCH) with IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT message using this random number. 3- MS sends (over this dedicated channel) a LOCATION UPDATING REQUEST message including its identity and the IMSI Attach cause. 4- Authentication procedure (if required by the network). 5- MSC responds by sending a LOCATION UPDATING ACCEPT message. 6- In the VLR, a flag is set to indicate that the subscriber is active. This procedure is used only if the update status is updated and if the stored LAI is the same as the one which is actually broadcast on the BCCH of the current serving cell.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-13

January, 2000

Procedures IMSI Detach

1

CHANNEL REQUEST

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT

3

BSS 2 BSC

IMSI DETach INDication CHANNEL RELEASE

BTS

3

IMSI DETach INDication

MSC

4

VLR

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Procedures

8-14

The IMSI detach procedure may be invoked by a MS: • if the MS is switched off, • if the SIM card is detached. Procedure 1- MS requests (on RACH) a dedicated channel with CHANNEL REQUEST message. 2- BSS assigns a dedicated channel (on AGCH) with IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT message. 3- The MS sends IMSI DETach INDication message to the VLR. 4- The VLR sets a flag to indicate that this MS is no longer available; no paging will be done to that MS until IMSI ATTach occurs.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-14

January, 2000

Procedures Authentication 1 - Principle MS

Global GSM Mobility Card

Radio Interface

The Smart Card to use

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

SIM card

AUC

(A3 and A8)

Ki (128 bits)

Ki (128 bits)

A3

RAND

A3

A8

=?

SRESm (32 bits)

12.01/EN

SRES A8

A8

OK

CIPHER MODE RAND = RANDom number SRES = Signed RESponse Kc = Ciphering Key Ki = Identification Key

Ki

A3

A3

SRESm A8

PE/TRD/GR/0101

(RAND, SRES, Kc)

RAND (128 bits)

GSM

Ki

NSS

BSS

Kc

Kc

January, 2000

Procedures

8-15

Purpose: authentication of the subscriber, to prevent access of unregistered users: • Authentication is performed by requiring from an algorithm A3 the correct answer to a random number input. • Eavesdropping recording of signaling is inefficient since there is never twice the same request. • A3 algorithm is operator-dependent. Principle • The NSS transmits a non-predictable number RAND to the MS. • The SIM card and the NSS compute the signature SRESm, using algorithm A3, from the RAND and a secret key Ki. • The MS transmits its signature SRESm to the NSS. • The NSS tests the two SRES for validity. • Each time authentication A3 algorithm runs, concurrently A8 algorithm is used to produce a ciphering key Kc.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-15

January, 2000

Procedures Authentication 2 - Procedure

SRESm CIPHER MODE

4

6

RAND

BSC 7

6

Ciphering Command

BTS

Purpose: Avoid logging of lost, stolen or forgery SIM-Cards.

4

SRESm

MSC 7 6

HLR 1

Ki

3

RAND

4

7

VLR SRESm = SRES ?

1 A3

5

Triplets

RAND

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

6

BSS 4

SRESm

RAND

3 (RAND, SRES, Kc) 2 AUC (A3 and A8)

SRESm

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Procedures

8-16

Procedure 1- The VLR sends a Map Send Parameters message to the HLR which relays this message to the AUC. 2- The AUC then generates some RAND numbers and applies algorithms A3 and A8 to provide the authenticated signature SRES and the cipher key Kc. 3- The AUC returns the triplets (RAND, SRES, Kc) to HLR which relays them to the VLR. 4- The VLR now sends a Map Authenticate message to the MSC which in turn sends to the MS an AUTHENTICATION REQUEST message containing Rand; the Kc is also sent but stops at the BTS. 5- The SIM-Card calculates the required response SRESm, using RAND, algorithm A3 and authentication key Ki. 6- The MS returns SRESm to VLR in AUTHENTICATION RESPONSE. 7- VLR checks SRES = SRESm, then sends to the MSC a MM Service accept message; otherwise VLR denies access: the MS will receive an AUTHENTICATION REQUEST.

* The operator can modify the period of activation through parameters: for example, he can authenticate every five requests (for each subscriber).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-16

January, 2000

Procedures Ciphering 1 - Principle MS

BTS

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Frame Number (22 bits)

Block (114 bits)

Data to transmit

A5

Block (114 bits)

+

Received data

+

Frame Number (22 bits)

A5

Kc (64 bits)

PE/TRD/GR/0101

Radio interface

+

Block (114 bits)

Ciphered data

Kc (64 bits)

Block (114 bits)

Received data

+ +

Data to transmit

: exclusive-or 12.01/EN

January, 2000

Procedures

8-17

Radio path ciphering, in particular ciphering of all subscriber information, aims to prevent third party tapping (eavesdropping). What is encrypted?: • Signaling (Subscriber Id.). • Speech or data. The encryption of signaling and user speech or data, is performed at the MS as well as at the BTS (symmetric encryption) using the same Kc and the A5 algorithm. Each time a Mobile Station is authenticated, this MS and the Network also compute the ciphering key Kc (algorithm A8) with the same inputs RAND and Ki as for the SRES (algorithm A3). The Frame Number FN of the current TDMA frame (within a hyperframe) is another input for the A5 besides the Kc. The output of Encryption algorithm A5 is a ciphering sequence of 114 bits. Exclusive OR operation is applied between data to be ciphered and the ciphering sequence in order to produce either ciphered or deciphered data. Algorithm A5 is not operator dependent to achieve international roaming between any Mobile Station and BSS infrastructure whatever the operator.Two types of ciphering algorithms are available: A5/1 et A5/2, but only one ciphering algorithm A5 is supported at a time in a BTS. The BSC checks the availability of the A5 algorithms in the MS. If the BSS does not support the same ciphering algorithm as the MS, the calls will be unencrypted. The ciphering BSS capability is an O&M parameter defined for all the BTS of the BSC.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-17

January, 2000

Procedures Ciphering 2 - Procedure BSS

CIPHER MODE COMMAND

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

3

4

Kc BSC

CIPHER MODE COMPLETE

Kc

6

BTS

Ciphered data

A5

Purpose: avoid communication to be tapped.

TDMA#

Kc

MSC

CIPHER MODE COMPLETE

+

5

2

SET CIPHER MODE (Kc)

✁❁❚❅❒✟▼❃❙◆❉ ❐✟▲❄❒✁❆✟✝❊ ▲❄❆✁✟✝❏❋❇❑❈

1

(Rand, SRES, Kc)

VLR

Rand

Ki

A8 Kc PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Procedures

8-18

Ciphering is normally required for all user transactions over the RF link when the subscriber has been authenticated by the system. It is worth noting that this is an optional feature and it is dependent of the operator. Procedure 1- Ciphering begins with the VLR sending the MSC a SET CIPHER MODE (MAP message) containing the value of Kc. 2- The MSC sends the ciphering key to the BSS (actually the BTS) in a CIPHER MODE COMMAND (BSSMAP message). 3- The BSS in turn sends an CIPHERING MODE COMMAND (RR message) to the MS. 4- The MS switches to encrypted transmission and reception, then sends back to BSS an CIPHERING MODE COMPLETE (RR message). 5- After the BSS receives this message, it switches to encrypted transmission and reception for subsequent burst. 6- The BSS then sends a CIPHER MODE COMPLETE (BSSMAP message) to the MSC.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-18

January, 2000

Procedures Mobile Originating Call BSS

MS Dialing

1

VLR

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT

3 3

2

Ciphering procedure

SETUP (basic) or EMERGENCY

4

7

CM SERVICE REQUEST

Authentication procedure

CALL PROCEEDING

SETUP

4

5

CALL PROCEEDING 7

CONNECT

Path Established

ACM 9

ANM 11

CONNECT ACKnowledge

11 January, 2000

IAM

6

Ring Ringing

ALERTING

12.01/EN

7

Assignment procedure

Ringing

PE/TRD/GR/0101

2

CM SERVICE REQUEST

2

Sending Number

PSTN

MSC

CHANNEL REQUEST

8 10

ACM = Address Complete Message ANM = ANswer Message IAM = Initial Address Message

Procedures

8-19

1- The MS originates the call by sending a CHANNEL REQUEST message (on RACH). 2- Immediate assignment: channel allocation with TCH / FACCH or SDCCH. 3- The VLR launches authentication (if required) and completes ciphering. 4- The MS initiates call establishment by sending a SETUP message (called party number) to the MSC. 5- The MSC in turn checks mobile subscriber capabilities with VLR for desired service. 6- If it agrees, the MSC relays the called number over an ISUP Initial Address Message. 7- The MSC also sends a CALL PROCEEDING message to the MS (assigning TCH / FACCH EA in case of Early Assignment). 8- Recipient PSTN switch rings the land telephone and returns an ISUP Address Complete Message to the MSC. 9- Upon receiving this message, the MSC alerts the MS with an ALERTING message. 10- Called party goes off hook, thus PSTN sends to the MSC an ISUP ANswer Message. MSC then connects MS (assigning a TCH in case of OACSU). 11- Call is accepted (CONNECT/CONNECT ACK) and the conversation starts. In case of Emergency MO Call, the SETUP message (basic call) is replaced by the EMERGENCY one.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-19

January, 2000

Procedures Mobile Terminating Call 1 - Paging Principle LA1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

6

BSC1

4

BTS11

5 BTS12

6

5

MSC/ VLR

3

1

GMSC

PSTN

BSC2

BTS21

2 BTS22

LA2

HLR BSC3

BTS23

BTS31

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Procedures

8-20

Main difference with MO Call procedure is the Paging of the Mobile Station. When the MS is in Idle mode, the network do not knows the cell but only the Location Area where the MS is located. Since RR sessions are only established at the initiative of the MS, the role of the Paging procedure is to trigger that operation. Principle 1- A call from the fixed network (PSTN) is switched to the Gateway MSC (GMSC). 2- The GMSC reads in the HLR the identity of the MSC/VLR (or Visitor MSC) handling the Location Area of the Mobile Station. 3- The GMSC routes the call to the VMSC. 4- The VMSC reads the LA where the MS is located, into its VLR. 5- The VMSC sends instructions to one or several BSC (BSC1 and BSC2) to page the MS in the different cells of LA1. 6- BSC1 and BSC2 page the MS in the BTSs of the Location Area LA1. (BTS11, BTS12, BTS21). GMSC and VMSC are software functions. Use of MSRN = only case of GSM where a circuit is established before is answered.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-20

January, 2000

Procedures Mobile Terminating Call 2 - Detailed Paging Procedure Visitor PLMN VLR "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Home PLMN

International SS7 Provide Roaming Number (IMSI)

5

HLR 4

Roaming Number (MSRN)

6

9

PAGING REQUEST (TMSI)

Send info to I/C (MSRN)

PAGE (TMSI + LA)

8

11

BSS

PAGING REQUEST 10 (TMSI + LA)

VMSC

Send Routing Information (MSISDN)

Routing Information (MSRN)

1 MSISDN

3 IAM (MSRN)

7 GMSC

IAM 2 (MSISDN)

ISDN

PN IAM MSISDN MSRN

: Initial Address Message : Mobile Station Integrated Services Digital network Number : Mobile Station Roaming Number

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

IMSI GMSC VMSC TMSI

: : : :

International Mobile Subscriber Identity Gateway MSC Visitor MSC Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity

Procedures

8-21

Procedure 1- The caller subscriber access the ISDN by dialing the called MS-ISDN number. 2- Transmission of MS-ISDN number to GMSC through IAM (Initial Address Message). 3- Transmission of MS-ISDN number to HLR through SRI (Send Routing Information). 4- The HLR interrogates the VLR (Visitor MSC) that is currently serving the user. 5- The VLR returns a routing number (MSRN) to the HLR, which passes it back to the GMSC. 6- The MSRN is transmitted to GMSC (address of appropriate VMSC). 7- The GMSC calls VMSC through IAM (with MSRN). 8- The MSC asks VLR to establish where the called party is located. 9- The VLR gives location information (LA) to MSC with PAGE message. 10- The VMSC alerts with PAGING REQUEST message, all BSCs in charge of cells belonging to this LA. 11- All the BTS page the MS over PCH; depending upon the paging type message, up to four different TMSI may be contained in the page command. There are three types of PAGING REQUEST message: • Type 1: sent on the PCH to up two MSs, to trigger channel by these; MSs are identified by their TMSI or IMSI. • Type 2: sent on the PCH to two or three MS; two of the MS are identified by their TMSI while the third is identified either by its IMSI or its TMSI. • Type 3: sent on the PCH to four MS which are identified by their TMSIs. "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-21

January, 2000

Procedures Mobile Terminating Call 3 - End to End Procedure

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

VMSC

BSS

MS

PAGING REQUEST

PAGING REQUEST (TMSI or IMSI, LA)

4

IAM (MSRN)

3

PSTN

GMSC 2

IAM (MSISDN)

1

Dialing

CHANNEL REQUEST (LAC, Cell ID)

5

IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT 6 (SDCCH or TCH) CM SERVICE REQUEST (Paging Response)

7

8 9

Ringing 10

PAGING RESPONSE (TMSI or IMSI, LA)

Authentication procedure Ciphering procedure Setup, Assignment, Alerting

11

CONNECT

12

PE/TRD/GR/0101

7

12

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Address Complete Message ANswer Message

Procedures

Path Established 8-22

Procedure 12345-

PSTN sends an IAM (with the MSISDN) to the GMSC. GMSC sends an IAM (with the MSRN) to the VMSC. The VMSC sends a PAGING REQUEST MM message to the BSS. The BSS sends a PAGING REQUEST (with IMSI or TMSI) to the MS. The MS must request a channel (CHANNEL REQUEST message with paging cause) over the RACH, within 0.5 second. 6- The BSS complies and assigns (on AGCH) a dedicated channel to the MS with IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT message. 7- The MS sends a PAGING RESPONSE to the VMSC via the BSS. 8/9- Authentication and Ciphering procedures (if required). 10- Setup, Assignment, Alerting procedures (see MS Originating Call). 11- Alerting is sent to PSTN with an ACM (ISUP message). 12- CONNECT and ANM messages are sent to the PSTN: call is completed.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-22

January, 2000

Procedures Call Release 1 - Mobile Initiated

DISCONNECT

2

2

RELEASE

DISCONNECT RELEASE

3

3

RELEASE COMPLETE

4

5

CHANNEL RELEASE 6 7

PSTN

Call in progress

1 "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

MSC

BSS

MS

Release

RELEASE INDICATION RF Channel Release procedure 8 9

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Release tone

Procedures

8-23

Call release can be initiated by either the PSTN user or the mobile user. BSC is responsible for BSS resources, MSC is responsible for NSS and PSTN connection. Procedure 1- Call is currently in progress. 2- The MS initiates the release of a call by sending a DISCONNECT message to the MSC. 3- The MSC returns to the MS a RELEASE message. 4- The MS acknowledges with a RELEASE COMPLETE message. 5- The MSC can send the Release message to the PSTN without waiting for the RELEASE COMPLETE MM message from the MS. 6- The BSC requests the MS to return to Idle mode with CHANNEL RELEASE message. 7- The BTS informs the BSC with RELEASE INDICATION that signaling link is disconnected. 8- BSC requests BTS to de-activate RF Channel (TCH): Channel Release. 9- The PSTN informs the land terminal with appropriate tone. Abnormal termination is monitored by a set of timers (operator configurable) to ensure resources are not unused/unavailable.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-23

January, 2000

Procedures Call Release 2 - PSTN Initiated

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

1

3

3 BSC

4 5

1

1

BSS 4

5

BTS

MSC

REL 6

2

RLC

PSTN

1

2

Purpose: informs the mobile then releases radio and network resources. On hook

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Procedures

8-24

Procedure 1- The call is in progress. 2- The release process starts with an ISUP Release message from the land network. 3- Upon receiving this message, the MSC initiates the release of the call by sending a DISCONNECT message to the MS. 4- MS replies by sending a RELEASE CHANNEL message to the MSC. 5/6- MSC in turn, backs to the MS a RELEASE COMPLETE message and sends to the PSTN a Release Complete message.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-24

January, 2000

Procedures Reasons for Handover Prevention

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Rescue Signal strength

Distance

Quality

Maintenance

Lack of resources: Directed Retry

Power budget Micro cellular environment

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Procedures

8-25

Decision criteria • Bad quality. • Weak signal strength. • Cell boundaries (Distance). • Power budget (optimization). • Traffic constraints.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-25

January, 2000

Procedures Mobility and Handover The Five Types of Handover MSC-B

MSC-A

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

BSC-C BTS C1

BSC-B

BSC-A

BTS B1 BTS A2

1 BTS A1

4 3

2

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

5

January, 2000

1- Intra-Cell HO 2- Intra-BTS HO 3- Intra-BSC HO 4- Inter-BSC HO 5- Inter-MSC HO

Procedures

8-26

1- Intra-Cell Handover: the MS is handed over to another channel on the same cell, under the same BTS. 2- Intra-BTS Handover: the MS is handed over to another channel on a different cell, under the control of the same BTS. 3- Intra-BSC Handover: the MS is handed over to another channel on a different cell, under the control of a different BTS of the same BSC. 4- Inter-BSC Handover: the MS is handed over to another channel on a different cell, under the control of a different BSC of the same MSC. 5- Inter-MSC Handover: the MS is handed over to another channel on different cell, under another MSC of the same PLMN.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-26

January, 2000

Procedures Handover Preparation

MSC

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

BSC

BTS-1

Me as u re rem su lts ent

r he ot els s n an an sc ch MS con a be

BTS-2

Cell 1 Cell 2 PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Procedures

8-27

To avoid losing a call in progress, when the Mobile Station leaves the radio coverage of the cell in charge. Procedure: Three steps: • Handover decision (based on measurements results). • Choice of the target cell. • Handover execution. Handover topology • Intra BTS (intra and inter cell). • Inter BSC. • Inter MSC including (subsequent). • Microcellular environment.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-27

January, 2000

Procedures Handover Decision

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Decision criteria: - bad quality, - weak signal strength, - cell boundaries, - etc.

MSC

BSC

e bl r ta ove i su d 6) of han = st for um i L s ll x im ce (ma

BTS-1 BTS-2

Cell 1 Cell 2 PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Procedures

8-28

Handover is initiated by the network based on radio subsystem criteria (RF level, quality, distance) as well as network directed criteria (current traffic loading per cell, maintenance requests, etc.). In order to determine if a handover is required, due to RF criteria, the MS shall take radio measurements from neighboring cells; these measurements are reported to the serving cell on a regular basis.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-28

January, 2000

Procedures

d an m S m Co he M HO to t

MSC

BSC

HO ds an S mm e M Co to th

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Handover Execution

BTS-1 BTS-2

Cell 1 Cell 2 PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Procedures

8-29

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-29

January, 2000

Procedures Intra-BSC Handover BTS1

MS

BTS2 HO INDICATION

1

HO Initiation

CHANNEL ACTIVATE

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

3 HO COMMAND

4

5 HO ACCESS * 7

PHYSICAL INFO **

HO DETECTION

8

HO Execution 10

2

CHANNEL ACTIVATE ACK

HO COMMAND

6

9

HandOver COMPLETE 11

HO Acknowledg.

ESTABLISH INDICATION

HO COMPLETE

RF CHANNEL RELEASE 14

MSC

BSC

12

HO COMPLETE

13

RF CHANNEL RELEASE ACK

* this message may be repeated up to 4 times ** only if Handover asynchronous PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Procedures

8-30

1- The BTS1 triggers HandOver by sending a HandOver INDICATION message to the BSC. 2- The BSC allocates if available a new channel from the BTS2. 3- The BTS2 establishes this channel, and responds to the BSC. 4/5- The BSC sends a HandOver COMMAND to the MS (on the FACCH) via the BTS1, assigning a new channel, its characteristics, the power level to use, the frequency hopping set, the Timing Advance TA if possible, and whether to use synchronous or asynchronous HO. 6a- In synchronous mode, MS sends to the BTS2 in successive multiframe slots (on the FACCH) four HandOver ACCESS messages. It then activates the new channel in both directions. 6b- In asynchronous mode, MS starts sending to the BTS2 a continuous stream of HandOver ACCESS messages, by sending access bursts on TCH until it receives the TA to apply. 8- In asynchronous mode, MS receives the TA. 10/11- In both cases, MS replies with a HandOver COMPLETE message to the BSC over the new FACCH. 13/14- BSC in turn directs BTS1 to release the previous channel by sending a RF CHANNEL RELEASE message with ACKnowledgment from the BTS1. "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-30

January, 2000

Procedures Inter-BSC Handover MS

1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

HO Initiation HO COMMAND

MSC

BSC1

BTS1 HO INDICATION

HO REQUIRED

2

HO COMMAND

9

3

BSC2 HO REQUEST

4 6

7

8

CHANNEL ACTIVATE

CHANNEL ACTIVATE ACK

HO REQUEST ACK

HO COMMAND

BTS2

5

HO ACCESS *

10

HO DETECTION

HO Execution

HO DETECTION PHYSICAL INFO

11

12 13

ESTABLISH INDICATION 14 HandOver COMPLETE

15

HO Acknowledg.

RF CHANNEL RELEASE

CLEAR COMMAND

19

RF CHANNEL RELEASE ACK

20

21

HO COMPLETE

18

HO COMPLETE

17

16

CLEAR COMPLETE

* this message may be repeated up to 4 times PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Procedures

8-31

A communication is established between the mobile subscriber and another user. The Mobile Station moves towards another cell (BTS1 to BTS2). The MSC controls the call, the mobility management and the radio resources, before, during and after the HO. 1- The BTS1 triggers HO by sending a HandOver INDICATION message to the BSC1. 2/3- The BSC1 makes a channel allocation request to the BSC2, via the MSC; HANDOVER REQUIRED shall contain a list of cells, or a single cell, to which the MS can be handed over. 4/6- The BSC2 allocates a channel if available, and responds to the MSC. 7/9- The MSC requests the MS (via BSC1 and BTS1) to connect to the BTS2. 10- The MS requests a radio resource to BTS2: HO ACCESS. 11/12- The BTS2 informs the MSC that it accept the handover. 13- The BTS2 establishes the connection with the MS. 14- The BTS2 orders the BSC2 that the radio link with the MS is established. 15- The MSC switches the call to the MS, (via BSC2 and BTS2) and the MS acknowledges with HO COMPLETE. 16/17- The BTS2 (via BSC2) informs the MSC that the connection is successful. 18- The MSC informs the BSC1 to release radio resource with BTS1: CLEAR COMMAND. 19/21- The BSC1 releases BTS1 radio resource: RF CHANNEL RELEASE. "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-31

January, 2000

Procedures Inter-MSC Handover

BSC 1 BTS

MSC 1

1a 1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

1b

BTS

BSC 2

2a BTS

Terrestrial link

PSTN

2b

3

2

BTS 3a

BTS

BSC 3

3b

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

MSC 2 3

Procedures

8-32

A communication is established between the mobile subscriber and another user. • The Mobile Station moves towards another cell (BTS 2b to BTS 3a). • The BTS 2b sends an HANDOVER INDICATION to BSC2 which informs MSC1. • The MSC1 sends a Transfer Request to MSC2. • The MSC2 requests the BSC3 to allocate a traffic channel (TCH). • The MSC2 informs the MSC1 that the channel has been successfully allocated. • The MSC1 requests the BSC2 to hand over the call. • The BSC2 requests the MS, via BTS 2b, to connect via BSC3 to BTS 3a. • The MS establishes a connection with BTS 3a via BSC3. • The BSC3 informs the MSC2 that the connection is successful. • The MSC1 is informed too, via MSC2. • The MSC1 switches the call to MSC2. • The MSC2 routes the call to the MS, via BSC3 and BTS 3a. • The MSC1 releases BSC2 radio resources.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-32

January, 2000

Procedures

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Exercise

Cite the GSM procedures successively involved in the following situations (the IMSI Attach/Detach function is enabled). Indicate the radio channels types used in every procedure. 1- Switch-on the MS and move in Idle mode from one LA to an other one. 2- Establish a call and move in communication from one cell to an other. 3- MS in Idle mode. Reception of a Short Message. 4- Switch-off the MS.

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Procedures

8-33

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-33

January, 2000

Procedures Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

8-34

January, 2000

Base Transceiver Station Functions

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Section 9

PE/TRD/GR/0101

Base Transceiver Station Functions

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Base Transceiver Station Functions

9-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

9-1

January, 2000

Base Transceiver Station Functions

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Objectives

After completing this lesson you will be able to : • Cite the main functions of a BTS; • Cite the three functional parts of one BTS and their role; • Indicate the three different connection modes of a BTS and their benefits/drawbacks; • Describe the BCF module; • Describe the TRX; • Describe the coupling system.

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Base Transceiver Station Functions

9-2

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

9-2

January, 2000

Base Transceiver Station Functions BSS Architecture

MSC

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Radio Interface

TCU

A Interface

S2000H&L BTS

NSS

Ater Interface

Public Telephone Network

BSC

OMC-R

Abis Interface

MS

S8000 Outdoor BTS Radio Interface

OMN Interface

S8000 Indoor BTS

Sun StorEdge A5000

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

BSS January, 2000

Base Transceiver Station Functions

MS 9-3

The BSS radio subsystem contains the following units: • one Base Station Controller (BSC), • one or more Base Transceiver Stations (BTS), • one to seven remote transcoders, in one or more transcoder unit (TCU) cabinets, preferably located on the MSC premises. These different units are linked together through specific BSS interfaces: • each BTS is linked to the BSC by an Abis interface, • the TCUs are linked to the BSC by an Ater interface, • the A interface links the BSC/TCU pair to the MSC.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

9-3

January, 2000

Base Transceiver Station Functions Capabilities of a BTS Features at the radio interface

Traffic Reception

Signal processing

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

DDDDDDDD 12345678

DDDD DD DD 1234 56 78

Transmission Coding

Ciphering

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Interleaving

Speech

A MESSAGES IS PENDING. PLEASE CONTACT NBR 452 587 65

00 2

00 2

10 4

10 4

01 7

01 7

11 3

11 3

Q - 90°

0

+ 90°

1

I GMSK

Demodulation

Modulation Call clearing Power Control

Data

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

Short messages

January, 2000

Coupling system

Measurement preprocessing Handover

Frequency hopping

L1M (Call sustaining)

Base Transceiver Station Functions

9-4

Information transmission: • Speech. • Data. • Short messages. Features at the radio interface • Signal processing: - Modulation/demodulation, equalization. - Ciphering/deciphering. - Coding/decoding, interleaving/de-interleaving. • Frequency hopping. • Coupling system: - Space diversity (reception diversity). • Layer 1 management: - Radio measurements preprocessing - Handover. - Power control. - Call clearing.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

9-4

January, 2000

Base Transceiver Station Functions Capabilities of a BTS (continue) Links and Sites optimization

Defense

LAPD LAPD

Control and Switching Unit A

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

LAPD

Multi-cell site

LAPD concentration Synchro A

Synchro B Duplication

DSC DSC DSC

(Full multi-drop)

Drop and Insert techniques

COM 1

COM 2

COM 3

COM 4

12.01/EN

+

DSC

Time Slot PCM

n+1 redundancy Automatic reconfiguration

Links optimization

PE/TRD/GR/0101

Control and Switching Unit B

January, 2000

Base Transceiver Station Functions

9-5

Links and sites optimization • Management of multicell sites. • Drop & insert techniques. • Remote transcoders (optimization of A and Abis interface dimensioning). • LAPD signaling channels concentration. Defense • The core functions of the BTS are duplicated against failures thank to duplication of some modules.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

9-5

January, 2000

Base Transceiver Station Functions Functional Architecture

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Antenna

COUPLING SYSTEM

Radio Interface

TRX (Transceiver Equipment) MS BSC Abis interface

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

BCF (Base Common Functions)

Base Transceiver Station Functions

9-6

The Base Transceiver Station BTS can be split into three functional parts or entities: • one Base Common Functions module (BCF): performing all common functions of the site, • coupling system (one per cell), • one or several transceivers TRX (one per TDMA frame). These different entities are housed into one or several cabinets, their number depends on radio channels to be implemented, the type of BTS, and the structure of the site: single-cell or multi-cell.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

9-6

January, 2000

Base Transceiver Station Functions Generic Architecture

TRX n TRX n-1

TRX 2 TRX 1

TRX n TRX n-1

TRX 2 TRX 1

Coup syst Coup syst

BSC

Coup syst Coup syst

Coup syst Coup syst

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

BTS (site)

TRX n TRX n-1

TRX 2 TRX 1

BCF

Base cabinet PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Extension cabinets

Base Transceiver Station Functions

9-7

A BTS consists of one or more cabinets: • the cabinet that contains the BCF (plus TRXs and coupling systems) is called Base cabinet, • the other cabinet (containing TRXs and coupling systems) is called Extension cabinet.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

9-7

January, 2000

Base Transceiver Station Functions BCF Abis interface management

Alarms management

BSC "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

BTS

GSM time

Audible alarm

Fans

Power supply

Signaling concentration

Temperature

Warning

Self-defense

Operation and Maintenance Switch A

Switch B

Synchro A

Synchro B

Out of order

In service

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Base Transceiver Station Functions

9-8

BCF purpose is: • Abis interface management. • GSM time distribution. • External Alarms. • Operation & Maintenance. • Self defense by redundancy of its main units. • Signaling concentration/ de-concentration. The BCF manages the information for a site whatever the configuration of this one (Omni or sectorial).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

9-8

January, 2000

Base Transceiver Station Functions TRX

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Generic Architecture

TRX TX

BCF

PE/TRD/GR/0101

PA

FP (Frame Processor)

Coupling system

RX

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Base Transceiver Station Functions

9-9

The TRX is the heart of the BTS. One TRX is the equipment managing one TDMA, that ’s to say eight physical channels. It includes four functional parts: TX, RX, FP and PA. The first generation (S4000,S2000E): • FP = five boards, • RX = one module, • TX + PA = one module. The second generation (S8000, S2000H&L): • RX + TX + FP = one module, • PA = one module. The third generation (e-cell): TRX = one module.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

9-9

January, 2000

Base Transceiver Station Functions

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Transmission Chain

Odd TS

BCF

Frame Processor

TX Logic

Low power Amplifiers and IF Transpos.

Modul. Synchro (GMSK)

IF Even TS

RF Transpos. RF RF Transpos.

PA

Coupling system

FH bus

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Base Transceiver Station Functions

9-10

The transmitter (TX or DRX Radio + PA) handles the following functions: • Conversion of the bit stream (I and Q) to be transmitted into an Intermediate Frequency (analogue) GMSK signal. • Transposition of the GMSK signals onto the frequency band: - GSM 900: 935-960 MHz, - GSM 1800 (DCS): 1805-1880 MHz, - GSM 1900 (PCS): 1930-1990 MHz, • frequency hopping management, according to the coupling mode: hybrid or cavity, • final amplification of the radio signal (PA of the TX or PA module) according to the level of each TS. Two transposers are necessary: when the first synthesizer processes an even TS, the other changes the frequency of its local oscillator in order to be able to process the odd TS. This architecture is particularly necessary when Frequency Hopping is used with hybrid coupler.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

9-10

January, 2000

Base Transceiver Station Functions Reception Chain

Main Path

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Main

RX or DRX Radio

odd TS

A Amplification even TS

Coupling Diversity

A/D Conversion Frequency Transposition

system

Frame Processor Diversity Path

odd TS

A Amplification even TS

A/D Conversion Frequency Transposition

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Base Transceiver Station Functions

9-11

According to the type of BTS the receivers we have: • One RX module within the S2000E and S4000. • The RX part of the DRX Radio board (DRX module) within the S8000. Each receiver operates one radio TDMA frame and handles the following functions: • Filtering of the RF signal coming from the RX multi-coupler (splitter) to limit the noise level in the mixer. • Pre-amplification of the filtered signals from the frequency band (GSM 900, GSM 1800, GSM 1900). To allow the Frequency Hopping (at the Time Slot level), the frequency transposition needs two identical stages (one for odd TS and one for even TS) thus avoid overlap delay when changing the frequency. On the other hand, whenever diversity reception is used, the second path provides the Frame Processor with the samples and the scale factors from the other antenna. Therefore the system can process the diversity using the Maximum Ratio Combiner algorithm.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

9-11

January, 2000

Base Transceiver Station Functions Coupling System

TX Coupler TX (Hybrid or Cavity) Downlink "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

- 1dB

Duplexer

TX band Duplex filter shift

RX band filter

RX Uplink

RX Splitter

- 1 dB

TX1

TX3

TX2

TX4

RX1

RX2

RX3

RX4

Four TRX PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Base Transceiver Station Functions

9-12

There are two kinds of transmission couplers but only one is used in the same BTS: • Hybrid couplers. • Cavity couplers. Hybrid combiner is a broad band coupler enabling the combining of two RF signals generated by two transmitters in one signal, with a high flexibility in frequency management. The minimum frequency separation required between TX connected to one coupler is 200 kHz. The receive coupling is achieved by means of two components: • the pre-amplifier Low Noise Amplifier or LNA, • the RX Splitter. Reception multicoupling or RX Splitter is aimed at pre-amplifying the signal received from the duplexer, and splitting it into several outputs to drive the receivers. For diversity purpose, the RX Splitters are duplicated on the diversity receive path. The duplexer allows the connection of the transmission and reception paths onto a single antenna. This device mainly consists of two pass band filters tuned on receive and transmit frequency bands. The frequency bands (and the duplex shift) depend on the system: GSM 900, GSM 1800 or GSM 1900. It is now generally integrated in the coupler (hybrid or cavity).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

9-12

January, 2000

Base Transceiver Station Functions BTS Connection Modes

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Air interface CHAIN Connection

Abis interface

(single multi-drop) BS

C

STAR Connection

LOOP Connection

MS

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

(full multi-drop)

January, 2000

Base Transceiver Station Functions

9-13

The BTS provides the interface between the fixed network and the MS. Abis interface connects the BTS to its BSC: • PCM links at 2.048 Mbit/s (E1) or 1.544 Mbit/s (T1). • Star, chain or loop connections. Radio interface allows communication with MS, depending on the kind of network: • GSM 900. • GSM 1800. • GSM 1900.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

9-13

January, 2000

Base Transceiver Station Functions Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

9-14

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Section 10

PE/TRD/GR/0101

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

12.01/EN

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-1

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Objectives

For each BTS product covered during this lesson you should be able to: • Cite at least two main features; • Indicate the maximum configuration; • Indicate how the implementation is done for the three functional entities: Coupling system, TRX and BCF.

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-2

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-2

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families Coverage Solution Capacity

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

S8000 S8000 Outdoor S8000 Indoor S4000

S8006 S2000H S2000E

S8002

e-cell S2000L

Coverage

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-3

For each type of environment Nortel offers a cost effective and adapted solution: • the S4000 and S2000H, for sparsely populated areas such as rural or highway areas, • the S4000 and S8000 for suburban and urban areas, • the S8002 for railways companies, • the S8006 for street installation, • the S2000L or the e-cell for outdoor micro-cells and indoor areas with leaky cables.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-3

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families DRX Based BTS Family

S8000 Outdoor "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

S8000 Indoor

PE/TRD/GR/0101

S8002 Outdoor S8006 Outdoor S2000H Outdoor/Indoor S2000L Outdoor/Indoor

12.01/EN

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-4

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-4

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families BTS S8000 Outdoor 1 - Overview

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

■ Fully Integrated self contained cell-site: • 8 TRXs (DRX + PA) in a Single Cabinet • Rectifiers, battery back up, cooling and heating • 220 Vac main (or 2 x 110 Vac live) ■ Optimized ratio size versus capacity: • Floorspace: 2 sqm (ie 0.25 m2/TX) • Footprint: 0.88 sqm • Cabinet size: 160 x 135 x 65 cm • Pedestal size: 15 (or 26) x 135 x 112 cm ■ PA TX Power: 30 W ■ RX sensitivity: - 110 dBm ■ Operating temperature range: - 40 °C to + 50 °C ■ Weight: • Fully equipped = 415 kg (915 lb) • Empty = 140 kg (310 lb)

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-5

The S8000 Outdoor BTS benefits from the technological and functional developments of the entire product range including the SMART technology incorporated into the BTS. This BTS offers a set of features enhancing the Quality of Service and the spectrum efficiency of the network, such as: • a standard -110 dBm guaranteed receive sensitivity at the BTS antenna connector (diversity not included), thus providing a better trade-off between coverage and speech quality, • a typical -117 dBm (with diversity), • full power control range (static and dynamic).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-5

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families BTS S8000 Outdoor 2 - Cabinet Arrangement Battery

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Climatic Unit ( DACS)

Compact BCF module OEM Compartment

BCF/CBCF Rack

RECAL board Main AC InterCOnnection Power Amplifiers Shelf

DRX Shelf

F type Converters

AC Mains box (Power Supply) RX Splitters

RF Combiners Shelf

Battery Switch AC/DC Converters

COMbiners InterCOnnection

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

DC Power Supply Control

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-6

The main compartment is divided into two parts: left and right. The left part includes the RF devices located on three main shelves: • OEM (to custom), • Power Amplifiers (up to eight), and alarm board ALCO or RECAL (with CBCF), • RF combiners (up to six H2D or three H4D) and F type converters (up to two). The right part includes: • BCF or CBCF module, • DRX modules (up to eight), • RX splitters (up to six), • Power Supplies modules: AC/DC converters and DC control board, • Main AC Power Supply module.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-6

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families BCF Module (First Version) Shelf Physical Description

CSWM "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PCMI GTW

DSC

PCMI PCMI PCMI GTW GTW CSWM CSWM DSC DSC

DSC DSC

SYNC

SYNC

SYNC

Power Supply Converters 48 V DC / 5 V DC

Power Supply CoMmanD

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-7

Maximum configuration is the following for a stand alone S8000 BTS operating in duplex mode: • 2 CSWM boards (switch and O&M functions), • 2 GTW boards (Gateway for S4000/S8000 adaptations), • 3 PCMI boards (Abis interface), • 4 DSC boards (concentration), • 2 SYNC boards, • 3 DC-DC power converters from -48 V, • 1 PSCMD board (Power Supply CoMmanD). This BCF is housed in a single shelf (with its own back panel), whose size is the following: height = 270 mm (6 U), width = 520 mm, depth = 300 mm.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-7

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families Compact BCF Module (Second Version) 1 - Physical view

CMCF boards

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/GR/0101

100 mm

BCFICO board

300 mm

CPCMI board

12.01/EN

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-8

The CBCF (Compact BCF) is composed of two parts: • the CBCF module: one per site, • the RECAL board (REmote Control Alarm): one per cabinet. The CBCF module is composed of a back plane CBP (Compact Back Plane) and six boards: • one BCFICO board (BCF InterCOnnection), • three CPCMI boards (Compact PCM Interface), • two CMCF boards (Compact Main Common Function). These six boards can be removed from the module.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-8

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families Compact BCF Module (Second Version) 2 - Benefits

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

CBCF

BCF

Enhanced Performances Quick installation into both S8000 Indoor and Outdoor cabinets. PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-9

The CBCF module manages: • Abis PCMs interfacing, • signaling (LAPD) Concentration and Routing functions, • BTS synchronization. The RECAL board is in charge of collecting and managing internal and external alarms, inside main and extension cabinets. This new BCF provides all features of the actual BCF (2G) with several improvements: duplex, upgrade...

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-9

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

S8000 TRX

DRX

DRX Radio TX Driver

TX Logic

BCF

PE/TRD/GR/0101

TRX DRX Logic

RX Main

Frame Processor (AMNU + DCU8)

12.01/EN

January, 2000

PA Coupling System

RX Diversity

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-10

The DRX is the module of the S8000/8002/8006 and S2000H&L BTSs, which includes: • the Frame Processor, • the receiver RX, • the TX driver, • the power supply. The necessary amplification for transmission is achieved by a separate Power Amplifier (PA). The use of DRX by separating the TX Power Amplifier (PA) from the rest of the transmit chain, allows the concept of different transmission power classes (S2000H&L).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-10

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families S8000 Coupling 1 TRX Duplex. Main

Div. Duplex.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

LNA

LNA

PA 1 Splitter

Main

H2D

PA 2

LNA

Div.

H2D

PA 3

PA 1

LNA 1

PA 2

PE/TRD/GR/0101

PA 3

4 TRX

4 Splitter

January, 2000

Splitter

PA 2

Div.

Combiner Type H2D

LNA

Div.

PA 4

Insertion Loss

Dp

- 1 dB

H2D

- 4.5 dB

H4D

- 8 dB

H4D

LNA

PA

12.01/EN

Splitter

PA PA 2 Splitter Splitter 3

5 - 8 TRX

2 antennas per cell

LNA

LNA

Main

H4D

PA

Main

H2D

LNA

Splitter Splitter

Div. Duplex.

PA 1 Splitter

Splitter

3 TRX

LNA PA 1

2 TRX

Duplex. Main

PA Splitter 5

Splitter

PA 6

PA 7

PA 8

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-11

In the S8000 the different coupling devices are integrated in the RF combiner module. There are two kinds of Hybrid transmission couplers: • two ways couplers (one stage = -3.5 dB), • four ways couplers (two stage = -7 dB). There are three kinds of RF Combiners: • Hybrid couplers 2 ways and Duplexer (H2D): up to 2 TRXs (4 TRXs per cell), • Hybrid couplers 4 ways and Duplexer (H4D): up to 4 TRXs (8 TRXs per cell), • Duplexer only (Dp): 1 TRX (2 TRXs per cell). Reception multicoupling is aimed at pre-amplifying the signal received from the duplexer, and splitting it into several outputs to drive the DRX receivers. The receive coupling is achieved by means of two components: • the LNA Splitter, inserted into the RF Combiner, • the RX Splitter: located into a specific shelf, below the DRX shelf.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-11

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families BTS S8000 Indoor Physical presentation

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

■ Compact packaging: • 8 TRXs (DRX + PA) in each cabinet • Compact BCF integrated in the first cabinet ■ Optimized ratio size versus capacity: • Floorspace: 2 x 0.90 m2 • Cabinet size = 170 x 75 x 45 cm (72 l / TRX) ■ Power Supply: - 48 V DC ■ PA TX Power: 30 W ■ RX sensitivity: - 110 dBm ■ Extended operating temperature range: • - 5 °C to + 45 °C ■ Cabinet weight: • Fully equipped = 250 kg • Empty (pre-cabled) = 110 kg

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-12

The S8000 Indoor BTS can be housed in one to three cabinets. The number of cabinets depends on the required capacity: For a capacity not exceeding 8 TRXs, only one cabinet is required. For capacities of over 8 TRXs, one or two additional cabinets are required. This Indoor BTS is designed to be operational when the external ambient air temperature is in a range of 0 °C to +45 °C. When switched on, it operates in an external ambient air temperature range of -5 °C to +45 °C, with a relative humidity level of 5% to 95%.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-12

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families Exercise

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Draw a Coupling system for a S8000 BTS O2 and a O3

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-13

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-13

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families BTS S8002

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

1 - Overview

■ Designed for railways applications (outdoor) ■ PA TX Power: 45 dBm ■ RX sensitivity: - 110 dBm ■ Standard configuration: O2 ■ Dimensions: • Height: 140 cm • Width : 100 cm • Depth : 54 cm ■ Operating temperature range: - 40 °C to + 50 °C ■ Weight: 240 kg ■ Battery back-up: 2 hours ■ User compartment: 6 U

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-14

The S8002 BTS is an optimized O2 product designed for railways applications. Initially dedicated to the Railways companies in R-GSM band, it shall be possible to provide the S8002 in other frequency bands. Technical requirements: • standard O2 configuration for outdoor deployment, • environmental performances equal or better than current S8000, • re-using common S8000 equipment: CBCF, DRX, PA, RX splitter, rectifiers, • user compartment (6 U). External temperature: -40 °C to +50 °C; Internal temperature: +5 °C to +60 °C Coupling: duplexer only Output power: 45 dBm Receive sensitivity: -110 dBm Battery backup: two hours Cooling system by forced ventilation All external cables shall be connected from below.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-14

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families BTS S8002 2 - Description

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Cooling system CDACS

DRX modules

RX Splitters Duplexers

CBCF User compartment 6U

Power Amplifiers F type Power Supply

RECAL board

Rectifiers

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

C-AC Main

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-15

S8000 equipment: • Compact BCF, • RECAL board, • DRX module (R-GSM), • Power Amplifier, • RF Combiner, • RX splitter, • rectifiers. Specific S8002 equipment: • Outdoor cabinet, • CDACS cooling system, • DRX-Combiner interconnection board, • C-AC Mains (230 V AC 50/60 Hz), • PA-type F converter interconnection module, • cabling.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-15

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families S8006 Street Deployable 1 - Overview New from V10.4

Same modules as in S8000

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

■ Additional coverage (streets, roads, highways, roof tops indoor) ■ Configurations: • standard: O6 and S222 • optional: S42 and S33 ■ PA TX Power: 45 dBm ■ RX sensitivity: - 110 dBm ■ Operating temperature range: - 40 °C to + 50 °C ■ Power Supply: 220 V AC ■ Dimensions: • Height: 130 cm • Width: 130 cm • Depth: 50 cm ■ Weight: 350 kg

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-16

The S8006 BTS is a six TRXs product designed for installation along streets and roads without asking for building permits. Initially dedicated to the GSM 1800 band (V10.4), it shall be possible to provide the S8006 in other frequency bands. Technical requirements: • O6, S222, S33 and S42 configurations for outdoor deployment, • environmental performances equal or better than current S8000, • diversity radio path in standard, • re-using common S8000 equipment: CBCF, DRX, PA, RX splitter, rectifiers. External temperature: • standard: - 20 °C to + 35 °C, • optional: - 33 °C to + 45 °C. Internal temperature: + 5 °C to + 60 °C Coupling: duplexer only and hybrid duplexer Output power = 45 dBm Receive sensitivity = - 110 dBm Powered by 230 V AC Cooling system by forced ventilation All external cables shall be connected from below.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-16

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families S8006 Street Deployable 2 - Description

Cooling system DACS Power interconnection (CBCF, RECAL, User) CMCF

Power Amplifiers

CMCF

RECAL board

F type Power Supply

CPCMIE1

DRX modules CPCMIE1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

C-PA interconnection (PA, RECAL, F power supply)

1

3

0

2

RF Combiners PCU

12.01/EN

RX Splitters C-AC Main Box Rectifiers Power Controller Unit

COMbiners InterCOnnection

PE/TRD/GR/0101

CBCF

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-17

The S8006 BTS re-uses as much as possible S8000 BTS components. S8000 equipment: • Compact BCF, • RECAL board, • DRX module, • Power Amplifier, • RF Combiner, • RX splitter, • rectifiers 220 V AC to -48 V DC (MITRA type only), • converters - 48 V to -15 V/+15 V for LNA splitters (F type). Specific S8006 equipment: • Outdoor cabinet, • CDACS cooling system, • Main ICO (digital interconnection board between DRX, PA, CBCF, RECAL and Duplexers), • C-AC Mains box (230 V AC 50/60 Hz), • POWER ICO board (48 V distribution for CBCF, User rack and RECAL board), • C-PA ICO module (PA-type F converters interconnection), • cabling. "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-17

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families BTS S2000L (Low Power) Physical Overview
Fully Integrated self contained cell-site

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

• • • •

2 TRX (DRX+PA) in the Main Cabinet Rectifiers, battery back up, heating 220 V/110 V AC main or - 48 V DC (Indoor) Lightning protection and battery backup


Common package for Indoor and Outdoor
Front access for easy maintenance
PA TX Power: 2.5 W
RX Sensitivity: - 104 dBm
Operating temperature range: • - 40 °C to + 50 °C • no fans, natural convection


Weight = 23 kg max for each part
Optional internal antennas PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-18

This product is specially designed for micro-cellular application. It can be installed inside a building or outside and can be easily wall mounted by a single man. The S2000L BTS is optimized for microcell applications where cell sizes are generally small thereby requiring lower transmit power capability. The applications can range from small cells inside buildings for coverage improvement to outdoor microcells for traffic capacity enhancement. Some examples of S2000L applications are: • Situated in building coverage for offices or entire floors. • Shopping centers. • Train stations and airports. • Pedestrian tunnels and metro platforms. • Underlay microcells in hierarchical multi-layer networks. To meet this wide range of application needs the S2000L is equipped with powerful multilayer handover algorithms and features for micro-cellular applications.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-18

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families BTS S2000L (Low Power) Base Unit

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Mounting Plate DRX Modules

Power Supply Unit

Front Cover

SBCF

DRX modules

Lock

SBCF and PSU modules

S2000 IN SERVICE

I&C Terminal

Cable Cover

Main Module

I&C Terminal Low Power RF Module

Hinge Ant 1

Ant 2

Front

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-19

The Base unit of the S2000L is composed of: • the Main module, • the Low Power Radio Frequency or LPRF module. These two modules are attached to the mounting plate and protected by the two parts front cover. The cable cover is supported at the bottom of the mounting plate with two hinges and on the cosmetic panel with a lock. The mounting plate provides a security barrier by limiting access to the rear, and acts as a sun shield for the rear and sides of housing. The Main module incorporates all the electronics common to the High and Low power S2000 BTS, creating a modular design for the BTS. This module comprises: • the Small Base Common Functions or SBCF module, • one or two DRX modules, • the Power Supply Unit, • the Connector Field, • the I&C terminal. The connector field provides connection to the rest of the BTS, as well as connections to extension module and to the external Battery and Interface Module or customer interface, via T1 or E1 connections, alarms and AC/DC power.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-19

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families BTS S2000H (High Power)
2 TRXs capacity • O1 (or O1E/1900), O2, S11, expandable to O4
PA TX power: 20 W (masthead) "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".


RX sensitivity: -109.5 dBm
Remoteable masthead RF Module • Base Unit located for easy access • HPRF Module remoteable to 100 m • Up to 60 dBm EIRP • Maximizes coverage
Operating temperature range: - 40 °C to + 50 °C
Battery and Interface Module (optional) with battery backup and lightning protection
Base Unit: 74 x 54 x 20 cm - 34 kg
HPRF Module: 74 x 27 x 31 cm - 19.5 kg
Power Supply: AC 230 V, 50/60 Hz DC 48 V (battery back-up)

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-20

The S2000H, with high power output transmission is ideally suited for use to provide macrocell coverage from locations where suitable sites for larger BTSs cannot be found. Because of the remotely High Power RF Module (HPRF) architecture it is a particularly powerful BTS platform for providing highway coverage while minimizing the roll-out time. Some other application examples for the S2000H include the following: • Rural and low traffic suburban areas. • In-building and metro tunnel coverage where high power is required to drive long feeders. The HPRF unit is connected to the Base Unit through a Data/DC Power cable and RF cables. Each Data/DC Power Cable supports up to two HPRF Modules. The same BTS package may be deployed both in indoor and outdoor environments. The S2000H uses passive air convection cooling. This eliminates the need for mechanical cooling fans and their associated noise issues.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-20

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families Enhanced Packaging

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

HP RF Module and Base Unit

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-21

The Main and HP RF modules are merged into one package, eliminating internal cabling and internal assembling. Faster I&C phase (40% less time). Size and weight are lower: only one cabinet version (height = 65 cm). External D-Sub technology connectors are replaced by circular connectors for external cables: AC, Abis/Alarms and DC. Components suppressed: • SBCF and UVGA heatsink, • RF jumpers. The ground bar is now integrated into the cabinet, This new packaging insures backward/forward installation compatibility with First one and allows these features: • extension unit, to obtain O4 configuration, • DC main -48 V.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-21

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families High Power RF Module

Heatsinks "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

R X Front panel

F i l t e r L N A

Lock

T X

Heat Pipes

P A

D u p l e x e r

Cable cover Hinge PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

Mounting plate 10-22

The High Power RF module consists of one Power Amplifier PA, one Low Noise Amplifier LNA and a Duplexer, plus optional devices: an extra LNA and a RX filter (such as the RX path of the duplexer) for supporting a single transceiver with receive diversity. The High Power RF module is located remotely, up to 100 m cable from the Main module. The PA module makes use of Heat Pipe technology to efficially transfer heat away from hot areas in the design of the heatsink. Operating Temperature: -40 °C to +50 °C. Two types of HPRF Modules are available. A Single-Rx HPRF is used in configurations with 2 TRXs per cell, and a Dual-Rx HPRF is used in configurations with 1 TRX per cell such as O1 and S11. • The Single-Rx HPRF consists of 1 PA, 1 LNA and duplexer coupling. Each HPRF Module is connected to 1 external antenna. Diversity reception is inherently provided because there are two TRX per cell. • The Dual-Rx HPRF consists of 1 PA, 2 LNAs, duplexer coupling and an extra receive filter. Each HPRF Module is connected to 2 external antennas to provide reception diversity.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-22

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families S8000 Down-link Exercise: Draw the downlink speech path through the S8000 modules.

CBCF "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

To/ from BSC

TX Logic

Switching

CPCMI

TX Driver

PA RF Combiner

CPCMI

PCM Interface

Frame Processor

Private PCM bus

DRX Radio

RX Main RX Diversity

Control, Signal.Concentr. Synchronization Management

RECAL

Alarms Concentration

PE/TRD/GR/0101

Coupling System

CTRL_PA

CMCF CPCMI

DRX

DRX Logic

CMCF

12.01/EN

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

S p l i t S p l i t

COMICO

COMbiner InterCOnection

10-23

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-23

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families S8000 Up-link Exercise: Draw the uplink speech path through the S8000 BTS modules.

CBCF "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

To/ from BSC

TX Logic

Switching

CPCMI

TX Driver

PA RF Combiner

CPCMI

PCM Interface

Frame Processor

Private PCM bus

DRX Radio

RX Main RX Diversity

Control, Signal.Concentr. Synchronization Management

RECAL

Alarms Concentration

PE/TRD/GR/0101

Coupling System

CTRL_PA

CMCF CPCMI

DRX

DRX Logic

CMCF

12.01/EN

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

S p l i t S p l i t

COMICO

COMbiner InterCOnection

10-24

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-24

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

BTS e-cell

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-25

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-25

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families BTS e-cell 1 - Overview ■ Fully configured (Smart card configurable)

New from V12

■ Easy deployment & maintenance

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

■ Compact outdoor cabinet: • 62 x 26 x 19 cm (31 liters) • 19 kg (29 kg with PSU and battery) ■ Power Supply: - 48 V DC or 110/220 V AC ■ TX Power: 1 W guaranteed (2 W max) ■ RX sensitivity: -104 dBm (GSM), ■ Integrated radio site including optional: Battery, Lightning protection, PSU, ■ EDGE hardware compliant ■ Capacity: 2 TRXs per cabinet, extendible to 4 TRXs: • Omni O4 in 2 cabinets • Dualband O2_2 ■ Temperature range: - 40 °C to + 50 °C ■ Integrated antenna (optional)

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-26

This new e-cell BTS is a small, compact BTS designed for outdoor micro-cellular applications and in-building deployment. The typical configuration is an O2, extendible to O4 using an extension cabinet. The e-cell is easy to install and maintain and can be pole or wall mounted, hence reducing operating and site costs. Main characteristics: • TX power: 1 W guaranteed (2 W max), • RX sensitivity = - 104 dBm, • perfectly quiet (no fan), • four external protected alarms, This BTS is fully compatible with existing Nortel GSM product line.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-26

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families BTS e-cell 2 - Radio Cabinet: Block Diagram

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Radio Cabinet

Radio modules

Hybrid coupler

Duplexer

LPA PA

LNAsplitter

PA

Radio board (pRDRX)

External

External interface (pPCM)

Converters and interfaces (PSL)

Logic board (pLDRX)

Connections Private PCM PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Ethernet. Antenna LED - 48 V DC Smart card

External PCM S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-27

Except the miscellaneous functions, all functional equipment is located inside a standalone box so called Radio cabinet. Electronic devices are made of three different subsets: • radio board which deals with Intermediate Frequency and Radio Frequency low power signals, • logic boards which deals with digital signals, • radio modules which deal with other RF signals: LPAs, LNA-diplexer, antenna. A new electronic unit, able to process two TDMAs and the BCF function, is composed of two boards: • pLDRX or Logic board, • pRDRX or Radio board.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-27

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families S2000E/S4000 Family

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

S4000 Indoor

PE/TRD/GR/0101

S4000 Outdoor S4000 Smart Outdoor S2000E Indoor/Outdoor

12.01/EN

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-28

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-28

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families BTS S4000 Indoor 1 - Overview

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

■ High capacity - Dense traffic ■ Small footprint (0.045 m2 per TRX) ■ 4 TRXs modularity ■ Up to 24 TRXs / site (8 Omni, S3-888) ■ Multiple coupling options: • Duplexer • Integrated hybrid couplers and duplexer • Remote Tunable Cavities

■ PA TX power: 35 W (900), 30 W (1800), 20 W (1900) ■ Cabinet dimensions: 220 x 60 x 30 cm

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-29

The S4000 Indoor BTS consists of one or more cabinets, depending on the number of radio channels to be implemented and the structure of the site: single-cell (omnidirectional) or multi-cell (sectorial). Two types of cabinet are available: • Base: omni/sect 1 (one per site) which serves either omnidirectional functions or master sectorial functions. • Extension: omni, sector 2, sector 3, which serve slave sectorial functions and extension for sector capacity. BCF modules are only in the base cabinet: • Redundant CSW modules (CSW1 + CSW2), DTI and DCC boards housed in the CSU shelf. • Redundant SYN boards. There is one ALAT board per cabinet. Up to four FP modules (one MNU and four DCU) are housed in the same shelf. The different parts of a TRX module are vertically grouped: FP module, receiver Rx, power supply PSU and transmitter Tx. A S4000 Indoor BTS can be composed of up to six cabinets. This configuration is reachable only in multisectorial sites, (3 or 6). For omnisectorial site, the maximal configuration consists of two cabinets (O8 with cavity coupling).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-29

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families BTS S4000 Indoor 2 - Example of Trisectorial Site (6S888) cell 2

ANTENNA 1 TX1 to TX4 + MAIN RX

ANTENNA 2 TX5 - 8 + DIVERSITY RX

TX coupler TX

TX

TX

PS/ PS/ PS/ TRX TRX TRX

PS/ TRX

TX

TX

TX

TX

PS/ TRX

PS/ PS/ PS/ TRX TRX TRX

TX

TX

TX PS/ TRX

TX

TX

TX

TX

PS/ TRX

PS/ PS/ PS/ TRX TRX TRX

TX

TX

TX coupler TX

TX

PS/ TRX

PS/ PS/ PS/ TRX TRX TRX

TX

ALAT

RX SPLITTER DIVERSITY

PS/CC

RX SPLITTER

PS/CC

ALAT

RX SPLITTER DIVERSITY

PS/CC

RX SPLITTER

ANTENNA 2 TX5 - 8 + DIVERSITY RX

TX coupler

PS/CC

ALAT

RX SPLITTER DIVERSITY

TX

PS/ PS/ PS/ TRX TRX TRX PS/CC

RX SPLITTER

ANTENNA 1 TX1 to TX4 + MAIN RX

TX coupler

PS/CC

ALAT

RX SPLITTER DIVERSITY

PS/CC

RX SPLITTER

ANTENNA 2 TX5 - 8 + DIVERSITY RX

TX coupler

PS/CC

ALAT

RX SPLITTER DIVERSITY

TX

PS/ PS/ PS/ TRX TRX TRX PS/CC

RX SPLITTER

TX

cell 3

ANTENNA 1 TX1 to TX4 + MAIN RX

TX coupler

PS/CC

ALAT

SYN

SYN

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

cell 1

TX

RX SPLITTER

TX PS/ TRX RX SPLITTER DIVERSITY

RX RX RX

RX

RX RX RX

RX

RX RX RX

RX

RX RX RX

RX

RX RX RX

RX

RX RX RX

RX

FP

FP

FP

FP

FP

FP

FP

FP

FP

FP

FP

FP

FP

FP

FP FP

FP

FP

FP

FP

FP FP

FP

FP

PS/CC

PS/CC

CSU RACK

Base cabinet Extension cabinets

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-30

A S4000 Indoor BTS can be composed of up to six cabinets. This configuration is reachable only in multisectorial sites, (3 or 6). For omnisectorial site, the maximal configuration consists of two cabinets (O8 with cavity coupling).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-30

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families BTS S4000 Outdoor 1 - Overview

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

■ Medium capacity ■ Compact outdoor cabinet: • 1.42 x 1.53 x 0.52 m • 390 kg ■ Integrated radio site including: • Rectifiers, 2 Batteries, Heat exchanger • Optional integrated microwave terminal ■ Capacity: • Base cabinet: 3 TRXs • Extension cabinet: 4 TRXs • Possible configurations: – Omni 3 TRXs or up to 3 sectors, 1 TRX per sector (S111) in base Cabinet – 7 TRXs in 2 Cabinets S223

■ PA TX Power: 25 W (900), 20 W (1800/1900) ■ RX sensitivity: - 107 dBm ■ Operating temperature range: - 33 °C to + 45 °C PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-31

S4000 Outdoor is an outdoor BTS which supports up to three cells configurations: • Omnidirectional BTS with one to three TRX in a single cabinet. • Bisectorial BTS with one or two TRX in two cabinets. • Three sectorial BTS with up to three (Base) or four (Extension) TRX in two cabinets. S4000 Outdoor is made up of two cabinets back to wall installable and fully equipped. Temperature range: -33 °C to +45 °C.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-31

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families BTS S4000 Outdoor 2 - Example of S322 Configuration BTS

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

FP

FP

D D M D D D DM D D C C N C C C CN C C U U U U U U UU U U

TX

BTS

FP

TX

TX

FP S Y N O

D DM D D C CN C C U UU U U

S Y N O

PS/B

Cooling unit

DUPLEXER OR HYBRID DUPLEXER PS/A

PS/A

SPLITTER

SPLITTER

PS/A

RXD

RXD

REC1

PS/A

RECTIFIER REC2

12.01/EN

D D M D D D DM D D C C N C C C CN C C U U U U U U UU U U

TX

Cooling unit

DUPLEXERDUPLEXER OR OR HYBRID HYBRID DUPLEXERDUPLEXER

SPLITTER

RADIO LINK EQUIPMENT RLE

RXD

PS/A

PS/A

January, 2000

RXD

SPLITTER

SPLITTER

FILLING PLATE

Up to 6 meters because of synchro

RECTIFIER

RECTIFIER

REC1

REC2

Base Cabinet

PE/TRD/GR/0101

TX

DUPLEXERDUPLEXER OR OR HYBRID HYBRID DUPLEXERDUPLEXER

PS/A

CSUC

FILLING PLATE Filling Plate

FILLING PLATE RECTIFIER

TX

Cooling unit

ADD C CCC DD L C C S SS S T T A C C W WW W I I 1 22 1 T O

RXD

D D MD D D DM D D C C N C C C CN C C U U U U U U UU U U

FP

PS/B

Cooling unit

DUPLEXERDUPLEXER OR OR HYBRID HYBRID DUPLEXERDUPLEXER

SPLITTER

TX

FP

FP

RXD

RXD

SPLITTER

FILLING PLATE FILLING PLATE

Extension Cabinet

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-32

Base cabinet contains BCF with: • Duplicated switching module (CSW1 + CSW2). • Two boards DCC (1+1). • Two boards DTI (1+1 or drop and insert configuration). • One board ALATO (Power supplies, rectifiers, cooling unit, temperature, smoke, low battery, open door alarms). • Two boards SYNO (duplicated). • Up to three TRXs. Each extension cabinet contains: • Up to four TRXs. Specific boards and equipment are: • ALATO: internal alarms for Base cabinet and for Extension cabinet. • SYNC (1+1). • RX-Splitter (2 x 4): dual splitter two paths. • RX-Splitter (4 + 1): mono splitter (four outputs and one extension which is not used). • Coupling devices (Duplexer or 2 Tx Hybrid combiners with duplexer) (H2D).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-32

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families BTS S2000E Indoor/Outdoor 1 - Overview ■ Rapid & low cost coverage at low capacity

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

■ Additional coverage (tunnels, highways, indoor) ■ 1 TRX per cabinet up to 2 TRXs with extension cabinet ■ High RF Power: • GSM 900: 25 W • GSM 1800/1900: 20 W ■ Dimensions: 78 x 63 x 30 cm ■ Weight: 50 kg including mounting elements ■ Easy maintenance & repair (same modules as in S4000) ■ Outdoor version

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-33

The S2000E is an evolution of the S4000 Indoor BTS with only one TRX per cabinet, designed for indoor installation, such as microcell or tunnel coverage and outdoor installation. Cabinet is of compact dimensions and of low mass (0.775 m x 0.625 m x 0.3 m and 50 kg including mounting elements). It has low acoustic noise output. It provides wall or floor mounting. It uses the standard modules, but: • new modules have been designed: specific synchronization (SYNO) and alarm concentration (ALATO) boards are used, • CSW module (control and switching matrix boards) is not duplicated, • new Power Supply unit AC and fan units, • the RX-Splitter is a dual one with one RF input and two outputs, • two DTI boards allows Drop and Insert functionality: ten S2000E (Micro) BTS on a single PCM link. 2 TRXs configurations (2 cabinets) are available. A retrofit procedure allows to expand already installed S2000E Indoor Base cabinet with Extension cabinet.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-33

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families BTS S2000E Indoor/Outdoor 2 - Two Cabinets Configuration FH out M7

PCM0 M6

O&M M5

PCM1 M4

RF out

DCU DCUMNU DCU DCU

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

TX

TX

ANT

DUPLEXER

A L A T O

GSM M3

Abis M1

FH out M7

13MHz C DCC S W 1

O&M M5

PCM1 M4

RF out

C S DTI DTI W SYNO 2

DCU DCUMNUDCUDCU

TX

TX ANT

DUPLEXER

RX

Abis M1

GSM M3

A L A T O

RX

cooling unit

RX

RX Splitter

Power Power supply supply 12V/5A -12V/2.5A 5V/12A

Power supply 24V/5A

Power supply 5V/32A

RX

January, 2000

RX Splitter

Power Power Power supply supply supply 12V/5A -12V/2.5A 24V/5A 5V/12A

Power supply 5V/32A

AC DISTRIBUTION

AC DISTRIBUTION

12.01/EN

cooling unit

Up to 1.5 meters

Extension Cabinet

Base Cabinet

PE/TRD/GR/0101

PCM0 M6

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-34

Indoor S2000E • The Indoor S2000E BTS can be wall mounted. It allows an easy installation with a fullyequipped and tested package. • In the 1 TRX configuration, all connections (electrical and RF cables, Abis and alarm connectors) are made at the bottom of the cabinet. • In the 2 TRXs configuration, addition inter-cabinet cabling is required. The BTS Bus extensions are made through the top of the cabinets. • The use of receive diversity requires two inter-cabinet RF cables for carrying the main and diversity signals. • Cable covers (2 per cabinet) are provided for protecting the inter-cabinet and external cable entries. • The two cabinets may be separated by a distance of up to 1.5 meters measured between adjacent edges of the cabinets. Outdoor S2000E • The Outdoor S2000E cabinet provides the internal modules with environmental, electromagnetic and physical protection. This makes it suitable for outdoor deployment. It uses the same modules as the Indoor S2000E BTS, which eliminates the need to provide separate sets of spares for maintenance purposes. • Each Outdoor S2000E BTS consists of a radio equipment cabinet plus an environmental control system. The environmental control system is comprised of heaters, fans, heat exchangers, an electronic control unit and a DC power supply unit (PSU). • The Outdoor S2000E BTS can be wall-, pole- or mast-mounted, via an "H" frame, similar to what is used for the indoor version. When mounted side-by-side, an inter-cabinet spacing of 30 cm is required. The maximum inter-cabinet spacing is up to 1.15 meters depending on the mounting and cabling arrangement. "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-34

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families Dual-Band Configurations Integrated BSS with dual band S8000 BTS

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

➨ BTS manage cells of the two bands


Share common functions (BCF)
Same footprint
Reduced handover duration

MSC

OMC-R

BSC 1 900/1800

BTS 900

BTS 900

BTS 900/1800 PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

BSC 2 900/1800

BTS 900

BTS 900/1800 January, 2000

BTS 1800

BTS 900

BTS 900/1800

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-35

Dual band S8000 BTS are BTS in which the same BCF manages the two bands. The currently supported combination, concerns P-GSM (GSM 900 Primary) and GSM 1800 bands. It is possible to manage mono band and dual band cabinets. Advantages of this configuration are: • important place gain, for example: - for a BTS S444_444, 3 cabinets are sufficient, - 4 cabinets are necessary for the association (equivalent in capacity) of a BTS S444 900 and a BTS S444 1800, • possibility to make synchronous handover between the two frequency bands, • reduction of transmission costs on the Abis interface: - a S444 900 and a S444 1800 require 3 LAPD each on the Abis interface = 6 LAPD in total, - a S444_444 requires only 3 LAPD in total.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-35

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families BTS Configuration Table Maximum Configurations and Transmit Power BTS type Band

S4000 Indoor

S4000 Outdoor

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

25 / 35 W 2O8 2S323 3S444 6S888

900

25 W

1900

20 W O3 2S222 2S34

25 W 2O2

20 W

20 W

O3 2S222 2S34

20 W 2O8 3S444

O1 2O2

20 W

2O8 3S444 6S888

S2000E S2000E Indoor Outdoor

25 W

O3 2S222 2S34

20 / 30 W

1800

S4000 Smart

O1 2O2

20 W 1S111 2S222

2O2

20 W

20 W O1 2O2

2O2

S8000 Outdoor O8 30 W 2O16 S44 S422 3S888 6S161616

30 W

O8 2O16 S44 S422 3S888 6S161616

30 W

O8 2O16 S44 S422 3S888 6S161616

S8000 Indoor

S8002 S8006 S2000L S2000H Outdoor Outdoor

O8 30 W 2O16 S44 S422 3S888 6S161616

30 W

O8 2O16 S44 S422 3S888 6S161616

30 W O2

2.5 W

20 W

1W

O2 2O4 2O2_2

O1E O2 2O4 2O2_2 S11 2S22 2S2_2

O2 2O4 2O2_2

30 W 2.5 W O6 S42 S33 S222

30 W

O8 2O16 S44 S422 3S888 6S161616

e-cell

O2 2O4 2O2_2

2.5 W O2

20 W

1W

O1E O2 2O4 2O2_2 S11 2S22 2S2_2

O2 2O4 2O2_2

20 W O1E O2 S11

1W O2 2O4

Nominal power at TX (PA) output O1E = O1 Extendible with two DRX 2O2_2 = dual band 900_1800 6S161616 = From V14 PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families

10-36

Each type of BTS product consists of one or several TRX modules and one BCF module housed in one or more cabinets. The name of the BTS, such as 3S444, means: • 3 = three cabinets per site, • S = Sectorial (O = Omnidirectional), • 444 = three sectors of four TRXs each. When more than one cabinet is necessary, the first cabinet, so called Base cabinet houses the BCF entity. The typical TX power depends on the type of BTS, the frequency band and the coupling: • S4000 Indoor: 35 W (900), 30 W (1800) or 20 W (1900). • S4000 Outdoor and S2000E: 25 W (900) or 20 W (1800 and 1900), • S8000 Outdoor and Indoor, S8002, and S8006: 30 W, • S2000L: 2.5 W, and S2000H: 20 W, • e-cell: 1 W.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-36

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-37

January, 2000

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

10-38

January, 2000

Base Station Controller Functions

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Section 11

PE/TRD/GR/0101

Base Station Controller Functions

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Base Station Controller Functions

11-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

11-1

January, 2000

Base Station Controller Functions

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Objectives

PE/TRD/GR/0101

After completing this lesson you will be able to: • Show the generic architecture of the BSC. • Relate the functions that BSC performs.

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Base Station Controller Functions

11-2

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

11-2

January, 2000

Base Station Controller Functions BSC in the GSM Network

MSC

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

A Interface

Radio Interface

TCU S2000H&L BTS

NSS

Ater Interface

Public Telephone Network

BSC

OMC-R

Abis Interface

MS

S8000 Outdoor BTS Radio Interface

OMN Interface

S8000 Indoor BTS

Sun StorEdge A5000

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

BSS January, 2000

Base Station Controller Functions

MS 11-3

The BSS radio subsystem contains the following units: • one Base Station Controller (BSC), • one or more Base Transceiver Stations (BTS), • one to seven remote transcoders, in one or more transcoder unit (TCU) cabinets, preferably located on the MSC premises. These different units are linked together through specific BSS interfaces: • each BTS is linked to the BSC by an Abis interface, • the TCUs are linked to the BSC by an Ater interface, • the A interface links the BSC/TCU pair to the MSC.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

11-3

January, 2000

Base Station Controller Functions BSC Functions 1 - Basic Functions Radio Call Processing BTS

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

MSC

BTS Routing

BTS BTS

Traffic Concentration

Radio Resources Management

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

SMS-CB Management CAUTION: CRASH ON E12 HIGHWAY

Base Station Controller Functions

11-4

The basic functions of the BSC are the followings: • radio call processing: - set-up/release of terrestrial & radio links, - channel switching between MSC and BTS, • radio resources management: - radio access processing, - radio channel allocation (traffic and signaling), - radio channel operational states monitoring, • traffic concentration management for reducing of transmission costs which allows to concentrate and reduce the number of links by using the "chain" (drop and insert) or "loop" configuration instead of the "star" configuration, • Short Message Service - Cell Broadcast management: - broadcasts short messages defined at OMC-R towards target cell.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

11-4

January, 2000

Base Station Controller Functions BSC Functions 2 - O&M Functions OMC-R Interface Management

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Data + Software

X.25

BTS and TCU Management

BSC Self- Defence

Shut down

Control and Switching Chain A Active

Control and Switching Chain B Passive

Start up Supervision

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Observation

Base Station Controller Functions

11-5

The main O&M functions of the BSC are the following: • OSS Interface management which consists of: - the link management with OMC-R, - providing the services requested by the OMC-R, - storing the BSS configuration data: software storage and distribution among the various entities of BSS, • BTS and TCU management: - initialization, - configuration and reconfiguration, - software downloading, - supervision, - observations, • BSC self-defence through redundancy and restart mechanisms.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

11-5

January, 2000

Base Station Controller Functions Signaling in the BSS

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

OMC-R

Abis BTS

X.25

Ater BSC

LAPD OML

A TCU

MSC

LAPD OML

LAPD RSL CCS7

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Base Station Controller Functions

11-6

Signaling messages are exchanged between the different Network entities: • LAPD-OML between BTS and BSC, • LAPD-OML between BSC and TCU, • LAPD-RSL between BTS and BSC, • CCS7 messages between BSC and MSC are switched by the TCU, but remain transparent to it.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

11-6

January, 2000

Base Station Controller Functions Generic Architecture of the BSC BSC

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Central Processing Unit X.25 Controller

Hard Disk

To OMC-R

X.25

= Processors

Control MSC TCU BTS bus Signaling Signaling Signaling

To BTSs

PCM Controller

TCU Signaling TS

BTS Signaling TS

MSC Signaling TS

Switching Matrix

Traffic TS

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

PCM Controller

To TCU and MSC

Traffic TS

Base Station Controller Functions

11-7

The generic BSC architecture mainly consists of a switching matrix, a processing unit, and trunk controllers (PCM and X.25). The BSC performs Radio Resource through switching matrix, and trunk controllers. Here the main functions are to establish and release radio resource in response to mobiles and MSC requests, and also the intra-BSC handover of the mobiles. Three types of signaling can be transported on the Ater interface: • the LAPD signaling for the control of the remote transcoders TCU, • the CCITT #7 signaling with the MSC, • the X.25 signaling with the OMC-R. The BSC downloads new software releases from the OMC-R throughout the X.25 interface. Previous software code and other parameters from BTSs are backed up in the hard disk of the BSC.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

11-7

January, 2000

Base Station Controller Functions BSC OMC-R Connection Options X.25 Modem

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

X.25 Modem

X.25 Switch DPN 100

X.25 Network OMN Interface X.25 Modem

X.25 Modem

MSC

BSC

A Interface

TCU

Or Ater Interface

PE/TRD/GR/0101

OMC-R Server

12.01/EN

January, 2000

TCU

Base Station Controller Functions

11-8

The BSC can be connected to the Radio Operation and Maintenance Center (OMC-R) through an X.25 packet data network (1) or through the A interface (2). When connecting the BSC to the OMC-R via the A interface, an X.25 packet switch with multiple PCM and RS 449 ports has to be used. In both types of connections the X.25 connection with the OMC-R is duplicated for redundancy.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

11-8

January, 2000

Base Station Controller Functions Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

11-9

January, 2000

Base Station Controller Functions Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

11-10

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Section 12

PE/TRD/GR/0101

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family

12.01/EN

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family

12-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

12-1

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family Objectives

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

After completing this lesson you will be able to: • Draw the two BSC cabinets and the main modules they contain; • Indicate the essential differences between BSC 12000 and BSC 6000 and its consequences; • Explain how the maximum number of radio sites can be reached.

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family

12-2

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

12-2

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC

Equipment Cabinet

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

Control Cabinet

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family

12-3

BSC always consists of two cabinets equipped : • the Control cabinet, • the Equipment cabinet. Each cabinet is equipped according to the needed capacity. The Control cabinet contains the processing core which manages the overall BSC operations, including the equipment cabinet operations, and insures the communication with the Radio Operation and Maintenance Center (OMC-R). There are two identical processing cores, running in duplex mode (active/standby). The Equipment cabinet contains: • the switching matrix, • several interface modules, • the PCM links interfaces. There are two identical switching matrix, running in duplex mode (active/standby).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

12-3

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Characteristics Dimensions and weight

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".


Height: 200 cm (6’7” ap.)
Width: 78 cm (2’7” ap.)
Depth: 60 cm (2’ ap.)
Weight: < 270 kg (595 lbs) Point loading: maximum 100 kg/cm2 (1.420 lbs per square inch) Power supply
- 48 V / - 60 V (tolerance from - 40 V to - 72 V) Operating temperature: - 5 °C, + 45 °C Consumption
Control cabinet: 1 kW (max 2 kW), 35 A
Equipment cabinet: 220 W (max 550 W), 10 A PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family

12-4

Above are the dimensions and weight given for Control or Equipment fully-equipped cabinets. The maximum power consumption is given for a fully-equipped BSC with maximum ratings of board consumptions. The designated current is the fuse value protecting the cabinet.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

12-4

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Cabinets Organization

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Control Cabinet Main Processing Unit CPU: OMU, MPU, BIFP Disk: MMU/MMU_IDE Protocol: SS7: CCS7, LAPD: SICD, X.25: SICX, SLS/SLS2

Equipment Cabinet

MPU A

Chain A

MPU B

Chain B

PCM Interface

DDTI

PCM Interface

DDTI

RCB A

RCB B

Switching Switching Unit A Unit B BTS Signaling Concentration

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

TSCB, RCB, ALA

SWC, MSW-SWE + ECI BSCB

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family

12-5

The BSC is composed of two types of boards: • control boards for management, • equipment boards for external interfaces and switching units. For safety and defense reasons: • control chains (MPUA and B) are duplicated and operate normally in the duplex mode (active/hot standby mode), • one switching unit (SWU A or B) is dedicated to one MPU (A or B). Common equipment boards (DDTI, ALA, BSCB, TSCB) work with the active chain. External PCM links may be type E1 or T1. The Main Processing Unit (MPU) is composed of: CPU-OMU, CPU-MPU, CPU-BIFP, SUP/SUP2, MMU/MMU_IDE, SICX, CCS7, SLS/SLS2, and SICD/SICD8V. The Equipment Unit is composed of: ECI, ALA, DDTI, RCB, TSCB, BSCB. The SWitching Unit is composed of: SWC, MSW, SWE.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

12-5

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family Functional Architecture BSC 12000HC

E Q U I P M E N T

Hard Disk MMU-IDE

OMN Link Switch SLS2

Chain A Switching Control CPU-MPU

O&M Control CPU-OMU

BTSs Control CPU-BIFP

Multibus II

X.25 SICX

SS7 CCS7

MPUA

SWitching Unit Switching Matrix Switch MSW Control V11/TTL SWE SWC

O&M and Synchro ECI

LAPD SICD8V

Ethernet Inter SUP

Supervision SUP2

2 Mb <-> 64kb RCB

Chain status (MPU Status)

External Alarms ALA

TCU LAPD Concentration TSCB

12.01/EN

January, 2000

PCM Interface DDTI

BTS LAPD Concentration BSCB

External Loops PE/TRD/GR/0101

Chain B

BTS BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family

O&M/B bus

C O N T R O L

O&M/A bus

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

To/From To OMC-R OMC-R

TCU/MSC 12-6

The processing chain or MPU is duplicated for reliability and operates in matched pairs (MPU-A and MPU-B). Each of these units includes: • an Operation and Management Unit (CPU-OMU) for O&M control, • a Main Processing Unit board (CPU-MPU) for switching control, • one or two Base Interface Front-end Processor (CPU-BIFP) for BTSs control, • a Mass Memory Unit (MMU/MMU_IDE), • a X25 interface Controller (SICX), • a LAPD interface Controller (SICD/SICD8V), • a CCITT SS7 interface controller(s) (CCS7), • a SUPervision board (SUP/SUP2), • Serial Link Switching unit (SLS/SLS2). The Equipment cabinet shelves contain: • a duplicated Equipment Cabinet Interface unit (ECI), • an external ALArm regrouping board (ALA), • Dual Digital Trunk Interfaces boards (DDTI), • TCU Signaling link Concentration Boards (TSCB), • BTS Signaling link Concentration Boards (BSCB). The SWitching Unit or SWU is duplicated for reliability and accommodates: • a Switching Control board (SWC), • one or two Main SWitching boards (MSW), • one or two SWitching Extension boards (SWE) controlling 16 additional links, • duplicated Rate Converter Boards (RCB). "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

12-6

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family Physical Layout Boards Layout Power supplies

5 V / - 100 A PSUC ++ 12 V / -4 A

DDTI DDTI DDTI DDTI DDTI DDTI DDTI DDTI DDTI DDTI DDTI DDTI ALA RCB RCB RCB RCB RCB TSCB TSCB RCB RCB RCB RCB RCB

SICD

SICD

SICD CCS7

SICD

CPU-BIFP

CPU-BIFP SICD

SUP

SLS SICX

SICD

SICD

CPU-MPU SICD

CCS7 CCS7

CPU-OMU SICD

MMU

MPUAshelf

5V 12 A

5V 12 A

5V 12 A 5V 12 A

5V 12 A

5V 12 A 5V 12 A

5V 12 A

5V 12 A

PCM shelf EQPD1 PCM shelf EQPD0 Mixed shelf EQP1

SWE MSW MSW SWE SWC ECI ECI SWC SWE MSW MSW SWE BSCB BSCB BSCB BSCB BSCB BSCB BSCB BSCB BSCB BSCB BSCB BSCB

SICD

SICD

SICD CCS7

SICD

SICD CPU-BIFP

Fans

CPU-BIFP

SUP SLS SICX

SICD

SICD

Power supplies + 5 V / - 100 A + 12 V / -4 A - 12 V / - 3 A

CPU-MPU SICD

CPU-OMU SICD

MPUBshelf

MMU

PSUC

CCS7 CCS7

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

DDTI DDTI DDTI DDTI DDTI DDTI DDTI DDTI DDTI DDTI DDTI DDTI

- 12 V / - 3 A

5V 12 A

5V 12 A

Switching matrix shelf SWG

5V 12 A

BSCB shelf EQPT

5V 12 A 5V 12 A 5V 12 A

Fans Ethernet Connector

Control Cabinet PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Equipment Cabinet BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family

12-7

The BSC equipment is held in two cabinets:

• The Control cabinet contains the processing unit that directs the overall BSC operations, including the equipment cabinet operations and insures the communications with the OMC-R. • The Equipment cabinet contains the switching matrix, different interface modules and the equipment for the management of the PCM links. Duplication or redundancy of the boards ensures service continuity in the event of a failure. The BSC 6000/12000 exists in five different basic configurations, depending on the number of SICD/SICD8V boards.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

12-7

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family Duplex Operation 12000HC Architecture

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

To/From OMC-R

MMU IDE

C O N T R O L

Chain A CPUMPU

CPUOMU

SLS2 MPU

Status

CPUBIFP

MPU SLS2 Status

SUP2

CPUBIFP

SUP2

MPUA SICD CCS7 8V

ECI A

SWC MSW-SWE

CPUOMU

Multibus II

RCB

RCB

SWC MSW-SWE

MPU Status

TSCB

BSCB

DDTI

O&M/A bus

12.01/EN

January, 2000

ECI B

Internal PCM/B

Chain status (MPU Status)

ALA

SICX

V11 64 kb/s

Internal PCM/A

External Loops PE/TRD/GR/0101

CPUMPU

SICD MPUB CCS7 8V

V11 64 kb/s

E Q U I P M E N T

MMU IDE

Chain B

Inter SUP

Multibus II

SICX

Ethernet

O&M/B bus To/From BTS

To/From TCU/MSC

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family

12-8

In the duplex operating mode, the software and data are loaded onto both processing chains. The active processor directs the BSC activities and the passive processor is updated by the active one. Furthermore the hard disks of the two BSC processing chains are mirrored. The passive processor is updated by the active one each time a call reaches or leaves a stable state. Stable calls are recovered when there is a failure on the active chain and the passive chain turns active. The standby chain performs the operations needed to ensure the lowest impact on traffic handling in case of switch over: • maintaining active/standby data integrity on its disk, • running tests to detect standby components faults, • sending its operational status to the active side to determine which chain is in the best condition. Moreover, the standby chain receives from the active one all the information needed to sustain calls in case of switch-over (radio channel information, terrestrial and SCCP circuit used, ...). An audit is performed upon operator request on both chains to ensure disk data integrity. The audit is performed on the active side and the data consistency on the passive is ensured by the mirror mechanism. A switch-over is performed in case of major hardware or software anomaly. The switchover condition is detected by the supervision entity and initiated by the SUP board after comparison with the other chain. "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

12-8

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family BSC 12000 12000 Versus 6000 CPU /MPU

Up to: • 1200 Erlangs • 48000 BHCAs • 320 TDMA

CPU /BIFP

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Mandatory for BSC 12000 Flash EPROM = Fast Restart

SICD8V

1 2

Processor = Pentium 120

3

Up to 64 TRXs

4 5

Processor = Pentium 75 PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Only for BSC 12000

6 7 8

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family

LAPD Management

12-9

Although the BSC 6000 can be equipped with the new CPU-MPU and CPU-BIFP within the V8 release, the BSC 12000 mandatory comes with these enhanced boards. The BSC 12000 also comes with a new SICD8V boards along. This board features eight LAPD input-ports. The SICD8V is able to handle up to 64 TRX-signaling. According to the Nortel traffic model, the BSC 1205 (delivered with 5 SICD8V boards) reaches 1200 Erlangs and a 48000 BHCA (Busy Hour Call Attempts) throughput. The BSC 6000 can be upgraded to a BSC 12000 on site.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

12-9

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family BSC 6000/12000/12000HC

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

BSC Family Life

6000

6000

CPU 66

CPU 120 V11

V11

V11

V9 V9

12000HC V11

12000 HC 100 = NO CPU 120 (or 133)

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

HC 100 = YES CPU 120

V11

V11

12000HC HC 100 = YES CPU 133

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family

12-10

The BSC product line consists of the BSC 6000 and the BSC 12000 products. These two products are based on the same platform, making it possible to upgrade a BSC 6000 to a BSC 12000 in the field. Both the 6000 and the 12000 exist in five configurations to match the specific capacity required on the BSC site. The production of the BSC 2000 stopped in 1994 with the V5 release, and is no longer supported after the V9 release. The production of the BSC 6000 has stopped in December 1998. The product hardware and software will be maintained after this date but will no longer be supported after the V14 release. For potential unforeseen BSC extensions after March 1999, an upgrade to BSC 12000 can be offered: only a few boards have to be changed and all of them are proposed as upgrade kits. The BSC 12000HC (High Capacity) is the name of the BSC12000 equipped with the new HC100 kit (from V11.3). The BSC 12000 has CPU120 or CPU133 boards without mixing: • from release V10, the CPU133 will replace the CPU120 after the end of production with same performance and capacity, • for release V11, the CPU133 can replace the CPU120 only for 12000HC.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

12-10

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family GPRS Support

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

GPRS

12000

6000

GPRS

GPRS

V12 only PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

12000HC

GPRS From V12

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family

12-11

GPRS is not supported on BSC 6000. GPRS shall be supported in V12 on a BSC12000 (i.e. the HC100 kit is not mandatory), but there can be a high risk for future releases due to the limited RAM memory of the CPU66SE. GPRS in V14 will require both HC100 kit and either: • CPU120 with memory extension, • CPU133. For releases beyond V14, the HC100 is mandatory.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

12-11

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family BSC 12000 Upgrade to BSC 12000HC

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

• CPU-OMU: CPU 133 IE disk interface change: SCSI to IDE more processing capability: x2 or 3 • MMU: MMU-IDE disk interface change • SUP: SUP2: more processing power • SLS: SLS2 improved defense mechanism

+

Optional

CPU-MPU and CPU-BIFP = CPU133 more processing capability standardization of boards inside the BSC IDE = Integrated Disk Electronic PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family

12-12

BSC 12000 capacity is limited by its processing capability and different traffic profiles require different processing capability. The purpose of the upgrade kit HC100 is to increase the performance of the BSC, in order to support some hard call profiles. This High Capacity kit available for the BSC 12000, contains per chain: • a new CPU-OMU board, based on Pentium 133 MHz: CPU133IE, • a new MMU board with IDE disk: MMU-IDE, • a new SUP board: SUP2, • a new SLS board: SLS2. A new optional CPU-MPU/BIFP board, more powerful, is available: CPU133 (CPU133IE without IDE and Ethernet interfaces). If the CPU120 are kept, those boards must be upgraded with RAM from 16 Mb to 32 Mb. In other terms, RAM extension will be systematically associated to HC100 kit option only if CPU133 is not ordered. All HC100 kits must be changed at the same time. No dialogue is possible between two chains equipped with different CPU-OMU board. A new partitioning of BSC disk is needed. From V11.3, all new BSC 12000 are delivered including the HC100 kit: 12000HC.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

12-12

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family BSC Provisioning

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Hardware Software limits limits

PE/TRD/GR/0101

Load limits

Nbr of BTS Nbr of Cells BSC product range

Nbr of PCM/site Nbr of LAPD channels

BSC model

Nbr of TRX

12.01/EN

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family

12-13

The entry data are classified according to their weight in BSC dimensioning procedure: 1. Number of LAPD channels. 2. Number of TRX. 3. Number of external PCM. 4. Then, the other data: number of BTS (number of sites), and of cells. The different limits to be taken into account within the provisioning model are classified into hardware, software and load. Main hardware limits come from: • Number of SICD boards (there is a direct relationship between this limit and the number of radio sites). • Number of DDTI boards. • Number of CCS7 boards. Main software limits are given by: • Number of cells, number of TRX, number of TCU. Main load limits are: • The number of TRXs per SICD board: up to 16 TRXs can be managed by a SICD board (6000) and up to 64 TRXs by a SICD8V board (12000/12000HC). • The number of TRXs per LAPD port. "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

12-13

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

BSC 12000 Product Configuration

BSC 12000 product portfolio BSC type

1201 1

1202 2

1203 3

1204 4

1205 5

Maximum sites (with BSCB)

28

60

92

124

138

Maximum number of TDMA

64

128

192

256

320

8

16

24

32

40

48

48

48

48

48

2

4

4

4

6

TCU (with E1)

12

12

12

12

12

TCU (with T1)

14

14

14

14

14

Numb. of LAPD ports Number of PCM (E1 or T1) CCS7 links

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family

12-14

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

12-14

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family BSC 12000 Configuration

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

1 - Control Cabinet

BSC 12000 product portfolio BSC type CPU-OMU CPU-MPU CPU-BIFP SICX SICD8V SS7 SUP/SUP2 MMU/MMU-IDE SLS/SLS2

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

1201 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1202 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1

1203 3 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 1

1204 4 1 1 2 1 4 2 1 1 1

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family

1205 5 1 1 2 1 5 3 1 1 1

x2

12-15

From BSC type 3 (606) to type 5 (610), a CPU-BIFP board is still added but the CCS7 board is added in BSC type 2 and another in type 5 to raise the capacity of 1200 E.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

12-15

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family BSC 12000 Configuration

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

2 - Equipment Cabinet

BSC 12000 product portfolio BSC type Switching shelf (SWG) SWC MSW SWE ECI

1201 1

1202 2

1203 3

1204 4

1205 5

1 2 2 1

1 2 2 1

1 2 2 1

1 2 2 1

1 2 2 1

RCB

1

2

3

4

5

TSCB BSCB DDTI ALA

2 12 10/24 1

2 12 10/24 1

2 12 10/24 1

2 12 10/24 1

2 12 10/24 1

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family

x2

12-16

In BSC 12000, two MSW and two SWE are provided for each type. This allows to use BSCB boards directly from type 1. The number of DDTI boards no longer depends on the BSC type (24 boards are provided).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

12-16

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family BSC 6000/12000/12000HC

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Capacity Comparison

BSC product CPU MPU/BIFP type Nortel standard (Erlangs) Nortel standard (BHCA) High mobility (Erlangs) High mobility (BHCA) Short call duration (Erlangs) Short call duration (BHCA)

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

610 CPU66 600 24000 360 13650 240 23000

610 CPU120 600 24000 600 24000 440 42000

1205 CPU120 1200 48000 700 26000 640 60750

1205HC CPU133 1200 48000 1200 48000 1100 107000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family

12-17

Capacity is the capability of the BSC to handle subscriber activities such as: • calls, • location updates, • handovers. The capacity of the BSC is limited by two types of bottlenecks: • the real-time capacity limit of certain BSC processor boards such as SUP (i.e. OMUSUP-SWC), SICD/SICD8V, BSCB and CPU-MPU/BIFP, • the connectivity limit such as the configurable number of TRX; PCMs depending on the BTS configuration and of the BTS load. As Erlang values describes resource utilization, the BSC capacity can not only be described in terms of Erlang but must be associated to a subscriber profile. To reach its optimal capacity the BSC 12000HC (with HC100 kit) needs also the Capacity improvement package (mandatory patch): • software optimization of OMU-SUP-SWC slave mechanism, BSC-TMG contexts and BSC-SCCP contexts, • firmware optimization: new PROM for SWC, BSCB and TSCB boards. These capacities are given regardless of the Quality of Service. To maintain the BSC robustness during traffic overload periods, the overload control mechanism, by filtering messages, can reduce the QoS.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

12-17

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family Exercise 1 - Indication Path in Case of TCU Warning

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Active Chain MMU IDE

C O N T R O L

Chain A

CPUOMU

CPUMPU

SLS2 MPU

Status

CPUBIFP

Ethernet

MPU SLS2 Status

SUP2

CPUBIFP

SUP2

MPUA SICD CCS7 8V

ECI A

SWC MSW-SWE

CPUOMU

Multibus II

RCB

RCB

SWC MSW-SWE

MPU Status

TSCB

BSCB

O&M/A bus

12.01/EN

January, 2000

ECI B

Internal PCM/B

Chain status (MPU Status)

ALA

SICX

V11 64 kb/s

Internal PCM/A

External Loops PE/TRD/GR/0101

CPUMPU

SICD MPUB CCS7 8V

V11 64 kb/s

E Q U I P M E N T

MMU IDE

Chain B

Inter SUP

Multibus II

SICX

Standby Chain

To/From OMC-R

DDTI O&M/B bus

To/From BTS

To/From TCU/MSC

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family

12-18

Draw the indication path when the TCU is warning.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

12-18

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family Exercise 2 - Signaling Path When Call Is Setting Up

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Active Chain MMU IDE

C O N T R O L

Chain A

CPUOMU

CPUMPU

SLS2 MPU

Status

CPUBIFP

Ethernet

MPU SLS2 Status

SUP2

CPUBIFP

SUP2

MPUA SICD CCS7 8V

ECI A

SWC MSW-SWE

CPUOMU

Multibus II

RCB

RCB

SWC MSW-SWE

MPU Status

TSCB

BSCB

O&M/A bus

12.01/EN

January, 2000

ECI B

Internal PCM/B

Chain status (MPU Status)

ALA

SICX

V11 64 kb/s

Internal PCM/A

External Loops PE/TRD/GR/0101

CPUMPU

SICD MPUB CCS7 8V

V11 64 kb/s

E Q U I P M E N T

MMU IDE

Chain B

Inter SUP

Multibus II

SICX

Standby Chain

To/From OMC-R

DDTI O&M/B bus

To/From BTS

To/From TCU/MSC

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family

12-19

Draw the signaling path when the call is setting up.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

12-19

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family Exercise 3 - Speech Path When Call-in-state

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Active Chain MMU IDE

C O N T R O L

Chain A

CPUOMU

CPUMPU

SLS2 MPU

Status

CPUBIFP

Ethernet

MPU SLS2 Status

SUP2

CPUBIFP

SUP2

MPUA SICD CCS7 8V

ECI A

SWC MSW-SWE

CPUOMU

Multibus II

RCB

RCB

SWC MSW-SWE

MPU Status

TSCB

BSCB

O&M/A bus

12.01/EN

January, 2000

ECI B

Internal PCM/B

Chain status (MPU Status)

ALA

SICX

V11 64 kb/s

Internal PCM/A

External Loops PE/TRD/GR/0101

CPUMPU

SICD MPUB CCS7 8V

V11 64 kb/s

E Q U I P M E N T

MMU IDE

Chain B

Inter SUP

Multibus II

SICX

Standby Chain

To/From OMC-R

DDTI O&M/B bus

To/From BTS

To/From TCU/MSC

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family

12-20

Draw the speech path when the call is in state.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

12-20

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family Number of Sites That a BSC Can Handle 138 sites

BSC Equipment cabinet

BSC Control cabinet 1

SICD

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Here’s a BSC 6000

1

BTS (BCF)

BSCB

4

8 TRXs + BCF

1

2

Site #1

DCC or DSC

3

1

10

11 #137 #138

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

TSCB

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family

12-21

First, the signaling base load of a site is one LAPD from a maximum of 8 TRXs with the BCF signaling along. Second, 11 BSCB boards (located is the BSC Equipment cabinet) can concentrate up to 4 input -ports x 3 out-ports x 11 boards = 132 sites. Third, 10 SICD boards (located in the Control cabinet of the BSC 6000) provide 40 input signaling ports. In turn, 5 SICD8V (BSC 12000) boards provide 40 input-ports (5 x 8 inputports) too. Fourth, 11 BSCB boards provide 3 x 11= 33 output-ports. Thus there are 7 SICD input-ports free out of either the SICD or the SICD8V. One inputport of either SICD or SICD8V must be assigned to the LAPD stream from the TSCB board. The six remainder input-ports on the SICDs can be directly assigned to other sites (#133, #134, #135, #136, #137, #138). We conclude that the BSC 6000 and the BSC12000 can handle 132+6= 138 sites.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

12-21

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family Check Your Learning

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

1- What main functions does the BSC perform?

2- What does the SICD/SICD8V board perform?

3- What does the CCS7 board perform?

4- What do the BSCB and TSCB boards perform?

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family

12-22

1- What main functions does the BSC perform?

2- What does the SICD/SIC8V board perform?

3- What does the CCS7 board perform?

4- What do the BSCB and the TSCB boards perform?

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

12-22

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family Check Your Learning

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

6- Where are located the O&M functions in the BSC?

7- How can we distinguish a BSC 6000 from a BSC 12000?

8- How many BTSs and TRX can handle a BSC 12000 model 1205?

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family

12-23

6- Where are located the O&M functions in the BSC?

7- How can we distinguish a BSC 6000 from a BSC 12000?

8- How many BTSs and TRX can handle a BSC 12000 model 1205?

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

12-23

January, 2000

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

12-24

January, 2000

TransCoder Unit: Functional Description

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Section 13

PE/TRD/GR/0101

TransCoder Unit: Functional Description

12.01/EN

January, 2000

TransCoder Unit: Functional Description

13-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

13-1

January, 2000

TransCoder Unit: Functional Description

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Objectives

PE/TRD/GR/0101

After completing this lesson you will be able to: • Relate what must perform the TCU; • Identify benefit having remote TCUs.

12.01/EN

January, 2000

TransCoder Unit: Functional Description

13-2

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

13-2

January, 2000

TransCoder Unit: Functional Description TCU Functions Converts the GSM speech frames into PSTN / ISDN A-Law or µ-Law speech.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

1

2

Adapts the user’s data frames from BSS to V110 ISDN 64 kbps ISDN format.

BSS MSC

TCU

BSC BTS

A Interface

Ater Interface TCU is the Nortel name for the Transcoder Rate Adapter Unit PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

TransCoder Unit: Functional Description

13-3

TCU (TransCoder Units) are designed to reduce the amount of PCM links needed to convey radio speech and data channels between BTS, BSC and MSC. The concept of remote transcoders permit to convey 4 multiplexed channels at kbit/s onto a single 64 kbit/s PCM channel.

16

Multiplexing is implemented within the BTS, thus the number of PCM links needed on the Abis interface is reduced. The TCU enables code conversion of 16 kbit/s channels from the BSC into 64 kbit/s channels for MSC in both directions. TCU is the product designation of Nortel for the TRAU (Transcoder and Rate Adapter Unit) specified in the GSM recommendations.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

13-3

January, 2000

TransCoder Unit: Functional Description Benefit Having Remote TCUs

MSC

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

BTS TCU TS 1

TS 2

TS 3

TS 4

Four PCM time-slots between BTS and MSC when TCU is close to the BTSs.

MSC

BTS TCU TS 1

One PCM time-slot between BTSs and MSC when TCU is close to the MSC.

= Save three PCM time-slots ! PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

TransCoder Unit: Functional Description

13-4

The TCU has been designed to be collocated with the MSC in order to save PCM resources between the BSCs and the MSC. The speech and data traffic (full-rate, enhanced full-rate or 14.4 kbps data rate) will be transported into circuits at 16 kbit/s until it reaches the TCU allowing four traffic channels to be carried at 64 kbit/s by each PCM Time-Slot . Without remote TCU: • Poor use of experience transmission resource. • Transmission of information in a time slot of 64 kbps. • Limitation of the number of speech channels. With TCU located at the MSC premises: • Multiplexing of 4 speech channels into one time slot. • Optimization of the physical resources. • Capacities on Abis and Ater interfaces multiplied per four.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

13-4

January, 2000

TransCoder Unit: Functional Description Functional Detail Time Slot Processing

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Ater interface

LAPD TS 1

BSC

A interface

O&M

SS7 TS

SS7 TS

X.25 TS 2 *

X.25 TS 2 *

PCM link

PCM link

Speech TS

Data TS

Transcoding

Rate Adaptation

Speech TS

Data TS

MSC OMC

MSC

MSC

* if used PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

TransCoder Unit: Functional Description

13-5

LAPD time slot is used for internal TCU purpose to the BSC. SS7 and X.25 time slots are simply switched through the switching matrix without transcoding process. Speech blocks are transcoded by vocal transcoders. Data blocks are rate adapted by V110/PCM converters.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

13-5

January, 2000

TransCoder Unit: Functional Description Signaling on the BTS - TCU Interface

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

OMC

PSTN

TCU

BSS

MSC A interface

BSC

Ater Interface

NSS

BTS

13 kbps + 3 kbps of remote control (Half-rate, full-rate, DTX or not DTX, SID)

• • • • •

The Mobile informs the MSC of the supported transcoders The MSC in turn sends this information to the BSC The BSC establishes the links from the Mobile to the TCU The BTS controls the TCU transcoders using in-band signalisation The communication starts

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

TransCoder Unit: Functional Description

13-6

The 16 kbit/s bit stream contains the encoded speech (13 kbit/s) and in-band signalisation to allow the control of the remote transcoders by the BTS. In-band signalisation allows the transcoders to know what kind of information is received and then what type of adaptation it must apply both for the uplink and the downlink transmission. Each block conveyed between the BTS and the remote transcoders contains 316 bits: • 260 for speech, • 35 for frame synchronization, • 5 for discrimination between speech and data, full rate and half rate, • 6 for time alignment, • 1 for Bad Frame Indicator (uplink), • 1 for DTX mode.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

13-6

January, 2000

TransCoder Unit: Functional Description Speech on the BTS-TCU Interface

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

TCU

Speech handler and DTX

BTS Frame Processor

BSC

GSM speech decoder

13 bit linear to 8 bit A or µ Law

Speech handler

To MSC Speech blocks (260 bits/20 ms) PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

TransCoder Unit: Functional Description

13-7

The speech is carried between BTS and TCU using blocks of 260 bits/20 ms 13 kbps).

(=

TCU converts the 13 kbps speech blocks into 64 kbps T1 (µ-law) or E1 (A-law) PCM time slots. Furthermore, the Frame Processor of the BTS warns the TCU whether a speech frame is generated correctly or not (Bad Frame Indicator). The speech transcoder also need to be told whether transmission in the uplink is on DTX mode or not. In turn, the TCU informs the BTS whenever it generates SID (SIlent Descriptor) frames.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

13-7

January, 2000

TransCoder Unit: Functional Description User’s Data Rate Treatment Abis

Ater

A

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

BTS

TCU

Frame processor

FEC

DTX handling

RA’1 / RA1

RAA

BSC

RA’1 RA0

FEC

TAF

RAA

RA2

64 Kbps RA0: asynchronous -> synchronous RA’1: Air Interface V110 frame RA1: ISDN V110 8 or 16 kbps frame PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

To MSC RAA: BSS (Abis-Ater) V110 frame. RA2: ISDN V110 64 kbps frame

TransCoder Unit: Functional Description

13-8

RA0 function perform asynchronous to synchronous conversion by providing start and stop bit when necessary. RA1’ features the synchronous user’s data stream into special GSM frame V110 shape (36 bits every 10 ms, 60 bits every either 5 ms or 10 ms). FEC, in turn, performs the channel coding. RA1 brings up the user’s data into either 8 or 16 kbps V110 frame (every 10 ms or

5 ms).

RAA convert the V110 CCITT frame of 80 bits to an TRAU (said TCU in Nortel’s products) frame format in order to transmit four channel over an 64 kbps PCM link. This frame contains 72 bits because of one does not take care of the V110 frame-flag-start-byte when transmitting over the BSS. RA2 output an 80 bits V110 frame into a 64 kbps DS0 link.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

13-8

January, 2000

TransCoder Unit: Functional Description Check Your Learning

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

1- What are the two functions of the TCU?

2- What is the benefit having remote TCUs?

3- Why do we need rate adaptation of user’s data?

4- How many TDTI boards do we need per TCU? Why?

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

TransCoder Unit: Functional Description

13-9

1- What are the two functions of the TCU?

2- What is the benefit having remote TCUs?

3- Why do we need rate adaptation of user’s data?

4- How many TDTI boards do we need per TCU? Why?

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

13-9

January, 2000

TransCoder Unit: Functional Description Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

13-10

January, 2000

TCU: Physical Description

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Section 14

PE/TRD/GR/0101

TCU: Physical Presentation

12.01/EN

January, 2000

TCU: Physical Presentation

14-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

14-1

January, 2000

TCU: Physical Description

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Objectives

After completing this lesson you will be able to: • List the different boards of a TCU shelf; • Briefly explain their role.

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

TCU: Physical Presentation

14-2

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

14-2

January, 2000

TCU: Physical Description Hardware Layout

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Control TUC

O&M Bus (9600 b/s asynchronous) PCM bus (2048 kb/s)

64 kbps switching matrix

0 TDTI1 TDTI2 TDTI

1

0, 2, 3, 4

BSC

TCB 0 TCB TCB 1 TCB TCB 2 T1 TCB3 TCB4 TCB5 TCB6 TCB7 E1 TCB8 TCB9 TCB

MSC

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

TCU: Physical Presentation

14-3

Each TCU module (one per shelf) is composed of three kinds of boards. Transcoder Unit Controller or TUC board: • O&M processor, • Provision of a Switching Matrix of 16 x 16 PCM: • insert/extract 64 kbit/s LAPD channel (link to BSC), SS7 (links to MSC) and X.25 (link to OMC-R). Either TransCoder Board TCB 1: • speech coding/decoding for 12 full rate traffic channels, • data rate adaptation (RAA – RA2), • includes 6 Digital Signal Processors (processing two channel each), and a general purpose processor. Or TransCoder Board TCB2: • supports FR and the new vocoder for Enhanced Full Rate EFR, • 12 DSP per board instead of 6, • 40 Mips per call instead of 20 Mips, • automatic switching between vocoders. Transcoder Digital Trunk Interface or TDTI board: • similar to BSC DDTI, • each board manages 2 external PCM links. "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

14-3

January, 2000

TCU: Physical Description External Communications Internal PCM Link Allocation in the TCU 10

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

TCB1/ TCB2

1

PCM 6 to PCM 15

PCM0 for internal use

2

PCM 3

TUC Switching matrix

TDTI 1

PCM 4

3 4

PCM 5

TDTI 2

1

BSC

PE/TRD/GR/0101

TDTI 0 1/2

12.01/EN

PCM 1

January, 2000

PCM 2

TDTI 0 2/2

MSC

0

TCU: Physical Presentation

14-4

Each TCU is linked to one Ater PCM to the BSC and up to four PCMA to the MSC. Board

Board Number

Internal PCM Number

TUC TDTI TDTI TDTI TCB or TCB2 TCB or TCB2 TCB or TCB2 TCB or TCB2 TCB or TCB2 TCB or TCB2 TCB or TCB2 TCB or TCB2 TCB or TCB2 TCB or TCB2

0 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

0 to 15 1 (BSC) & 2 3&4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

14-4

January, 2000

TCU: Physical Description

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

TCU Cabinet

- Up to 120 speech channels when using PCM E1. DS0 # 0 assigned to PCM handling. One DS0 assigned to LAPD.

P S U E P S U E

P S U E P S U E

P S U E

P S U TTT TTTT TT T TT T T E D DD CCCC C C C C C C U TTT B BBB B B B B B B C P I I I S U E

P S U E P S U E

P S U E

P S U E P S U E

P S U E

P S U E P S U E

P S U E

TTT TTTTTTTTTT T DDD CCCC C CC C CC U TTT BBBBB BBBBB C I I I

TCU shelf fans

Fans

- Up to 92 speech channels when using PCM T1. One DS0 assigned to LAPD.

Fans

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

TCU shelf boards

TCU shelf fans

Fans P S U TTT TTTTTTTTTT T E DDD CCCC CC C C CC U TTT P BBBBBBBBBB C I I I S U E

TCU shelf boards TCU shelf fans

Fans P S U TTT TTTT T TT TT T T E DDD CCCC C C C C C C U TTT BBBB B B B B B B C P I I I S U E

TCU shelf boards

TCU shelf boards TCU shelf fans

TCU: Physical Presentation

14-5

Per TCU shelf: • Eight or ten TCB boards, 12 speech channels per board = up to 92 or 120 speech channels per shelf, • One TUC board. • Up to three TDTI boards, two PCM links per board. One link to BSC: second PCM of the first TDTI. • Up to four links to MSC, • One link unused: second PCM of the third TDTI, • Per PCM link: 30 TS (E1) or 24 TS (T1), • For the four links: up to 120 (E1) or 92 (T1) speech channels. Per TCU cabinet: up to four TCU shelves. Note One have to assign one DS0 for the CCS7 link and one DS0 for the LAPD link (maintenance purposes).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

14-5

January, 2000

TCU: Physical Description Check Your Learning

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

1- How many TDTI boards do we need per TCU? Why?

2- How many speech channels can a TCU shelf drive to the MSC?

3- What is the maximum number of TCU shelves in one TCU cabinet?

4- Can you connect TCU shelves of a TCU cabinet to different BSCs?

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

TCU: Physical Presentation

14-6

1- How many TDTI boards do we need per TCU? Why?

2- How many speech channels can a TCU shelf drive to the MSC?

3- What is the maximum number of TCU shelves in one TCU cabinet?

4- Can you connect TCU shelves of a TCU cabinet to different BSCs?

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

14-6

January, 2000

TCU: Physical Description Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

14-7

January, 2000

TCU: Physical Description Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

14-8

January, 2000

NSS Functions

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Section 15

NSS Functions

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

NSS Functions

15-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

15-1

January, 2000

NSS Functions

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Objectives

After completing this lesson you will be able to: • Know all the MSC external interfaces in the NSS • Relate the functions that a GMSC and a VMSC perform • Understand the PCM-30 and the CCS7 signaling devices

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

NSS Functions

15-2

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

15-2

January, 2000

NSS Functions NSS Architecture Site 1

Site 2 HLR

VLR

VLR D

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

BSS

D

G-interface

H

B-interface A-interface

MSC

Cinterface

GMSC

A-interface Other GSM, PSTN, ISDN

E-interface

F E

IWF

Billing Server

12.01/EN

B-interface

AUC

Other GSM, PSTN, ISDN

PE/TRD/GR/0101

BSS

January, 2000

F EIR

SMS-SC

E

IWF

Billing Server

NSS Functions

15-3

The distributed architecture of the NSS is organized with MSCs, servers and data bases, linked by interfaces normalized (B to G). There are two types of MSC to provide switching services to a defined part of the PLMN: • MSC, used to establish traffic channels and to switch signaling messages between PLMN entities and other GSM networks or fixed networks, • Gateway MSC (GMSC), is a specialized MSC managing the central data base HLR, containing permanent and dynamic subscriber data. All the information requested by the different functions is stored in four types of data bases connected to (or included in) the MSCs: • HLR or Home Location Register: permanent data specific to each subscriber, including service profile, location and billing options, • VLR or Visitor Location Register: in order to minimize access to the HLR, MSC uses this data base, which contains working data for subscribers moving within its coverage area (LAs), • Network security and access control are provided by the Authentication Center (AUC) and by the Equipment Identity Register (EIR): - AUC: to ensure that only authorized users have access to the network, - EIR: to maintain a list of stolen, faulty and valid equipment identities. NSS includes also specific equipment such as: • Inter-working Function (IWF): to provide the different bearer services offered by the network, • Short Message Services-Service Center (SMS-SC): used to store and forward point-to-point short messages, • Billing Server. This equipment or software elements are running applications more or less operator dependent.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

15-3

January, 2000

NSS Functions Mobile Switching Center Interfaces BSS

To PSTN A

BSC

C

GMSC

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

BTS

VLR

D

B

HLR

E EIR G F

BSS BSC

A

PE/TRD/GR/0101

VLR

MSC

BTS

B

12.01/EN

January, 2000

AUC Nortel HLR/AuC is housed in the DMSHLR Nortel VLR is housed in the DMS-MSC

NSS Functions

15-4

Interface A • Provides connections to BSSs onto PCM links. • Handles user’s voice and data circuits. • Handles the CCS7-SCCP signaling. • Handles BSSAP, MM, and CM message transfer. Interface B • Provides CCS7-SCCP-TCAP signaling links to VLR. • Handles MAP-VLR communications. Interface C • Provides CCS7-SCCP-TCAP signaling links. • Handles MAP- HLR communications. Interface D • Provides CCS7-SCCP-TCAP signaling links between HLR and VLR. • Handles MAP-HLR/ VLR communications. Interface E • Handles CCS7 circuit related connection between two MSCs. • Provides ISUP call command communications. Interface F • Handles CCS7-SCCP-TCAP signaling links to EIR. • Provides communication between MSC and the EIR. Interface G • Handles CCS7-SCCP-TCAP signaling link between two VLRs. • Provides MAP-VLR to MAP-VLR communications. PSTN / ISDN interface • Handles PCM trunks. • Handles various PSTN / ISDN signaling links (MF R2, CCS7, etc.). • Provide ISUP and country featured Call Command communications. "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

15-4

January, 2000

NSS Functions Gateway MSC Functions - Processes translations. - Routes calls to appropriate VMSC.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Handles the calls from the PSTN

GMSC

Retrieves roamer routing information

HLR

AUC

VMSC

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

NSS Functions

15-5

Any MSC in a GSM PLMN that acts as an interface between the land and the mobile networks is a GMSC. A GMSC provides an entry point into the PLMN from another network or service. A GMSC is also a routing center for incoming PLMN calls. When an incoming call reaches the GSM PLMN, it is routed through a GMSC, which requests the HLR and routes the call to the appropriate MSC.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

15-5

January, 2000

NSS Functions Visitor MSC Functions

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

- Requests BSSs for paging. - Processes update location. - Processes translations. - Requests for roamer and MS availability.

BSS

- Sets up and tears down the calls to PSTN. - Receives calls from the gateway MSCs. - Handles echo-canceler and IWF.

VMSC

Provides ticketing.

BSC BTS

VLR Handles inter-MSC handovers.

- Informs VLR of new location. - Gets roamer access grant for services.

BSS BSC

MSC

EIR

BTS

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

NSS Functions

Check MS available

15-6

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

15-6

January, 2000

NSS Functions MSC Architecture and Functions MSC

Timing generator

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Common bus

X.25 couplers

Switch

CCS7 couplers

E1/T1 trunks

E1/T1 trunks

Command Unit

Inter-Working modules

Echo Canceler

- Coordinates of call set up. - Location registration. - Hand-over management. - Ticketing and billing. - Interworking functions. - Synchronizes with the BSS. - Gateway to SMS-SC. - Handles operation on echo-cancelers.

Computer and peripherals module

To other MSC To PSTN / ISDN

BSS PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

NSS Functions

15-7

The Mobile Switching Center (MSC) has mainly to provide basic switching functionality as known from ISDN or toll exchanges but with additional capabilities for handling mobile subscribers. MSC coordinates the setup of calls to and from all GSM subscribers operating in its area. Specifically, the MSC controls the paging function (incoming calls). The dynamic allocation of access resources is done in coordination with the Base Station SubSystem (BSS). More specially, the MSC decides when and which types of channels should be assigned to which mobile. However the channel identity and related radio parameters are the responsibility of the BSS. The MSC supervises the connection transfer between different BSSs for MSs, with an active call, moving from one cell to another. This is ensured if two BSSs are connected to the same MSC but also when they are not. In this later case, the procedure is more complex, since more than one MSC is involved. Besides, the MSC performs ticketing on calls for all subscribers based in its area. While the subscriber’s call in state, the MSC obtains data for the call billing from the hand-over recipient MSC. Furthermore the MSC transfers encryption parameters from Visitors Location Registers (VLRs) to BSSs to enable ciphering on the radio interface. Last, the MSC serves as a SMS gateway to forward SMS messages from Short Message Service Centers (SMSCs) to the subscribers and from the subscribers to the SMSCs. "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

15-7

January, 2000

NSS Functions InterWorking Function

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

BSS

Mobile Switching Center

PSTN

Modem

MS

Data + DTE signals Rate adaptation DTE signaling

Modem

IWF

Land-DTE

DTE PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

NSS Functions

15-8

Because of GSM providing a wide range of data services to its subscribers, GSM interfaces with the various public and private data networks currently available. It is the job of the Interworking Function (IWF) to provide this interfacing capability. Networks to which IWF presently provides interface as follows: • PSTN, • ISDN, • Circuit-switched public data networks (CSPDN), • Packet-switched public data networks (PSPDN). It provides the subscriber with access to data rate and protocol conversion facilities so that data can be transmitted between GSM Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) and a land line DTE (the recipient). Furthermore it allocates a suitable modem from its modem bank when required. This is the case when a GSM DTE, a Fax machine, exchange data with a land Fax machine which works over analog modem (V.32). The IWF also provides direct connect interfaces for customers provided equipment such as X.25 PADs. Different protocols conversion may be required for signaling and traffic messages. This includes data rate adaptation and the addition of signaling bits reformatting. The IWF is a part of the Mobile Switching Center. "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

15-8

January, 2000

NSS Functions Echo Canceler 4 wire circuit (PCM)

GSM network 4 wire circuit

Mobile Switching Center

Echo Canceler

Talker Echo

Switch

Talker Echo

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Base Station SubSystem

PSTN

4 wire circuit 4w to 2w transformer

Two wire circuit Local loop Land telephone PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

NSS Functions

15-9

When the mobile establishes a circuit to the PSTN, an Echo Canceler (EC) is used at the MSC-PSTN interface to reduce the effect of the GSM delay. GSM introduces a round-trip delay (which results of speech encoding, decoding, and signal processing) of the order of 180 ms. Normally this delay would not be an annoying factor to the mobile, except when communicating with PSTN as it requires a two wires to four-wire transformer in the circuit. This transformer is required at the toll office because the standard loop is a two wire circuit. Some of energy at its four-wire receive side re-transmitted to the mobile causes the echo, which does not affect the land subscriber but is annoying factor to the mobile. Note that during a normal PSTN call, no echo is apparent because the delay is too short and the land user is unable to distinguish between the echo and the normal telephone side tones.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

15-9

January, 2000

NSS Functions Short Message Service Center Send Routing Information Alert-SC Set MW Data

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

HLR

Note MS Present

PSTN

SS7 MAP

Voice trunks: R2, ETSI ISUP...

Voice Mail alerts

SMPP (X.25 or TCP/IP)

SS7 MAP

Voice trunks: R2, ETSI ISUP...

VMS

MSC

MF DT

SME

X.25

SS7 MAP

SME

SMSC SS7 DTAP

SME Forward Short Message Delivery Report Various applications submitting Short Messages

BSC

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

NSS Functions

15-10

The Short Message Service is performed by a specific network element called Short Message Service Center (SMSC) which is commonly implemented on a computer platform. This SMSC is functionally separated from the GSM network although this does not preclude an integrated implementation. More than one SMSC may be connected to the GSM network. For both MO and MT services the SMSC acts as store and forward center; all GSM point to point Short Messages are either to or from the SMSC. A message from one Mobile Station to another must pass through a SMSC. Messages may be input to the SMSC from a fixed network customer by means of a suitable telecommunication service either from the fixed network or from a mobile network customer. The SMSC shall then reformat the message into that provided by the short message service, for delivery to the mobile telephone.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

15-10

January, 2000

NSS Functions Voice Mail System

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

MS

TX Mail User 1

User Mail

RX Mail User 2 Virtual FAX

SMS-SC

Voice Mail System

A

PLMN

Notification/automatic delivery of messages

Call answering Numeric messaging PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

TUES 11:46 Urgent Messages: 1 Normal Messages: 3 Played Messages: 2 Call 123# to retrieve

NSS Functions

15-11

Voice Mail System provides following functionality: • call answering: due to a large percentage of inbound traffic not completed, this function allows operator to recapture the traffic and subscribers to be informed by traffic diversion to mail boxes, • virtual fax: this fax allows mobile subscriber to be confident that no fax will be missed while roaming, • numeric messaging: rather than to leave a voice message a caller will be able to enter a numeric message (tel. number to re-call) that will be spoken to the subscriber, • notification/automatic delivery of messages: either through pager or outcalling, • SMSC integration: due to this function it will be possible to display more than a simple indication: “empty/not empty”. A typical message would be “XX messages YY new”.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

15-11

January, 2000

NSS Functions Intelligent Network Platform

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Service Control Point

SDF Service Data

SCF Service Control

Service Management System

SRF Specialized Resource

HLR SSF Service Switching

CCF Call Control

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Service Creation Environment

Intelligent Peripheral

GMSC Service Switching Point

NSS Functions

15-12

IN platform provides the service logic which can be developed by the service providers, independently from the GSM network vendor, and interworks with the GSM network using standardized signaling. As an open standard solution, it allows operators to offer the same services to their subscribers while roaming to other PLMNs. The GMSC/SSP handles SSF and CCF: • Service Switching Function provides functions required for interaction between the CCF and an SCF, and between the SRF and an SCF for non-call associated service handling. • Call Control Function provides call and service processing and control. The Service Control Point handles: • Service Data Function provides customer and network data for real time access by the SCF in the execution of an IN provided service. • Service Control Function commands call control functions in the processing of IN service requests; may interact with other Functional Element to access additional logic or data as needed. The IP platform handles the Specialized Resource Function which provides resources for user interaction as part of an IN service (digit receivers, announcements, automatic speech recognition, text to speech, etc.). Intelligent Network can be configured as on-board or off-board networks, according to the location of the Service Switching Point (SSP) functionality: • on-board: SSP function is housed into the MSC, • off-board: SSP function is housed in a unit separated from the MSC. "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

15-12

January, 2000

NSS Functions Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

15-13

January, 2000

NSS Functions Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

15-14

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Section 16

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

16-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

16-1

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Objectives

After completing this lesson you will be able to: • Draw the DMS architecture and its internal main interfaces; • Explain the principle of the Nortel's time-switch and recognize its configurations; • Understand how a time slot comes into the dual panel switching network and how it goes out; • Understand the PCM-30 and the CCS7 signaling devices; • Identify the Super Node, the Size Enhanced and Micro-Node hardware layout; • Describe the Gsm Passport Platform hardware layout.

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

16-2

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

16-2

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP NSS Nortel: DMS Family and PicoNode

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Nortel MSC = Digital Multiplex System (DMS) SuperNode (SN)

SuperNode Size Enhanced (SNSE)

MicroNode

Proven DMS SuperNode MSC and HLR Platform Low - High Capacity Systems - Scalable/Modular Best Reliability Track Record on DMS-100 Platform

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

PicoNode for remote and campus applications of 5005000 subscribers

PicoNode

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

16-3

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

16-3

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

SuperNode (SN)

FSP

FSP

FSP

FSP

FSP

FSP

FSP

FSP MTD

P P P S S S U U U

P P S S U U

P S U

P S U

P S U

PP SS UU

P P P S S S U U U

P P S S U U

P S U

P S U

P S U

PP SS UU

P P S S U U

P S U

P S U

P S U

P S U

PP SS UU

P S U

P P P S S S U U U

P S U

P P S S U U

P S U

P S U

P S U

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

LIS

P P S S U U

LIS

P P S S U U

LMS 0

PP SS UU

COOLING UNIT

LMS1

LIS

P P S S UU

12.01/EN

MS 1

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

MS 0

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

Maintenance Trunk Module

PP SS UU

Maintenance Trunk Module

PP SS UU

COOLING UNIT

Maintenance Trunk Module

PP SS UU

COOLING UNIT

Cabinetized Link Peripheral Power Processor (LPP) Distribution Center

PE/TRD/GR/0101

PP SS UU

Maintenance Trunk Module

Cabinetized Trunk Module Equipment

January, 2000

PP SS UU

CM 1

CM 0

SLM 0

SLM 1

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

PP S S UU

PP SS UU

PP P SS S S UU U

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

PP S S UU

PCM30 Digital Trunk Controller PDTC 1

PCM30 Digital Trunk Controller PDTC 0 PP SS UU

COOLING UNIT

COOLING UNIT

Billing Server File

Processor

Storage 16 PCM30s Devices

Storage Devices 16 PCM30s

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

ENET 0.0

PP S S UU

P P S S U U

PP SS UU

ENET 0.1

P P S S UU

PP S S UU

PP SS UU

ENET 1.0

P P S S UU

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

ENET 1.1

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

COOLING UNIT

Dual-plane Cabinetized Applications File Combined Core Digital Trunk Processor cabinet Controller for Offshore ISDN Equipment

POWER LOAD ON LINE REWIND FORWARD REVERSE WRITE ENABLE

DDU

COOLING UNIT

Enhanced Network (ENET) equipment

PP SS UU

IOC

PP SS UU

COOLING UNIT

Cabinetized Input/Output Equipment

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

16-4

The SuperNode consists of the following cabinets: • The Cabinetized Power Distribution Center (CPDC) which provides the power for the DMS SuperNode (row by row). • The SuperNode (SN) cabinet, or DPCC, which contains two Message Switch (MS) shelves, a dual plane Computing Module (CM) shelf, and a dual plane System Load Module (SLM) shelf. • The Cabinetized Trunk Module Equipment (CTME) which contains up to four Maintenance Trunk Modules (MTM). • The Cabinetized Input/Output Equipment (CIOE) cabinet which contains the Input/Output Controller and suitable devices (DDU, MTD). • The ENET Cabinet (ENC) which contains the Enhanced NETwork (ENET). • The Cabinetized Digital Trunk Equipment (CDTE) which may contain two PCM-30 Digital Trunk Controllers (PDTC). • Applications File Processor cabinet (AFP) which may house storage devices. • The Link Peripheral Processor (LPP) cabinet which contains SS7 and Ethernet coupling devices.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

16-4

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP Digital Multiplex System (DMS) Architecture

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

DMS-Core DMS-Core

File Processor (Billing)

DS512

IOM

ISM DS30

DMS - Bus CLK 0

Message switch 0 0 1 DS512

DS30

LPP

V.35 interface

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

DS512 or DS30

DS30

ENET ENET To BSSs

To HLR, VLR, EIR, SMSC, etc.

January, 2000

PDTCs

PCMs

DSx channels access message DSx channels (voice, data, and signaling) NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

To PSTN /ISDN

16-5

Nortel’s Digital Multiplex System (DMS) is a basic made up of the following: • DMS-core, the control component, • DMS-bus, the messaging component, • ENET, the switching matrix, • the Link Peripheral Processor (LPP), the PCM Digital E1/T1 Trunk Controller (PDTC), • the Input/Output Controllers, IOC. For reliability, the DMS-Bus features two Message Switch (MS) that route messages and allow direct communication between the different modules of the DMS-Super-Node (Switching Matrix ENET, Link Peripheral Processor, PCM Digital Trunk controller). The DMS-Bus also houses the system clock, used by both the Bus and the Core Module to carry out general timing functions. The system clock, which receives the network synchronization from PSTN, provides synchronization for the DMS and can serve, in turn, as a master clock source to allow the entire network (the different BSSs) to run the same frequency. DMS-Bus access port can be configured as either DS30 copper interfaces or DS512 fiberoptic interfaces: • DS30 consists of 32 channels (2.56 Mbit/s). • DS512 consists of 512 channels (49.15 Mbit/s) equivalent to 16 DS30.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

16-5

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP DMS Core Modules

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Duplex macro synchronous features

To the DMS-Bus

RTIF 1

RTIF 0 Memory

CPU 0

MEB

CPU 1

SLM

0

Memory

SLM

Crossover Busses

Computing Module

System Load Module

1

MEB: Mate Exchange Bus (redundancy communications), RTIF: Reset Terminal Interface PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

16-6

Features: • The DMS Core Module is a dual macro synchronized module working in duplex mode (both the CPU are on-line and running simultaneously, one is designed active and the other is hot-standby). Thus Both CPU are in-step, executing the same sequence of instructions. If an inequality is detected, a mismatch interrupt is generated and the faulty CPU is isolated. The standby CPU become active. • Coordinates call processing activities of system components. • Serves as control component for the DMS-MSC. • Can house some application process like the MSC, the VLR, the HLR, the STP (Signaling Transfer Point), and combinations MSC/HLR. It consists of: • The Computing Module (CM), which manages high-level call processing functions with up to 256 Mbytes (SR70 processor) of memory per plane. • The System Load Module (SLM), which stores and loads system images from hard disk and tapes. Each SLM is made of one cartridge tape drive of 525 Mbytes and one disk of 1 Gbyte. • The Mate Exchange Bus (MEB), which ensures operations of duplication. This medium allows the two Computing Modules to routinely check each other’s mode of operation.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

16-6

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP SuperNode Configuration DPCC Cabinet

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

FSP PP SS UU

MS 1

P P S S UU

PP SS UU

MS 0

P P S S UU

Dual Plane Combined Core PP SS UU

PP SS UU

CM 1

SLM 0

CM 0

P P S S UU

SLM 1

PP SS UU

COOLING UNIT

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

16-7

The standard SuperNode platform is used for large GSM networks. The DMS-Core is housed in the DPCC (Dual Plane Combined Core Cabinet). In this cabinet, there are three shelves: • one shelf per MS, • one shelf for the CMs, • one shelf for the SLMs. There is up to 960 Mbytes memory per CPU Plane.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

16-7

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP Nortel's Enhanced NETwork (ENET) TSIU: Time Slot Interchange Unit, also known as a crosspoint card

X8 Fiber interface #0

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

IN

Fiber interface #7

IN

X8

V e r t i c a l B u s

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Time Slot Interchange Unit

X 64

Fiber interface #7

OUT

Fiber interface #0

OUT

Horizontal Bus

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

16-8

ENET (Enhanced NETwork) is a single stage, non blocking, time switch capable of switching 131,072 one-way digital circuits or 65,536 two-way digital circuits (2048 PCM 30). The switching network, consists of eight Horizontal buses for input, and eight Vertical buses for output. A Time Slot Interchange Unit (TSIU) is located at each of the 64 crosspoints: • unswitched channels entering onto the Vertical bus are written into a double-buffered memory in each cross-point card (TSIU), • the appropriate cross-point circuit takes unswitched channels from the Vertical Bus and feeds them to the suitable Horizontal Bus in the right time-slot, • from the H-bus, the time-slot goes back through the V-bus, where it is transmitted to the appropriate terminating peripheral, • each TSIU (16K x 16K time-switch) store 16,384 time slots in a double-buffered configuration so that the delay through the TSIU is always a fixed 125 micro seconds. The connection-memory control is updated by the DMS-Core (through the DMS-Bus and the ENET processor). Nortel’s ENET time-switch is available up to 128K (2 cabinet of 128K, one plane in each cabinet) channels configuration. SuperNode DMS currently uses an ENET up to 64K channels (one cabinet of 2 planes, each of 64K).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

16-8

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP Link Peripheral Processor (LPP) I/O equipment frame

DMS-Core

ENET

PDTC Channelized CCS7 from PSTN ISDN

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

DMS-Bus

LPP

LPP

LMS unit

LIU7

NIU

NIU

LIU7

LMS unit

LIU7

LIU7

EIU

EIU Ethernet LAN

CSS7 MTP treatment LMS = Local Message Switch PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

V.35 HLR

4215 /MR P

EIR

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

16-9

The Link Peripheral Processor (LPP) equipment provides the following functions: • Terminates a number of link types and implements a number of protocols, to connect the DMS to external operating and signaling networks (PCM, Ethernet, V.35). • Receives and transmits all CCS7 messages to/from switch into PLMN and PSTN either in direct (V.35) or channeled access (PCM30 link). • Interfaces DMS-Core and CCS7 through DMS-Bus. • Allows for increased message handling by connecting the CCS7 network to the DMSCore (through the switching matrix). It consists of several units: • LMS: Local Message Switch, controls the messaging between LPP’s equipment and DMS-Bus. • NIU: Network Interface Unit, acts as a switch for channeled access and manages CCS7 signaling coming through PCM30 trunks from BSS. A NIU handles up to 10 LIU7s. • LIU7: Link Interface Unit, performs the necessary routing functions on the signaling messages thereby relieving DMS-Core of this function or coming from other nodes such as VLR, HLR, (V.35). • EIU: Ethernet Interface Unit, interface between DMS-bus and any Ethernet LAN.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

16-9

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP LPP Cabinet

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

FSP

Local Message Switch

PP SS UU

Link Interface Shelf

PP SS UU

LIS

P P S S UU

PP SS UU

LIS

P P S S UU

PP SS UU

LIS

PP SS UU

Super Node Hardware

LMS 0

LMS1

P P S S UU

One LIS contains either 12 LIUs or 10 LIUs + 2 NIU

COOLING UNIT

LPP = Link Peripheral Processor PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

16-10

The LPP Cabinet is currently featured with either 24 LIUs or 36 LIUs. On the other hand, one can replace two LIU in each shelf by two NIU to provide channelized signaling access. The LPPs can be also shipped within the SNSE hardware. In that case one can use 12 expansion slots for the LIUs (12 LIUs or 10 LIUs + 2 NIUs) plus 2 additional slots for 2 LIUs close to the ENET.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

16-10

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP PCM-30 Digital Trunk Controller (PDTC)

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Shelf 0

PCM-30 #0 Processor

DS512 Fiber Interface

Processor

DS512 Fiber Interface

PCM-30 #7

Shelf 1

PCM-30 #8

PCM-30 # 15

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

16-11

PDTC are designed to provide the necessary functions for supporting trunk termination to the outside world. The Dual-shelf Digital Trunk Access (DTA0, DTA1) processor operate in hot standby mode. One shelf's processor is active, providing the necessary processing and control functions, while the adjacent shelf's processor is in a standby mode that is able to takeover if a fault occurs on the active shelf's processor.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

16-11

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP Peripherals: ISM ISM = Integrated Service Module "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

FSP

•• The The ISM ISM Shelf Shelf contains contains

P P S S U U

✓ ✓ Maintenance Maintenance and and service service circuits: circuits:

✓ ✓

✓ ✓

–– Enhanced Enhanced Digital Digital Recorded Recorded Announcement Announcement Machine Machine (EDRAM) (EDRAM) –– Conference Conference Trunk Trunk Module Module (CTM) (CTM) Special circuit packs for: Special circuit packs for: –– alarm alarm cross-connect cross-connect shelf shelf –– Office Office Alarm Alarm Unit Unit IOM IOM pack pack

•• ISM ISM Dimensioning Dimensioning

✓ ✓ 33 shelves shelves per per cabinet cabinet ✓ ✓ Up Up to to 18 18 test test and and service service circuits circuits

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Not Used

P P S S U U

P P S S U U

2

P P S S U U

1

P P S S U U

P P S S U U

0

P P S S U U

PP SS U U

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

P P S S U U

16-12

The ISM accommodates up to 18 test and service circuit packs used in switch and facility maintenance like the Enhanced Digital Recorded Announcement Machine (EDRAM), Conference Trunk Module (CTM) and, with special circuit packs, an alarm cross-connect shelf and an Office Alarm Unit.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

16-12

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP Peripherals: IOM

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

IOM = Input Output Module ISM Shelf

•• I/O I/O Functionality Functionality ✓ ✓ Disk Disk drive drive ✓ ✓ Tape Tape drive drive units units ✓ ✓ Enhanced Enhanced Multi-protocol Multi-protocol controller controller (EMPC) (EMPC) ✓ V.32, V.FAST and V.42 and Asynchronous ✓ V.32, V.FAST and V.42 and Asynchronous

P O R T + D D U

communications communications up up to to 28.8 28.8 kb/s kb/s

✓ ✓ Optional Optional Digital Digital Audio Audio Tape Tape (DAT) (DAT) drive drive for for

IOM Packs

removable removable storage storage up up to to 1.3 1.3 Gbytes Gbytes

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

DAT

P O R T + D D U

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

16-13

The Input/Output Module (IOM) is a new DMS pack that replaces the functionality of the Input Output Controller (IOC), disk drive, tape drive units and Enhanced Multi-Protocol Controller (EMPC), which were provided by various cards in the Input/Output Controller shelf. In addition, the IOM provides new functionality through the support of V.32, V.FAST, V.42 and asynchronous communications of up to 28.8 kb/s and will also support an optional Digital Audio Tape (DAT) drive for removable storage of up to 1.3 Gbytes. The IOM is housed in the new Integrated Services Module (ISM) shelf. When the DAT option is implemented, the DAT card is located in slot 4 of the ISM, to the right of the IOM DDU card. In this case, slot 5 is not available, because of the width of the DAT. For the same reason, slot 3 is not recommended for DAT. A second IOM can be provisioned in a different ISM shelf, for redundancy.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

16-13

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP Billing Server FSP

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Local storage and transfer of Billing Data

P P S S U U

Billing Server File Processor

P P P S S S S U U U U

•• Billing Billing server server Processor Processor ✓ ✓ Duplicated Duplicated processor processor ✓ SCSI Interface ✓ SCSI Interface

P P S S U U

•• Mass Mass Storage Storage Devices Devices ✓ ✓ 66 shadowed shadowed Disks Disks (12 (12 disks disks Max) Max) ✓ 1.3 Gbyte shadowed DAT Storage ✓ 1.3 Gbyte shadowed DAT Storage Unit Unit ✓ ✓ 55 ** 2.1GB 2.1GB shadowed shadowed disks disks == 10GB 10GB

•• Provides Provides OSI OSI FTAM FTAM interface interface

P P S S U U

P P S S U U

P S U

Storage 16 PCM30s

P S U

Devices

P P S S U U

Storage Devices

P P S S U U

16 PCM30s

COOLING UNIT

AFP Applications File Processor cabinet PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

16-14

Billing Server uses the Application File Processor cabinet (AFP). The Billing Server capacity is DISK 6 shadowed: 12 disk Maximum of which one Disk has 2.1GB capacity. Usually it is equipped with one shadowed DAT (1.3GB on each side). This means that there remains five Disks slots per side: 10GB capacity.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

16-14

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP SuperNode Size Enhanced (SNSE)

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

1 - Overview

FSP

FSP

FSP

FSP

FSP

FSP MTD

P S U

P S U

P S U

P S U

P S U

P S U

P S U

P S U

PP SS UU

P S U

P S U

P S U

P S U

P S U

P S U

P S U

P S U

PP SS UU

P S U

P S U

P S U

P S U

P S U

P S U

P S U

P S U

PP SS UU

Maintenance Trunk Module

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

P P S S U U

PP SS UU

P P S S U U

PP SS UU

P P S S U U

PP SS UU

P P S S U U

MS0

MS1

P P S S U U

P P S S U U

P P S S U U

P P P SS S S UU U U

P P S S U U

PP S S UU

P P S S U U

P P S S U U

PCM30 Digital Trunk Controller PDTC 1

Maintenance Trunk Module

Maintenance Trunk Module

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

Optional LIS (up to 12 LIUs)

16K ENET

PCM30 Digital Trunk Controller PDTC 0 P S U

P S U

P S U

P S U

P S U

P S U

P S U

P S U

COOLING UNIT

Cabinetized Power Distribution Center

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

PP SS UU

Maintenance Trunk Module

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

CPU 0

CPU 1

S L M

File

Processor

P P S S U U

COOLING UNIT

Cabinetized Digital Trunk Controller for Offshore ISDN Equipment

SuperNode SE SCC cabinet

POWER LOAD ON LINE REWIND FORWARD REVERSE WRITE ENABLE

P P S S U U

Storage 16 PCM30s Devices

Storage Devices 16 PCM30s

P P S S U U

P P S S UU

P P S S U U

PP S S UU

COOLING UNIT

COOLING UNIT

Cabinetized Trunk Module Equipment

January, 2000

S L M

Billing Server

Applications File Processor cabinet

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

PP S S UU

IOC

PP S S UU

DDU

COOLING UNIT

Cabinetized Input/Output Equipment

16-15

As an alternative option, the DMS SuperNode Size Enhanced (SNSE) gives network providers greater flexibility (footprint) in deploying advanced capabilities in small offices. The new Supernode Combined Core (SCC) cabinet contains: • the DMS SuperNode processing and messaging platform, • the Enhanced Network (ENET), • the Link Peripheral Processor (LPP) platform. In the SuperNode version, this equipment requires three or four cabinets. Nevertheless we have much less capacity in term of LIU7 and PDTCs than the Super Node (SN). If more than 16K switching capacity is required on an SNSE configuration, the SNSE ENI shelf can be replaced by a full ENET cabinet which allows for 64K with a single cabinet and is expandable to a 128K configuration.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

16-15

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP SuperNode Size Enhanced (SNSE) 2 - The SCC Cabinet

FSP P P S S UU

Supernode Combined Core cabinet replaces 3 cabinets "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

FSP FSP PP SS UU

MS 1

P P S S UU

PP SS UU

MS 0

P P S S UU

PP SS UU

CM 1

CM 0

P P S S UU

SLM 1

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

MS0

PP SS UU

MS1

LMS 0

LMS1

P P S S UU

P P S S UU

LIS

P P S S U U

P P S S UU

LIS

P P S S U U

P P S S UU

LIS

P P S S U U

COOLING UNIT

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

Optional LIS (up to 12 LIUs)

Link Peripheral Processor (LPP) FSP

PP SS UU

SLM 0

COOLING UNIT

Dual-plane Combined Core (DPCC)

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

16K ENET

S L M

CPU 0

CPU 1

S L M

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

ENET 0.0

P P S S U U

PP SS UU

ENET 0.1

P P S S U U

PP SS UU

ENET 1.0

P P S S U U

PP S S UU

ENET 1.1

P P S S U U

COOLING UNIT

Enhanced Network (ENET) equipment PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

16-16

The different components in the SCC cabinet are: • DMS Bus: which is a fully redundant, high speed transaction switch, is the hub joining all peripheral modules, devices and processors that are connected to its ports. It is located on either the SNSE or SuperNode cabinet. • Link Interface Shelf: LIUs process SS7 signaling messages between the DMS-Core, the DMS-Bus and the SS7 signaling Network. The LPP is a stand-alone cabinet. This functionality is also provided by the LIS (Link Interface Shelf) shelf, which is located in the SNSE cabinet. • Max NB V.35-LIU/EIU = 12; Max NB LIU Channelized Access = 10. • ENET and Interface Shelf: provide voice and data connections between peripheral modules and message paths to the DMS Bus. It is fully redundant, non-blocking switching matrix. It is located on either the SNSE or as a stand-alone cabinet. The ENET Shelf can also support 2 standard LIU7s for CCS7 links. • DMS-Core: is a fully redundant Central Processing Unit (CPU) and memory reserve.

PSU = Power Supply Unit

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

16-16

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP MicroNode 1 - Overview FSP

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PP SS UU

PP SS UU

MS 1

MS 0

PP SS UU

MSP

LIS

ENET Plane 0

PP S S SLM UU 0

CPU 0

Plane 1

PP SS UU

PDTC 0 unit 1

PP SS UU

PDTC 0 unit 0

PP SS UU

ISM 1

PP CPU 1 SLM S S 1 UU

COOLING UNIT

SCC SuperNode Size Enhanced (SNSE) Combined Core

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

SDM/FT ISM 0

COOLING UNIT

MCGS Meridian Cabinet Global Switch

MSP

DSX

Echo Cancellor

AC/DC Rectifier

Battery Backup

COOLING UNIT

MCIP Meridian Cabinet Interface & Power

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

16-17

The MicroNode is based on the DMS platform and benefits from all the DMS advantages in terms of reliability and scalability. All critical functionality is fully duplicated working in a "hot standby", "loadsharing" or "warm standby" mode of operation which means that in the event of a failure, takeover by the replacement element is automatic. The front end of the MicroNode switch is the SCC cabinet (same as SuperNode Size Enhanced cabinet). The second cabinet, is the MCGS (Meridian Cabinet Global Switch) which is configured with a DTC or PDTC. The third cabinet, is the MCIP (Meridian Cabinet Interface Power) which contains rectifiers, battery backup, echo cancellers, and DSX panels.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

16-17

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP MicroNode 2 - MCGS and MCIP Cabinets Meridian Cabinet Global Switch

Meridian Cabinet Interface Power

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

MSP

MSP

PDTC 0 unit 1

DSX

PDTC 0 unit 0

Echo Cancellor

AC/DC Rectifier

ISM 1

Battery Backup

SDM/FT ISM 0

COOLING UNIT

COOLING UNIT

MCIP Cabinet

MCGS Cabinet PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

16-18

The MCGS (Meridian Cabinet Global Switch) cabinet merges two existing cabinets into one, providing a cabinet that fits the technical needs without the footprint and power requirements needed by larger systems. It comprises of the following: • 16E1/20T1 port Digital Trunk Controller, • 2 Integrated Service Module (ISM) shelves each containing the following circuit packs, • 1 Gigabyte Disk Drive, • 1 DAT Drive, • Minimal MAP ports, • Modems. The MCIP (Meridian Cabinet Interface Power) cabinet, designed to provide power, gathers all power assets required to operate a small switch into one cabinet. It comprises of the following: • Power Distribution Shelf, provides power distribution to MCIP and MCGS cabinets. • Battery Backup system, provides 53 Amps, -48 V DC for 4 hours. • AC/DC Rectifiers, provides 220 V AC to -48 V DC. • Echo Cancellers, provides echo cancellation for PSTN spans, either T1 or E1. 8 of the 16 slots are populated for the pre-engineered configuration. • DSX provides cross-connectivity between the switch and the outside world. There are 2 such DSX cross connect panels in the MicroNode.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

16-18

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP Incoming Call from the PSTN to the GMSC Core Module 3

4

GMSC premises 2

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

DMS-Bus 4

3

2

5

2 3

NIU

LIU7

2 3

ENET ENET

4

4

1- Call to the MS. 2- ISUP messages are treated in the DMS core through signaling devices (NIU & LIU7). 3- DMS cannot route further, therefore interrogates HLR for an MSRN. 4- HLR complies with the routing number. 5- Now DMS can route the call.

VLR MSRN PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

MSRN

3

Peripheral Modules 1

4

3

HLR n° VLR

4 NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

Telephone network 1 16-19

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

16-19

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP A Call Goes to the VMSC that Pages the MS Core Module

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

3

VMSC premises

4

2

DMS-Bus 2

3

4

5

2 3

NIU

LIU7

5

2 3

ENET ENET 4

4

Peripheral Modules 4

3

BSS

4

3

BSC BTS

Ring !

5

Roamer PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

1

1- Call comes from the GMSC. 2- VMSC treats the ISUP messages in DMS core through the signaling devices NIU & LIU7. 3- DMS requests BSS for paging 4- MS complies. 5- DMS now can establish the voice circuit. NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

Gateway MSC

16-20

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

16-20

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP Nortel IWF: Gsm PassPort Node

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

The Magellan cabinet can host 2 GPP nodes

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

16-21

The IWF function is situated in a Gsm PassPort (GPP) node. The Magellan cabinet can contain two GPP nodes. This node is used in the PassPort family of data switches: i.e. PassPort 160.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

16-21

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP GPP Node

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

1 - Physical Presentation

0

1

2

L A N C P

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10 11

12

13 14

15

1 1 D E p 1 p S 1 or C • • • D or E • • • 1 S C 1 M v M p v p

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

C P

16-22

Each GPP node is composed of: • a node shelf assembly (function and control processor cards), • the DC power convertors, • a cooling unit, • a cable management assembly. The GPP shelf can contain up to 16 cards: • slots 0 and 15 are reserved for CPs cards (one redundant CP card may be optionally provisioned), • slot 1 is reserved for Ethernet card, • slots 2 to 14 can contain Function Processor Cards (E1C and E1MVP).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

16-22

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP GPP Node 2 - Functional Architecture Function Processors (FP)

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Control Processor (CP) LAN Function Processor LAN Interface

Control Processor

i960

32M

Bus Controller

Bus Controller

i960

Bus Controller

DS1C/E1C Munich Processor Chip

32M

i960

Bus Controller

Bus Controller

32M

Bus Controller

MVP 32 DSPs Processor

i960

Bus Controller

32M

Bus Controller

Interface Module (IM) Processor Module (PM)

Dual 800 Mbit/s Cell Buses

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

16-23

Each GPP node is composed of four blocks: • Control Processors (CP) and Function Processors (FP) are the processing elements for performing and managing Magellan PassPort functions. In most cases, the software providing a service is split into Control and Function parts: the Control part runs on the CP and the Function part, on the FP. • Function Processors (FP) provide interface ports that physically connect network communications facilities and PassPort switches. They switch data from external sources through the bus and out of the switch through other FPs. FPs have been designed specifically to accommodate high data throughput. Their computational resources support and execute only those real-time processes critical to rapidly delivering a service. These processes include protocol handling, call routing, and packet forwarding. • Ethernet card is a specific FP that handles IP connectivity (signaling MIP link). • PassPort bus is the bridge which allows data to be switched across different types of processor cards. It is fully redundant and consists of two synchronous 32 bit 25 MHz cell buses, operating in a load-sharing capacity, which can communicate with up to 16 function and control processors. Each bus operates at 800 Mbit/s for an aggregate speed of 1.6 Gbit/s. When both buses are active, traffic is distributed across both buses (dual-bus mode); should one bus fail, the other continues, although capacity is reduced to 800 Mbit/s (single-bus mode).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

16-23

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP GPP Node 3 - Connections

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

VLR CPDC E E 1 1 C M V P

E T H

C P

PCM Termination Panels VT420 Local Console PCM 30 Ethernet Terminal Panel

VLR

VLR

DTCO

LIM

PDTC

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

IP Network

PC

EIU

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

16-24

This drawing shows the different connections between GPP and other equipment. • The Cabinetized Power Distribution Center feeds GPP with -48 V power supply. • Several cables make the link between cards and «terminal panels» where PCM and Ethernet links are connected. The termination panel is a cable distribution system which can reside in the PassPort cabinet or be mounted in another cabinet or rack. • A local console can be connected directly on CP card for direct access.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

16-24

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP Nortel’s IN Platform: ServiceBuilder Service Creation and Management Environment

ServiceBuilderTM Intelligent Network

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Internet

MAP HLR SMS-C

MAP

CAP+

PRI

CAP+

SCP

SMS

CS1-R CS1-R

Intranets

IP

MSC SSP

DMS-100 SSP Voice

Fixed Network

GSM Network

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

Signaling Service Management

16-25

Nortel's IN architecture is made of a Service Control Point (SCP) which is connected via standard open interfaces (Core INAP) to the wireline and GSM switches; these have been enhanced to support IN via the integrated Service Switching Point (SSP) functionality. Nortel's IN architecture also comprises an Intelligent Peripheral (IP) used to provide voice interaction between the subscriber and the IN service. The IP is connected both to the SCP and to the SSPs. Finally, Nortel's IN architecture comprises all the elements required to support service creation in the IN. This includes a Service Creation Environment (SCE) and a Service Management System (SMS).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

16-25

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP Check Your Learning

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

1- What is the function of the DMS-Core?

2- What is the purpose of the DMS-Bus?

3- What is the purpose of the ENET?

4- What are the functions of the V-Bus and the H-Bus?

5- What is the maximum number of channels that a single ENET cabinet configuration can support?

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

16-26

1- What is the function of the DMS-Core?

2- What is the purpose of the DMS-Bus?

3- What is the purpose of the ENET?

4- What are the functions of the V-Bus and the H-Bus?

5- What is the maximum number of channels that a single ENET cabinet configuration can support?

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

16-26

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP Check Your Learning

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

6- What is the purpose of the PDTC?

7- What is the purpose of the LPP?

8- List four elements of the DMS Super Node.

9- Cite the modules which are combined into a compact, single cabinet of the SNSE configuration.

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP

16-27

6- What is the purpose of the PDTC?

7- What is the purpose of the LPP?

8- List three elements of the DMS Super Node.

9- Cite the modules which are combined into a compact, single cabinet of the SNSE configuration?

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

16-27

January, 2000

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

16-28

January, 2000

OSS Functions

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Section 17

PE/TRD/GR/0101

OSS Functions

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OSS Functions

17-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

17-1

January, 2000

OSS Functions Objectives

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Provides an introduction to the Operation and maintenance Sub-System (OMC-R and OMC-S) After completing this lesson you will be able to: • Explain why we need an OMC-R and an OMC-S. • Relate the main O&M functions devoted to the BSS and NSS. • Show what elements are operated by an OMC. • Explain the OMC-R architecture and locate the Q3 interface. • Show the various solution for the implementation of the OMC-R network. • Show the hierarchy of the OMC-R objects.

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OSS Functions

17-2

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

17-2

January, 2000

OSS Functions OSS Presentation

Stage 1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

WS

Stage 2

WS

WS

SERVER

WS

WS

SERVER

WS

SERVER

OMC/S

OMC/R

NMC

OMN Q.x

BSS

Q.x WS MD NMC NE PE/TRD/GR/0101

Q.x

BSS

Q.3

Q.x

BSS

Q.x

NSS

NSS

: Proprietary interface : Work Station : Mediation Device : Network Management Center : Network Element 12.01/EN

January, 2000

NSS

MD

Q.x

MD

MD

OMN

Q.x

BSS

BSS

BSS

NSS

NSS

NE

NE

NE

NE

NE

OSS Functions

Transmission Network NE 17-3

The Operation SubSystem is in charge of the control and management of the GSM Network. One distinguishes two types of OMC: • the OMC-R, which is able to manage several BSS, • the OMC-S, which is able to manage several NSS components. One OMC mainly consists of a Server and WorkStations connected through a Local Area Network such as Ethernet. The link between the Server and the BSS or NSS named OMN Interface (Operation and Maintenance Network), is a X.25 public or private Network. In a first stage, the operation and maintenance functions for the different equipment of BSS or NSS, are carried out through dedicated OMC. Each OMC dialogues with managed entities through Q.x interface which is a proprietary interface. In a second stage, it is possible to manage the BSS or NSS from different suppliers via specific Mediation Devices at a central position: the Network Management Center (NMC). The interface between the NMC and the different MD is named Q.3 and is normalized.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

17-3

January, 2000

OSS Functions Network Management 1 - Telecommunication Management Network BTS Site Coupling device

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Operation System Functions

Hybrid coupling device Cavity coupling device

TRX

Data Communication Functions

TRX A TRX B TRX C

Mediation Functions

BCF

NSS PE/TRD/GR/0101

TMN Functions 12.01/EN

January, 2000

BTS Object Classes OSS Functions

17-4

The operation, maintenance and administration functions follows standard telecom management principles. The GSM Recommendations use object management similar to the Telecommunication Management Network TMN developed by CCITT. Dialogues between management entities pertain to modeled abstract representations of the network to manage which is defined and stored in a management data base. This model must lists the different components of the network (objects), their relationships and their attributes. Examples of managed objects are: • sites, • machines (MSC/VLR, BSC, HLR), • hardware modules, • transmission links, • software, • observations, tests. The detailed specifications of the GSM architecture give the ability to identify object classes which will apply to all GSM networks.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

17-4

January, 2000

OSS Functions Network Management 2 - Network Object Tree Example

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

OMC-R

BSC

BSC

Radio Site

Radio Site

Cell

BSC

Radio Site

TCU

TRX

January, 2000

TCU

TCB board

PA Channel 7

Channel 0 12.01/EN

TCB board

BSC

TRX

DRX

PE/TRD/GR/0101

TCU

TUC board

Cell

BCF

BSC

OSS Functions

17-5

Each entity has a software representation. One entity can be a piece of hardware, like for example an electronic board (PCMI board), a cabinet, a functional entity (cell, TCU) or a piece of software. This software representation is an object model representation known as the Management Information Base (MIB) or Management Information Tree (MIT). To manipulate these objects, we use UNIX commands, not directly but through a Graphical User Interface on an OMC-R WorkStation. For example, to access a specific objet, we double-click on its representation on the screen.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

17-5

January, 2000

OSS Functions Network Management 3 - Objects, Attributes and Parameters Nortel Networks

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Ref:

Date:

Number of pages: From:

To:

Nortel Networks

Attributes: • Reference • date • Number of pages

Ref:1999/026 Date: 06/10/99 Number of pages: 1/1 From: Me

To: You

TEXT This is my new number

TEXT

FAX

FAX

FAX Object Class

Instance of FAX Object Class Parameters = values given to the attribute Example: Reference = 1999/026

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OSS Functions

17-6

There is an object class per entity. We have for example the object class of BSC. And in each class, there are instances of the object. To well understand this, let ’s make an analogy with FAX. What are the attributes of an object class? In this example we may cite reference, date, Nb of pages,…. What are the parameters? They are the values given to the attributes: reference = 1999/026. What is the state of an object instance? It ’s an indication to its current situation: a channel may be BUSY, FREE, UNAVAILABLE. A change of state could be the transition FREE --> BUSY

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

17-6

January, 2000

OSS Functions Network Management 4 - OMC-R Object Definition State Interaction Operational State

LOCKED UNLOCKED

DISABLED ENABLED DISABLED

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Administrative State

PE/TRD/GR/0101

Availability Status

DEPENDENCY FAILED

Attribute State

12.01/EN

Administrative State

Operational State

Availability State

Unlocked Locked Shutting Down

Enabled Disabled

Dependency Failed

January, 2000

Usage State Specific to xtp object

OSS Functions

Idle Busy 17-7

Objects are characterized by state attributes: administrative, operational and availability. Administrative state, describe the passive state of an instance, which can be modified by an operator; there are three states: • Unlocked (in service). • Locked (out of service). • Shutting down. Operational state, describe the operational state of an object: • Disabled. • Enabled. Availability status, describe the reason for an objects unavailability: • Dependency, due to another object being disabled. • Failed, problem with the object.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

17-7

January, 2000

OSS Functions Network Management 5 - Notifications

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Event

Notification Object Identif.

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

Type

January, 2000

Level: Critical, Major, Minor

Notification itself……...

OSS Functions

17-8

Each change of state generates a notification. A notification is a message that will be sent or not to the top of the tree, according to what the operator decides. Not every notification will arrive at the OMC-R, because it could overload the OMC-R CPU. For example, we don’t send a notification to the OMC-R, each time a channel changes state; to know the situation about that there are counters which are regularly reported. Example: average number of busy TCH during the latest 15 ’, the latest hour, the latest day, …. Filter is mandatory; so that not all the notification are sent to the OMC-R. Log files contain all notifications arriving at the OMC-R.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

17-8

January, 2000

OSS Functions Network Management 6 - Handling Notifications

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

LOG

Performance

Alarm Handler

Fault

OMC-R BSC

BSC Radio Site Cell

BSC Radio Site

Radio Site

BSC TCU

TRX

Channel 0 January, 2000

TCB board

BSC TCU TCB board

TRX DRX

12.01/EN

TCU

TUC board

Cell BCF

PE/TRD/GR/0101

Configuration

PA Channel 7

OSS Functions

17-9

Notifications arriving at the OMC-R are distributed to different handling functions. These functions can be part of the OMC-R or on separate platforms. It is possible for notifications to be sent to more than one function: for example, it is normal for all notifications to be sent to a log handler function. These same notifications could be sent to other handling functions as well. A notification from a mal functioning TRX would possibly be sent to: • a log handler, to keep a record and possibly for later analysis, • an alarm handler, to ensure any automate handling procedures were initiated, • a fault handler, to ensure the operator is alerted and fault management procedures can be started.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

17-9

January, 2000

OSS Functions Configuration Management 1 - OMC-R Data Bases

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

OMC-R User

OMC-R

MMI

Q.3 Manager Part

Objects

User view

MIB

Q.3 view

Q.3 Q.3 Agent Part MD-R

Software

BDE

Mediation view

BDA

BSC view

OMN Interface Dynamic Attributes PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

BSS

January, 2000

OSS Functions

17-10

Managed objects are spread on three data bases stored on hard disks: • MIB (Management Information Base) located in the OMC-R (Q.3 level), • BDE (Exploitation Data Base) located in the OMC-R (MD-R level), • BDA (Application Data Base) located in the BSC. MIB: • Is under OMC-R management control and is progressively built as long as objects are created. • Is automatically updated whenever a relevant operation is performed. • Contains BSC related objects and other specific OMC-R objects (in Q.3 format). BDE: • Is under OMC-R management control and is progressively built as long as objects are created. • Is automatically updated whenever a relevant operation is performed. • Contains BSC related objects and other specific OMC-R objects (unknown to the BSCs). BDA Data base building is not automatic and is controlled by user. In order to operate correctly, these two data bases must remain consistent: • Audit transactions check the state of the BDA compared to the BDE. • Users are warned when discrepancies occur.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

17-10

January, 2000

OSS Functions Configuration Management 2 - BSS Software Management

OMC

BCF TRX

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/GR/0101

BTS

BSC

TCU BDE

BDA

OMC software

BSC software

BTS software

TCU software

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OSS Functions

TCB

17-11

The main functionality of this sub-function are: • Management of the software on the OMC-R disks. • Downloading management (MD-R level). • Software version change. The downloading operation consists of sending a set of files correctly identified on the target BSC disk, these files are stored in specific partitions of the disk, according to the type of the concerned entities: • BSC. • BTS: btsSiteManager (BCF) or transceiver Equipment (TRX). • TCU: Transcoder board. Software management is also in charge of MD and OMC software.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

17-11

January, 2000

OSS Functions

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Fault Management

PE/TRD/GR/0101

Failure detection

Alarm reception

Days/ Nights Manufacturer S E V E R I T Y 12.01/EN

Fault recovery Week-ends Day off

Immediate intervention Deferred intervention

Alarms Configuration

Alarms Acknowledg.

No intervention January, 2000

OSS Functions

17-12

Fault Management enables the network operator to maximize the availability of the GSM network, through rapid response to failure conditions by performing fault isolation and fault recovery. Alarms should be acknowledged and may be configured differently in terms of severity, according to alarm criterion configurations. Severity configurations are: • Immediate intervention, • Deferred intervention, • No intervention outside normal working hours. Alarm criterion configurations are: • Manufacturer, • Days/Nights, • Special (week-ends and holidays).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

17-12

January, 2000

OSS Functions

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Performance Management

Counter's value Start of high threshold crossing End of high threshold crossing End of low threshold crossing Start of low threshold crossing

Time

Alarm start

Alarm end

Threshold crossing detection for preventive maintenance PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OSS Functions

17-13

Performance data monitoring allows network usage patterns and trends to be identified, enabling informed network design and engineering decisions to be made to optimize network resource utilization. Performance Management relies on counters collected by the OMC-R and OMC-S (observations), followed by the analysis and subsequent storage of resultant data. Main functions are: • Reception of measurements (counters) transmitted by BSS or NSS. • Report building, to be displayed or printed in a readable format, for the end user. • Reporting the crossing of thresholds counters.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

17-13

January, 2000

OSS Functions Security Management Command Classes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

• Configuration • Fault • Performance • Password • BDE/BDA • FTAM and EFT • Command files and jobs • SMS/CB • Inter-user message

PE/TRD/GR/0101

Users profile

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Commands: • Create • Delete • Set • Display • Modify • Lock

e of Z o n rest In t e

OSS Functions

17-14

The Security Management aims to manage user profiles in order to control the access users to functions provided by the OMCs. Security Management handles authorization and control of access of the users to the OMC functionality. A user profile file is created for each OMC user. User’s profile: • user name and password (and password validity duration), • user work timetable (inactivity time out and scheduled access time), • a set of command classes, • a zone of interest.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

17-14

January, 2000

OSS Functions Why an OMC-R?

To control and monitor the BSS equipment "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

OMC-R

Network’s quality of service Operation cost

BSS BSC BTS

BTS BTS BTS

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OSS Functions

17-15

The OMC-R permits a centralized and remote operation and maintenance of BSS network elements (BSC, TCU and BTS). Remote and centralized operation activity provides the following advantages: • The operation information related to different network elements is managed consistently ensuring effective maintenance and thus a high quality of service to the network's subscribers. • The operation costs can be minimized (for example the OMC-R provides a remote and centralized downloading and activation of software releases, as well as a centralized and remote management of the BSS configuration parameters).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

17-15

January, 2000

OSS Functions OMC-R Functions

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

BSS Management

Internal Functionality

Configuration File Transfer Management Fault

Performance

Man Machine Interface

Common Functions

Server Administration Security

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OSS Functions

17-16

The OMC-R is made up of server and stations. Each station or X-terminal provides the operating staff with a Graphical User Interface. The server centralizes the O&M functions dedicated to the BSS network elements and thus allows to manage the BSS network elements consistently. The following O&M functions are provided: • Configuration management: to manage the resources to be supervised. Examples of resources that can be managed : PCM links, SS7 and traffic channels on A-interface, cells, list of frequencies allocated in each cell, list of adjacent cells of a given cell, frequency hopping laws implemented in the cells, TDMA frames. • Fault management: OMC-R handles event reports received from the network elements and related to anomalies. Alarm messages can be generated with a severity from these reports by using criteria defined by the user. • Performance management: values of counters are collected from the BSS network elements and reports are generated and displayed to the users. Thresholds can be defined and associated with the counters to generate alarms for maintenance purposes. • Security management: to manage user profiles in order to control the access users to functions provided by the OMC-R.

The following internal functions are provided: • File transfer management: downloading and activation of the software releases dedicated to TCU, BSC, BCF and TRX is centralized via the OMC-R. • Common functions: inter-user mail (running within an SMS-C server), management and execution of commands file, calendar for the deferred or periodic execution of a command or a commands file, on-line help. • Server administration: supervision, switch-over and defense of the servers an stations. "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

17-16

January, 2000

OSS Functions Common Functions

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Command Files Management

Reference Time Consulting

Data Archival

Documentation Calendar Management

5

6

7

1

2

8

9 10 11

3

4

? HELP On-Line

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

TX Mail User 1 PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

User Mail

OSS Functions

RX Mail User 2 17-17

This functional area provides the user with the following services: • Command files management that enables the edition recording and the execution of sequences of user commands. • The archiving and restoring of notifications and observations. • A job scheduler that enables requests for deferred and/or periodical execution of a user command or a commands file. • The data & time provides services to read data/time of MD functions and update. • A user mail facility enabling the exchanges of messages between users. • An on-line help. • The display of product documentation stored on CD-ROM.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

17-17

January, 2000

OSS Functions Server Administration

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Shut down Start up

Supervision OMC OMC

OMC Switch-over

Back-up Server

Active Server PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OSS Functions

17-18

The following services are provided to the user: • The powering-up and the shutting down of the OMC servers. • The automatic purging of files deletes old data files in order to avoid overfilling of the disks. • The automatic switch over of the active server. • Defense accomplishes a monitoring and supervision task as well as management of its own tasks. Supervision includes software and machine operations monitoring. Defense management can send event messages to Fault management. It can also restart, reboot or switchover to the backup server if necessary.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

17-18

January, 2000

OSS Functions OMC-S Functions

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

NSS

OMC-S Configuration

MSC/VLR

Fault Security

HLR/AUC

Facilities

Performance

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OSS Functions

17-19

The Operation and Maintenance Center of the NSS part (OMC-S) may be able to achieve different kinds of function. NSS configuration management: • BSCs, Location Areas, Cells. • Terrestrial links, etc.. • Software configuration (downloading, file transfer). • MSRN and handover number management. Fault management: • Detection. • Presentation. • Re-configuration. Performance management: • Traffic control. • Service quality monitoring. Security management: • User profiles. • Session monitoring. OMC-S operation: • System management. • OMN management. • File transfer operations.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

17-19

January, 2000

OSS Functions Hierarchical Arrangement of NMC and OMC X-terminal Level 4

Network Management Center (NMC)

Commercial GSM network Management

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Q3

Q3

Level 3 X-terminal

OMC-S

OMC-R

OMC-R

OMC-R

OMC-R

O & M communication network X.25

Level 2

HLR

Level 1

MSC BSS

PE/TRD/GR/0101

OMC-S

12.01/EN

January, 2000

BSS

OSS Functions

17-20

The Network Managment Center (NMC) has a view of the entire Network GSM and is responsible for the network management as a whole. The NMC resides at the top of the hierarchy. It receives its information from the network equipment via the Operation and Maintenance Centers (OMC) which have previously filtered the suitable data. The NMC can thus focus on issues requiring national coordination regarding interconnects to others networks, such as the PSTN / ISDN. The features of the NMC are as follows: • Single NMC by network. • Provides traffic management for the whole network. • Monitors high-level alarms such as failed or overloads nodes. • Performs responsibilities of an Operation and Maintenance Center when it is not staffed. • Provides network planners with essential data for network performance. The Operation and Maintenance Center (OMC), in turn, is considered as a "regional manager" for the network hardware and software. It supports the day-to-day operations as well as provides a database for long-run network engineering and planning tools. OMC handles a certain area of the GSM network, thus providing regional network management.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

17-20

January, 2000

OSS Functions Check Your Learning

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

1- Cite the four main functions that perform an OMC.

2- What are the network elements operated by an OMC-R?

3- What is the open interface used in the OMC-R?

4- Give an example of hierarchy between OMC-R objects.

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OSS Functions

17-21

1- Cite the four main functions that perform the OMC.

2- What are the network elements operated by an OMC-R?

3- What is the open interface used in the OMC-R?

4- Give an example of hierarchy between OMC-R objects.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

17-21

January, 2000

OSS Functions Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

17-22

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Section 18

PE/TRD/GR/0101

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

18-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-1

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S Objectives

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Provides an introduction to the Operation and maintenance of Radio Subsystem (OMC-R) After completing this lesson you will be able to: • Explain why we need an OMC-R. • Show what elements are controlled by an OMC-R. • Relate the main O&M functions devoted to the BSS. • Explain the OMC-R architecture and locate the Q.3 interface. • Show the various solution for the implementation of the OMC-R network. • Show the hierarchy of the OMC-R objects.

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

18-2

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-2

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

OMC-R

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

18-3

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-3

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S OMC-R Architecture Configurations X.25 Network BSC-MD Interface

BSS BSS

ROT

Monitoring link

Sun

SPARCstorage Array

Sun SSA

TML/ROT

ROT

Server Sun Enterprise 4000

Monitor

PSTN

BSS BSS

BSS "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

TML/ROT

BSS

Monitor Terminals Server ETHERNET 1

Sun

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

SPARCstorage Array

LAN Ethernet

I O AUI

SERIAL

Router

AUI

SERIAL

SERIAL

SERIAL

SERIAL

SERIAL

CONSOLE AUX I O

CONSOLE AUX I O

AUI

X Terminal

Local WorkStations (SUN Sparc 5)

Router SERIAL

SERIAL

Router

X.25 Network

I O AUI

CONSOLE AUX

I O

CONSOLE AUX

AUI

CD Rom Unit

Remote LAN Ethernet

SERIAL

Remote LAN Ethernet

SERIAL

CONSOLE AUX

CD ROM Unit

Remote WorkStations (SUN Sparc 5) PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

18-4

The central OMC-R site is composed of the OMC-R servers, the WorkStations (WS), the Terminal Server and the printers. All these platforms are interconnected via an Ethernet LAN. • The OMC-R server (duplicated for redundancy purposes) centralizes the O&M function as well as the database. It is connected to the BSC via X.25 links. An automatic switchover is undertaken between the servers when needed. • The WorkStations (up to 16) supporting a Graphical User Interface called Man Machine Interface (MMI). • X terminals: physically connected to the LAN and communicates with one WS. • One or many printers can be shared between the WSs and X terminals. • The Terminal Server concentrates the PSTN connections from BSS Local Maintenance Terminals used in the field in ROT mode (Remote OMC-R Terminal) during maintenance interventions. • At least one local OMC-R WorkStation is to be provisioned in order to support the connections from the ROTs used in the field and to support X terminals. • Routers that support X.25 links to OMC-R remote sites if such sites exist in the OMC-R configuration. A remote OMC-R site is composed of WSs and printers only, and is connected to the OMCR server of the central site via an X.25 link. Therefore, routers are to be used in the remote OMC-R site as well as in the central OMC-R site in order to concentrate the connections from a remote site to the central site.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-4

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S Hardware Architecture

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

New Storage Unit (From V12 only)

Enterprise 4500 (Agent + Manager)

StorEDGE A5000 Storage Unit

Active

Sun

Enterprise 4500 (Agent + Manager)

StorEDGE A5000

Passive

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

18-5

Two types of server are available, according to the network configuration: • SPARCserver 1000 with 16.8 Go disk (less than 800 cells), • Enterprise 4000 (less than 1600 cells). The high capacity OMC product is achieved with the Enterprise 4000 platform and its associated storage unit SPARCstorage Array. This high capacity OMC-R will be able to manage a great number of cells allowing its use for: • micro-cell networks, • networks with numerous but small sites. From V12, for the new OMC-R configurations, the new StorEdge A5000 storage unit is suggested to take the place of the two SSA112 disks. Each server is a SUN Enterprise 4xxx. The nominal V11 configuration is based on the E4500 device.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-5

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S Remote Operation Terminal Application OMC-R Site

ROT Task

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

OMC-R Server

Terminals Server

ETHERNET 1

2

Modem

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Modem

Modem

2 links X.25 48 kbit/s

PSTN

X25

BSC Site

19.2 kbit/s

BTS Site

BTS S8000

TML/ROT

12.01/EN

ROT

BSC

Modem

BTS S4000/ S2000E

BTS S2000 H&L

TML/ROT

ROT

Modem

TML/ROT

ROT

PE/TRD/GR/0101

TML/ROT

ROT

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

18-6

ROT Application is a software which runs beside Local Maintenance function implemented in the Local Maintenance Terminal (TML) or a standalone PC/DOS located in a remote site (TCU, BSC or BTS). It is connected to an OMC-R work-stations either through PSTN links via modems or a dedicated LAPD connection through the BSC. In case of PSTN connection the ROT function requires standard Hayes command protocol and a suitable modem. The ROT can be connected directly to these BTS: S2000E/S4000 (with AMNU+DCU4 only), and S8000. Not all the functionality offered through WS are available (Alarm criterion management, UNIX access, log consultation, ...) with ROT access. For security purposes, all the Security Management commands are not available. After connection with the terminal server, a UNIX session is automatically established with an OMCR /WS which dynamically creates the ROT task on this WS. This feature is available since the relevant BTS has been configured by the BSC. ROT application capabilities From the ROT menus and sub-menus the operator can: • Access the appropriate object (or object characteristic). • Perform the needed action on this object. Thus he can perform the following functions: • BSS configuration management and OMN access management. • Security management, (limited to commands for password change and machine list). • Performance management. • Fault management. • OMC-R administration. • File transfer. • Communication management. "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-6

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S Network Elements Operated by OMC-R Normal capacity = 1600 cells, 6400 DRXs and 20 BSCs

OMC-R

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

High capacity = 2400 cells, 9600 DRXs and 30 BSCs 20 (30) BSCs TCU

BSC

BTS

138 BTS

1600 (2400) cells 6400 (9600) TRXs PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

18-7

The OMC-R manages the BSCs, TCUs and BTSs. TCUs and BTSs communicate with the OMC-R via their respective BSC. The OMC-R interfaces with the BSC via X.25 links. OMC-R operating capacity depends on the number of objects it manages but not on the traffic it monitors: • Maximum number of BSC = 20 (30). • Maximum number of cells = 1600 (2400). • Maximum number of TRX = 6400 (9600). The physical OMC-R equipment limitations and software requirements are: • Two servers to enable data redundancy. • Sixteen WS with no more than thirteen Remote WS. • One router per group of three Remote WS. • No more than 10 ROT, connected at the same time to OMC-R.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-7

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S Implementation of the OMC-R Network The Three Solutions

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

WS

WS

WS

WS

WS

0 1

2

WS

WS

1

3

2

WS

0

3

2

3

X.25 Switch V.35-PCM conversion

X.25 Switch

X.25 network PSPDN

1

V.35

48 kbit/s

48 kbit/s Automatic or Manual

WS

OMC-R Server

OMC-R Server

OMC-R Server 0

3

2

1

PCM

Leased Lines 19.2 kbits

NSS BSC 19.2 kbit/s

BSC

PE/TRD/GR/0101

BSC

12.01/EN

A-interface

BSC

January, 2000

BSC

BSC

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

BSC 18-8

The OMC-R/BSC link can be based on various communication supports: • X.25 PSPDN, • X.25 switches and dedicated lines, • or the use of PCM timeslots of the A-interface. The use of the A-interface is interesting: • if there is no reliable X.25 network in a given country, • if the operator wants to be independent from a third party carrier, • if he wishes to reduce the leased line cost, • if he wishes to establish OMC-R and OMC-S units in the same location. The main advantage of that solution is that the OMC-R/BSC connections are supported by PCM links of the managed GSM network itself.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-8

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S New Man-Machine Interface V11 versus V9-V10 V11

New objects overall view

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

V9-V10

Allows to display more objects in the network views

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

18-9

Starting from the V11 release, a new Man-Machine Interface takes the place of the V9-V10 one. The major MMI changes are introduced to increase operator efficiency through: • separation of the physical and the logical view, • clearer network logical view, • better separation between alarms and object status, • mapping of the physical view of the network on a geographical map, • new graphical views of real time counters.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-9

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S New MMI: Logical View

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

TCU Level

Full Network

BSC Level

Site Level

A-Interface

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

18-10

Each type of display of the logical mode shows different objects: • the first logical view (Full Network) shows all the Network Elements, from the MSC down to the sites, • the BSC level includes the BSS objects (Signaling Point, Signaling Link) for one BSC, • the Site level describes the BTSs belonging to one site as well as the TDMA frames, • the TCU level displays the LAPD Link and the TCBs belonging to one TCU; this level is the only way to access the A-Interface level, • the A-Interface level mainly shows the XTPs used for MSC-BSC exchanges.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-10

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S New MMI: Topological View

Sub Network

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Full Network

PE/TRD/GR/0101

BSS

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

18-11

All the topological views show the geographical backgrounds of the network: • in the Full Network view, all the sub networks are shown, • in the Sub Network view, all the BSSs of the different sub networks are displayed, • in the BSS view, all pieces of equipment belonging to one single BSS are shown on the map. Note There is always a relationship between the logical / physical display level and, on the other side, the topological level.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-11

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S Alarm Window

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Customizable columns organization

Sort & filter display Alarm list management Complete alarm description Access to notifications windows On-line help

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

18-12

The alarm monitor has the following features: • The alarms in the list are sorted according to the column order, which may be modified by the user. • The user may select the type of columns (i.e. of information) he wants to be displayed in the minimized alarm summary. • More than 30 criteria are available to filter the alarm list. A current alarm carries the following information: • A serial record number for the alarm message identification. • A serial record number of the notification that triggered the alarm and prompted the alarm message. • The date and time on which the notification was sent. • The type of spontaneous event. • The fault number which identifies its type and therefore its cause. • The priority of alarm: immediate (IM), deferred (ID), no action (SI). • The alarm title. • The identity and the location of the object and/or equipment from where the alarm is originated. • The alarm acknowledge state, if the alarm is acknowledged and the identity of the user or the OMC-R. • If the alarm is cleared, the date and time the original notification was sent and the identity of the user. • The notification is also included apart from the additional information.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-12

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

BSS on Site Maintenance with TML

PE/TRD/GR/0101

Terminal Maintenance Local

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

18-13

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-13

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S BTS on Site Maintenance with TML 1 - TIB (Testing the BCF)

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

TIB VXX_YYZZ TIB STANDALONE MODE MENU

+5 V

TEST +5 V RDY ON REQ WD L0 L1 RESET

L O C T E R M

A: Starting Installation Tests B: Board Status C: Prom Marking D: Shelf Number E: ALAT Alarms F: ALAT Output G: DCC External Test H: TX Configuration I: FHBUS Configuration J: Switching Matrix Configuration K: Reset Board L: DTI Board Tests -> External PCM M: Switching Matrix (Connection) N: Board Alarms O: CCT test P: Masthead test Q: TX state R: End of TIB Application

CSW2

REF.CLK 0 1 2 3 L

CSW1 T E S T

J 6 4

MAINT. NORM MAINT

PC + HDLC board

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

18-14

Maintenance operations are performed on-site via a special terminal called TML (Local Maintenance Terminal). On-site maintenance provides a set of functions that give the operator information on the state of BSS elements that is not always available at the OMC-R level. This terminal is a PC-like computer including one standard Ethernet board and TCP/IP protocol, running TML tools (under Windows 95 environment). A special cable: cross Ethernet (cross RJ45-RJ45) connected to the Ethernet connector allows dialog with the BCF or a DRX module. TIB is the application part of the TIL (Terminal for Local Intervention) dedicated to the testing and checking of the BCF. TIB operates with BCF through O&M Bus.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-14

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S BTS on Site Maintenance with TML 2 - TIF (Testing One Particular TRX)

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

FP 1 G

ACT

ACT

ACT1 ACT2 TEMP

FP 1.5 G

+5V

ACT

ACT

BIST DCU4

Asw LI TX

ALA TLC SPU Ahw CL RX

+5V

VXX_YYZZ TIF STANDALONE MODE MENU

DCU DCU MNU DCU DCU

A: Starting Installation Tests B: Board Status and BISTS C: Prom Marking D: SDA Test E: RX Test F: End of TIF Application

RESET

J4 T E S T

RESET

AMNU DCU4 INTERCARD

J5

V.11 HDLC 64 kbit/s PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

INTERCARD

J5

TML/TIL (PC 486 + PCMC525 board) January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

18-15

TIF is the application part for the TIL (terminal for local Intervention) dedicated to the testing and checking of one particular TRX. It may run in Standalone mode or in Connected mode. The TML/TIL terminal must be connected to the TEST connector of the MNU or the AMNU board.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-15

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S BTS on Site Maintenance with TML 3 - S8000 BTSs

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

BIST +5 V RDY ON O&M ABIS WDG MRQ SERV

TIL S8000 DRX TIL Stand-alone mode

RESET

CSWM T E S T 0 1 2 LC

Private PCM bus

TIL Connected mode

TX RX LNK COL

Gateway Internal PCM bus

TIL BCF

E T H

J 6 4

10 Mbit/s Ethernet link

TML/TIL

CKI GND CKO GND

PC 486 + Ethernet board /PCMCIA

CBCF

BCF PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

18-16

The TIL S8000 software of the TML is designed to: • validate the BTS in factory, • install BTS site, • diagnose hardware problem, • check equipment substitution or extension. On the screen, a color button resumes the BIST status of each device. For each device (or main function), a popup menu proposes a list of tests; each performable in its specific window. This tool can be used with BTS, in On-line or in Standalone mode.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-16

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S BTS on Site Maintenance with TML 4 - S2000H/L TIL COAM /Window

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

DRX

SBCF

S2000 IN SERVICE

Ethernet

TML (PC/Windows 95 + Ethernet board) PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

18-17

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-17

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S BSC on Site Maintenance with TML

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

BIST RUN SCSI

R U N

B I S T

J5

CPU 66SE

Option Partition contents Software markers Board slot numbers Acces to MB II boards PROM markers Logical disk check Physical disk check Disk initialisation

NORMAL

MODE MAINTENANCE

J3

J4

CPU 120

J3

COM1

J2 J2

J1

PE/TRD/GR/0101

J1

12.01/EN

Serial port asynchronous link 19.2 kbit/s January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

18-18

TML/BSC is an “on site” BSC maintenance tool which is connected to CPU – OMU through an asynchronous serial link at a rate of 19.2 kbit/s. Different tests are available on a given chain depending the selected mode: • Normal mode is used when the BSC runs. • Maintenance mode is used to isolate the chain from the system. • Logical disk, physical disk check and disk initialization are not authorized in normal mode.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-18

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S TCU on Site Maintenance with TML

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Audit BIST +5V RDY R1 R2 R3 RL EXT

PC 486

RESET

TUC T E S T

Serial port COM1: asynchronous link

J 6 4

TML/TCU test tree structure TUC Board PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Complete automatic Clock TDTI boards number TCB boards number Markers All boards TUC TDTI TCB BIST All boards TUC TDTI TCB Alarms Straps configuration TEI configuration TDTI boards configuration Continuity test All boards TDTI TCB Internal PCM states External PCM states All boards TDTI

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

18-19

TML/TCU is the TCU maintenance tool which runs on the local tool TML. It is connected to the TCU board through an asynchronous serial link at a rate of kbit/s.

9.6

All tests are performed in a standalone mode.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-19

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

OMC-S

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

18-20

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-20

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

OMC-S

Q3

FM agent PM agent

FM agent PM agent

NES

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

18-21

The OMC-S are associated with Fault Management and Performance Management agents running on the SDM/FT. These agents interact with the network element’s internal operations and maintenance functions, receiving and storing fault and performance data which are transferred to the OMC-S or external NMC/OSS when required. The Open Q3 interface requires interoperability testing and is between the SDM/FT and external OSS for Fault Management application. Open Q3 interface for Performance Management application will be available in GEM09 release. This separation of management and agent functionality, allows the O&M processing to be efficiently deployed by minimizing the amount of information required to be transferred to the management system. The OMC-S applications may be run on both PCs. The OMC-S Man Machine Interface provides the user access to: • Configuration management. • Fault management. • Performance management

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-21

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S SDM-FT Platform 1 - Architecture SuperNode Data Manager- Fault Tolerant Maintenance and Power Bus A

- 48 V dc A Feed "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

I/O Domain 0

Computing Core

Disk Subsystem

Comm & I/O

CPU 0 Dual Fault Tolerant I/O Buses

CPU 1

Disk Subsystem

Comm & I/O

I/O Domain 1

- 48 V dc B Feed

Maintenance and Power Bus B PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

18-22

The SDM/FT (SuperNode Data Manager/Fault Tolerant) platform, introduced in GEM08 release, is based on Motorola FX open system Series and is housed into a standard DMSMC or DMS-HLR cabinet (C28). This platform is fully integrated into the DMS power (-48 V) and alarm subsystems: • up to 512 M RAM and 22 GB Disks on each I/O domain, • high speed DS-512 optical connections to CM cabinet. This platform collects and processes data to/from the managed MSC and HLR. The SDM/FT is necessary to support all OAMP applications, apart from Billing Management which is supported by GSM Billing Mediation Device (GBMD): • FM and PM agents, • provisioning server, • service quality.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-22

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S SDM-FT Platform 2 - Cabinet

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

MSP

Shelf 2 I/O Expansion Chassis (Optional) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213141516

Shelf 1 Main Chassis 1 2 3 4 56

78

10 9

11 1213 141516

Cooling Unit

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

18-23

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-23

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S SDM-FT Platform 3 - Software Components

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

DMS

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

18-24

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-24

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S OMC-S Element Manager Main Window Menu Bar Tool Bar

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Fault Management Area

Configuration & Performance Area

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

18-25

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-25

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Network Configuration Window

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

18-26

OMC-S Configuration Management covers: • Displaying Configuration Management Window in List or Graphic mode. • Displaying Information on Elements. • Displaying Log files.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-26

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Fault Management

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

18-27

Fault Management enables the network operator to maximize the availability of the GSM network, through rapid response to failure conditions by performing fault isolation and fault recovery. The OMC-S FM provides control of all fault management alarm information for the monitored Network Elements (NE) including: • Displaying of received alarms where each alarm contains the name, date, event that occurred, and the affected components. The alarms displayed can be filtered, depending on user-defined criteria. • Alarms alert, enabling alarm changes on each NE to be received by the current alarm list. New alarms are added to the list. If the change signifies that a previous alarm has been cleared for, it is removed from the list. • Advanced fault filtering, allowing the operator to define the alarm criteria and create any alerting actions. The alerting actions can be programmed by the operator to trigger external alarm systems or more sophisticated procedures such as paging or e-mailing the support staff.

The Fault Management Agent monitors the state of the resources in its associated Network Element (NE), providing two main functions: • Resource Discovery allows the agent to retrieve and maintain information about the NE resources, e.g. signaling links, traffic circuits within the associated NE. • Event Notification controls the updating of the NE resources from fault logs received for the NEs. The logs are converted into standardized TMN operations, and the relevant notification message indicates the event is transmitted to the OMC-S and/or NMC via Open Q.3 Interface.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-27

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Performance Management

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

18-28

Performance data monitoring allows network usage patterns and trends to be identified, enabling informed network design and engineering decisions to be made to optimize network resource utilization. The OMC-S PM contains two main components: • Data Selection allows the user to control performance data retrieval. The user can define studies by selecting measurements to be retrieved, as well as using pre-defined measurements. The user can also define the start and stop time when measurement data is to be retrieved along with the retrieval frequency. • Data Display allows the user to view the performance data either as a graph, which can have several measurements superimposed, or in raw data format. As well as displaying current data, the user can access archived data for historical performance analysis. The user can even export the raw data selected, for use with external processing packages.

The Performance Management Agent running on SDM/FT supports the collection, processing and delivery of operational measurement data for its associated network element to the OMC-S by providing the following capabilities: • Reception of the Operational Measurements (OM)s from the Network Element at the end of each transfer period (every 15, 30, 60 minutes, daily, weekly or monthly). • Filtering and correlation of the Operational Measurements. • Accumulation of OMs allowing the user to create new OMs by summing or processing existing ones, e.g. generating a summary measurement. • Storage of raw and processed OMs which can be used directly by the manager or exported for use by other applications. • Notification to the management layer of the arrival of new OMs data.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-28

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S Check Your Learning

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

1- What are the network elements operated by an OMC-R?

2- What is the maximum number of WorkStations possible for an OMC-R?

3- What are the maximum numbers of BSC, BTS, cells, and TRXs handled by an OMC-R?

4- What are the three solutions for the implementation of the OMC network?

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S

18-29

1- What are the network elements operated by an OMC-R?

6- What is the maximum number of WorkStations possible for an OMC-R?

5- What are the maximum numbers of BSC, BTS, cells, and TRXs handled by an OMC-R?

8- What are the three solution for the implementation of the OMC network?

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-29

January, 2000

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

18-30

January, 2000

PicoNode Family

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Section 19

PicoNode Family

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

PicoNode Family

19-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

19-1

January, 2000

PicoNode Family PicoNode: A Very Small GSM System

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

What For?

PicoNode One Product Two Applications

➠Communities ➠ ➠ ➠ ➠

➠Corporate

Rural communities Large cells Highways, rural Low cost sites for low traffic

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

➠ Small cells ➠ In-building, campus ➠ Distributed Wireless Access

PicoNode Family

19-2

Two primary applications are addressed with PicoNode. Community Application With local switching, PicoNode offers a cost effective solution for small and rural communities. With its small size, PicoNode can be deployed almost anywhere. Corporate Application Installed behind a wired PBX, PicoNode becomes a wireless PBX, working in conjunction with the wired PBX.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

19-2

January, 2000

PicoNode Family Rural and Community

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Small Remote Rural Community

PMSC

PBSC

PBTS

PBTS

•• Remote Remote Switching Switching Reduced Reduced Backhaul Backhaul •• Scaleable Solution Scaleable Solution Up Up to to 3000 3000 Subscribers Subscribers Low Low Cost Cost Entry Entry System System Community Community Services Services Support Support of of Fixed Fixed Mobile Mobile Competitive Competitive Features Features

PSTN

PLMN

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

PBTS

PicoNode Family

19-3

As telecommunications technology edges its way into smaller communities, operators are often forced to provide wired service by using expensive copper local loops over long distances. These long drops not only degrade the quality of service, they are expensive. “Local” calls in these cases are actually backhauled over some distance to the switch and then back to the same community. The PicoNode offers a remote switching alternative to this expensive technique of providing local telecommunications services. The PicoNode has been designed to scale from an everything-in-one-box solution to a multiple BSC/BTS network. The PicoNode has the capability to deliver an MSC, BSC, and BTS all in one box that is slightly larger than a computer tower. However, if there is a different requirement, the PicoNode can be expanded into individual components: one box will be used for each function (i.e. one for MSC, one for BSC, and a given number for BTS as required for coverage).

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

19-3

January, 2000

PicoNode Family Corporate/In-building: CorporateNET™ Office Zone

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

•• In-Building In-Building Coverage Coverage ✓ ✓ Wall-Mountable Wall-Mountable BTS BTS ✓ ✓ Distributed Distributed Antenna Antenna option option ✓ ✓ Leaky Leaky Feeder Feeder option option

OFFICE

PBX

•• PBX PBX Interworking Interworking

SEND

C

END

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Corporate NET

✓ ✓ Dial Dial Plan Plan Support Support –– Abbreviated Abbreviated Dialing Dialing

✓ ✓ PSTN PSTN Interworking Interworking ✓ PRI/QSIG ✓ PRI/QSIG Trunks Trunks ✓ ✓ PBX PBX Features Features

Operator Network

–– Dual Dual Ringing Ringing

DMS MSC

–– Single Single VMS VMS

Network

•• Single Single Cabinet Cabinet Solution Solution ✓ ✓ Combined Combined MSC,BSC,BTS MSC,BSC,BTS ✓ ✓ Proconfigured Proconfigured Installation Installation PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Mobile Network

PicoNode Family

SEND

C

END

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

19-4

Although personal subscribers have begun to outnumber corporate subscribers in terms of sheer numbers, the corporate subscriber is valued the most because they generate more revenue per subscriber for the operator. For this reason they are highly prized. Operators must have solutions that not only attract new corporate users but also help in retaining existing ones. One method for operators to make their GSM offering more appealing to corporate subscribers is to provide better coverage within the user’s office building. However, improved coverage is not the entire solution. Corporate subscribers use their handsets in-building because they are not near their PBX telephone. If some PBX services could be extended to the GSM handset while the corporate user was in-building, the service offering would become much more valuable. Nortel’s PicoNode for the corporate market is focused on providing such an in-building “private” GSM network for corporations interested in a mobility solution that is tied to their PBX. Delivering a corporate, high tier solution will be best suited for corporations and campus environments with 100 or more GSM subscribers.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

19-4

January, 2000

PicoNode Family PicoNode Architecture Large Corporation

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Small Company

Growth & Evolution MSC BSC PBX

PBX

Combo MSC/BSC/BTS

BTS PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

BTS

PicoNode Family

BTS 19-5

Nortel’s PicoNode family is composed of four devices: • the PMSC (PicoNode Mobile Switching Center), • the PBSC (PicoNode Base Station Controller), • the BTS (PicoNode Base Transceiver Subsystem), • the POMC (PicoNode Operations and Maintenance Center). The MSC, BSC and the BTS can be either: • incorporated in a single cabinet not much larger than a standard PC tower or • housed in their own separate cabinets The OMC is a Sun Sparc based Operations and Maintenance Center that offers a graphical user interface combined with a topographical representation of the network. The PicoNode product also comprises of the HLR (Home Location Register) which is a centralized database used to manage subscribers and services. The HLR is co-resident with the MSC. Other components that can be networked with the PicoNode include a Billing System, a Prepaid system and a Voice Mail System.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

19-5

January, 2000

PicoNode Family CommunityNet PicoNode

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

ISDN or R2

PSTN

A-Interface

POMC-R-S

PMSC HLR/ VLR

PLMN/ Public MSC PBSC Public Public Private

Hybrid Hybrid

PBTS PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

PicoNode Family

19-6

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

19-6

January, 2000

28

PicoNode Family CommunityNet

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PBX Inter-Operability

PicoNode Network

HLR/ VLR

ISDN or R2

PBX

PSTN

A-Interface

PLMN

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

HLR/ VLR

PicoNode Family

19-7

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

19-7

January, 2000

38

PicoNode Family PicoNode™ BTS ✓ ✓Output Output Power Power after after Combining Combining == 22 Watts Watts ✓ ✓External External Amplifier Amplifier for for Greater Greater Power Power (on (on "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

this this drawing): drawing): 4, 4, 8, 8, 16 16 Watts Watts

✓ ✓Receive Receive Sensitivity Sensitivity == -104 -104 or or -110 -110 dBm dBm ✓ ✓Receive Receive Diversity Diversity available available ✓ ✓1-2 1-2 TRXs TRXs per per BTS BTS (Omni (Omni configuration) configuration) ✓ ✓Power Power Consumption Consumption 150 150 W W ✓ ✓Weight Weight 20 20 kg kg ✓ ✓Temperature Temperature range range == 00 °° to to 45 45 °C °C Slot: 1 - MPM w/o Disk Drive 2 - E1-Abis 3-8 - TRX 9 - RF Distribution

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

PicoNode Family

19-8

The PBTS 3x08 can be used to provide cost-effective communication solution in rural communities, where in conjunction with a PBSC and a PMSC/PCSN a local switching alternative can be more economical than stretching a PLMN to provide coverage. Upto 2 TRXs can be installed per PBTS 3x08 allowing upto 15 simultaneous wireless connections. Specifically designed and configured for the rural market the PBTS 3x08 has the following attributes: • Receiver Sensitivity -110 dBm +- 1dB • All GSM Frequencies: 900/1800/1900 MHz available. • Redundant Power Supplies: Available • Connection to BSC: The drop and insert capability is used to reduce the number of E1/T1s to connect to the BSC. This is implemented through Chain connection. Upto 4 PBTS from PBSC E1-Abis card can be connected. Trunk Interface is G.703 compliant. • Interface: Air interface is the standard GSM air interface. • Capacity: - 8 channels per TRX, maximum 2 TRXs per cell, - 7-15 voice channels, - 2.9- 8.2 Erlangs at PO2 GOS, - Equivalent to 117 - 328 subscribers at 25 mE per sub.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

19-8

January, 2000

PicoNode Family PicoNode™ BSC

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

1

1 2

3 4

5

2

3

6

4

7 8

9

5

6

7

8

9

RS T SC N

PWR

PWR

ON

PWR

ON

L INE FL T

FL T

ON L INE

FL T

FL T

RS -2 3 2

CDN

E1 -1 EN ET

EN ET

PWR

ON L INE

RS -2 3 2 RX

E1 -1 -

TX

E1 -2 EXT

RX

RX

CPU/Power CPU/Power Supply Supply Redundant Redundant (Opt.) (Opt.) 2-14 E1 per 2-14 E1 per BSC BSC 1-15 1-15 BTSs BTSs per per BSC BSC 1-30 1-30 TRXs TRXs per per BSC BSC GSM Full Rate GSM Full Rate Weight Weight 20 20 kg kg Power Power Consumption Consumption 150 150 W W

TX

E1 -2 -

TX

RX

TX

XREF

TES T

RF DIS T

1 3 MHz

1

OFF 0

ON

1

ON

OFF 0

PE/TRD/GR/0101

PBSC Slot1 Processor Slot2-9 E1

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Services Services •• ETSI ETSI GSM GSM Phase Phase 22 •• Power Power Management Management •• Data Data & & Fax Fax Services Services (no (no IWF) IWF) •• SMS SMS Service Service •• GSM GSM Phase Phase 1, 1, 2, 2, 2+ 2+ mobiles mobiles

PicoNode Family

19-9

The PicoNode BSC is deployed in a similar compact package as the PicoNode MSC and serves as the connection from the MSC to the BTS(s). The BSC is responsible for allocating and releasing radio channels to the mobile stations by way of the BTSs. In addition to managing channels on a radio interface, it is also responsible for managing mobile station handovers to other radio channels. The BSC is comprised of a processor, and two to eight dual port E1 modules. It is directly connected to the MSC through the A interface and to the BTS through the Abis interface. An important feature of the BSC structure is the transcoder unit or TCU. The TCU is responsible for the GSM specific speech encoding and decoding as well as rate adaptation in the case of data. In the PicoNode system, the TCU is co-located with the BSC. The PicoNode BSC can be configured with redundant power. The PBSC supports inter-connection with a mixture of 900 and 1800 MHz PBTS.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

19-9

January, 2000

PicoNode Family

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PicoNode™ MSC

1

1 2

2

3 4

3

5

6

4

7 8 5

6

9

7

8

9

RS T SC N

PWR ON

PWR

PWR

ON

ON

ON

L INE

L INE

FL T

FL T

L INE FL T

FL T

RS -2 3 2

CDN EN ET

EN ET

E1 -1 -

RX

PWR

RS -2 3 2 E1 -1 -

TX

E1 -2 EXT

RX

200 200 Non-Blocking Non-Blocking Voice Voice Connections Connections 14 E-1 14 E-1 GSM900/GSM1800 GSM900/GSM1800 Redundant Redundant Power Power Supplies Supplies (Opt.) (Opt.) 100 100 Erlangs Erlangs // 8000 8000 BHCA BHCA Integrated Integrated HLR/VLR HLR/VLR Inter/Intra BSC Inter/Intra BSC Handover Handover

RX

Services Services •• Call Call Establishment Establishment & & Switching Switching •• Channel Channel Allocation Allocation •• Channel Channel Switching Switching •• Mobility Mobility Management Management •• Voice Voice or or Data Data Network Network Switching Switching •• HLR/VLR HLR/VLR Maintenance Maintenance •• User User Administration Administration and and Authentication Authentication •• Wireless Wireless PBX PBX Adjunct Adjunct •• no no Echo Echo Canceler Canceler

TX

E1 -2 -

TX

RX

TX

XREF

TES T

RF DIS T

1 3 MHz

OFF 0

ON 1

OFF 0

ON 1

PE/TRD/GR/0101

PMSC Slot1 - Processor Slot2-9 - E1

12.01/EN

January, 2000

PicoNode Family

19-10

The PicoNode MSC serves as a standard GSM Mobile Switching Center (MSC). The PicoNode MSC is capable of handling call establishment and switching, mobility management, and channel allocation. The PicoNode MSC is deployed in a compact package (55 x 23 x 41 cm) that can easily be maneuvered into remote areas. The benefit of the compact size and light weight (20 kg) is that delivery to remote areas is effortless as compared to a full size switching platform. The PicoNode MSC is expandable to accommodate multiple E1 ports and 160 simultaneous full-rate voice connections (non-blocking) to meet the various capacity requirements. The PicoNode MSC is always configured with redundant power.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

19-10

January, 2000

PicoNode Family PicoNode™ OMC

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Sun Sun Workstation Workstation Platform Platform TMN TMN Architecture Architecture Multiple Multiple Windows Windows Supported Supported Context Sensitive Context Sensitive Help Help 88 Clients Clients per per Server Server High High Level Level of of Security Security 11 OMC OMC per per MSC MSC

Services Services •• Region-wide Region-wide configuration configuration database database •• Remote Remote Download Download of of Software Software •• Audit Audit Functions Functions •• Regional Regional Map Map of of Network Network Elements Elements •• Real Real Time Time Monitoring Monitoring •• Audio Audio and and Visual Visual Indications Indications of of Alarms Alarms •• Measures Measures Network Network Performance Performance (to (to export) export) •• Imports Imports from from Existing Existing Cell Cell Planning Planning Tools Tools •• Export Export Data Data & & Statistics Statistics •• CDR CDR (to (to aa billing billing server) server)

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

PicoNode Family

19-11

PicoNode OMC provides the operations and management center functions for the PicoNode. It has a client-server architecture. In this architecture, the radio network is partitioned into multiple management regions with each region containing one or more MSCs, as well as all of the PicoNode hardware platforms managed by the MSCs. A PicoNode OMC server is then responsible for the management of all the BSCs and BTSs contained in this region. PicoNode OMC provides a number of management functions for the PicoNode hardware which include: • Communication interface to the PicoNode products • Security and Access control • Event and Alarm management • Network configuration management • Software upgrade management. Interface: E1 to the MSC running TCP/IP. Hardware: Sun Sparc with 128 MB memory and 4G Hard Disk.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

19-11

January, 2000

PicoNode Family PicoNode™ Combo

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

1

2

3 4

5

6

7 8

RS T

RS T

SC N

SC N

PWR

PWR

PWR

PWR

PWR

ON LINE

ON LINE

ON LINE

ON LINE

ON

ON

LINE

LINE

FLT

FLT

FLT

FLT

FLT

FLT

TX

9

1

TX -1-

PWR TX1 6.7 RX 3

2,3 RX 2

4,5 RX 1 CD N

CD N

ENET

ENET

RS -232 E1-1-

RS -232 RX

E1-1-

RX

6,7 -3-

TX

TX TX3

E1-2EXT

EXT

RX

E1-2-

TX XR EF

RX

2,3 RX

RX

TX

-2-

TX2

XR EF 4,5 CLK

TEST

2W Slot 1- Processor 2- Processor 3- E1 4- E1 5-6- TRX 7-8- TRX 9- RF Distribution

2

RS T

3

4

5

9

TX PA TH

SC N

PWR

PWR

PWR

ON LINE

ON LINE

ON LINE

ON LINE

FLT

FLT

FLT

FLT

PWR

TX-1

13 MHZ

ON LINE FLT

PA TH-1

CDN

CDN

EN ET

EN ET

PA TH-2

RS -2 32

RS -2 32 E1 -1-

RX

E1 -1-

RX

EX T

RX

AN T-1

TX

TX

E1 -2EX T

E1 -2-

RX

RX

AN T-2 RX -2

TX XR EF

TX

XR EF

8W Slot 1- Processor 2- Processor 3- E1 4- E1 5-6- TRX 7-9- RF Distribution

TX-2

TES T

RF DIST

RF DIST

13 MHz

1

0

OFF

ON

0

1

OFF

ON

ON 1

OFF 0

OFF 0

ON 1

January, 2000

8

RX -1

Corporate/In-Building 12.01/EN

7

TX

RS T

SC N

PWR

13M Hz

PE/TRD/GR/0101

6

Rural/Community PicoNode Family

19-12

The PicoNode PCSN is a ‘combo’ switch meaning it has the MSC, BSC and BTS functionality all included in one single box of the size not much bigger than a PC tower. It is available in two configurations depending on the BTS output power. These modules comprise all the basic components of the system for either the PMSC, PCSN, PBSC, or PBTS.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

19-12

January, 2000

PicoNode Family

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PicoNode™ Scalable GSM Solutions Configuration Supports (max)

Capacity

NSS NSS

22 BSCs BSCs

2000 2000 Subs Subs @ @ 0.05E 0.05E (VLR) (VLR) 4000 4000 Subs Subs (HLR) (HLR)

BSC BSC

15 15 BTSs BTSs 30 30 TRXs TRXs

BTS BTS

33 TRXs TRXs

180 180 Subs Subs @ @ 0.05E 0.05E

22 TRXs TRXs

120 120 Subs Subs @ @ 0.05E 0.05E (VLR) (VLR) 2000 2000 Subs Subs (HLR) (HLR)

Combined Combined Node Node MSC/HLR/VLR MSC/HLR/VLR BSC/BTS BSC/BTS

add-on 44 add-on BTSs BTSs max max number number of of TRXs TRXs for for the the combo: combo: 88 PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

PicoNode Family

19-13

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

19-13

January, 2000

PicoNode Family Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

19-14

January, 2000

Solutions of Exercises

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Section 20

Solutions of Exercises

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Solutions of Exercises

20-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

20-1

January, 2000

Solutions of Exercises Frequency Reuse Pattern Solution: Provisioning the Frequency Band Spectrum

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

A1

C1

A1

B1

C2

A3

C3

A2

B3

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

B2

A3

A4

C4

January, 2000

B1

C1

C3

A2

C2

B2

B3

B4

Solutions of Exercises

20-2

Due to assumptions ==> 1 MHz carries 5 radio frequencies (radio channels), each radio frequency carries 8 channels ==> 40 channels/MHz. Number of available channels in each pattern = 9.6 x 40 = 384 (all spectrum may be used in each pattern). 1. With reuse pattern of 12 cells, 3 frequencies per cell are available: number of channels = 384 x 3 = 1152. 2. With reuse pattern of 9 cells, 4 frequencies per cell are available: number of channels 4 = 1536.

= 384 x

For the same bandwidth, if the number of cells in the pattern is reduced, the number of channels is increased.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

20-2

January, 2000

Solutions of Exercises BTS S8000: Coupling System Coupling for Two TRX with Diversity Antenna TX+RX Diversity

Antenna TX+RX Main

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

RF Combiner (Main)

RF Combiner (Diversity)

Duplexer

Duplexer

LNA Splitter

PA1

RX Splitter Main

PA2

M

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

LNA Splitter

Ext

RX1

D

M

RX2

Ext

RX Splitter Diversity

D

Solutions of Exercises

20-3

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

20-3

January, 2000

Solutions of Exercises TCU Warning: Information Path (1)

Hard Disk MMU-IDE

OMN Link Switch SLS2

Chain A Switching Control CPU-MPU

O&M Control CPU-OMU

BTSs Control CPU-BIFP

Multibus II

X.25 SICX

E Q U I P M E N T

SS7 CCS7

MPUA

SWitching Unit Switching Matrix Switch MSW Control V11/TTL SWE SWC

O&M and Synchro ECI

LAPD SICD8V

12.01/EN

Ethernet Inter SUP

Supervision SUP2

2 Mb <-> 64kb RCB

Chain status (MPU Status)

External Alarms ALA

TCU LAPD Concentration TSCB

External Loops PE/TRD/GR/0101

Chain B

January, 2000

PCM Interface DDTI

BTS LAPD Concentration BSCB BTS

Solutions of Exercises

O&M/B bus

C O N T R O L

O&M/A bus

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

To/From To OMC-R OMC-R

TCU/MSC 20-4

Information path when the TCU is warning: OMC-R link through X.25 interface.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

20-4

January, 2000

Solutions of Exercises TCU Warning: Information Path (2)

Hard Disk MMU-IDE

OMN Link Switch SLS2

Chain A Switching Control CPU-MPU

O&M Control CPU-OMU

BTSs Control CPU-BIFP

Multibus II

X.25 SICX

E Q U I P M E N T

SS7 CCS7

MPUA

SWitching Unit Switching Matrix Switch MSW Control V11/TTL SWE SWC

O&M and Synchro ECI

LAPD SICD8V

12.01/EN

Ethernet Inter SUP

Supervision SUP2

2 Mb <-> 64kb RCB

Chain status (MPU Status)

External Alarms ALA

TCU LAPD Concentration TSCB

External Loops PE/TRD/GR/0101

Chain B

O&M/B bus

C O N T R O L

O&M/A bus

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

To/From OMC-R

January, 2000

PCM Interface DDTI

BTS LAPD Concentration BSCB BTS

TCU/MSC To OMC

Solutions of Exercises

20-5

Information path when the TCU is warning: OMC-R link through Ater interface.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

20-5

January, 2000

Solutions of Exercises Incoming Call: Information Path

Hard Disk MMU-IDE

OMN Link Switch SLS2

Chain A Switching Control CPU-MPU

O&M Control CPU-OMU

BTSs Control CPU-BIFP

Multibus II

X.25 SICX

E Q U I P M E N T

SS7 CCS7

MPUA

SWitching Unit Switching Matrix Switch MSW Control V11/TTL SWE SWC

O&M and Synchro ECI

LAPD SICD8V

12.01/EN

Ethernet Inter SUP

Supervision SUP2

2 Mb <-> 64kb RCB

Chain status (MPU Status)

External Alarms ALA

TCU LAPD Concentration TSCB

External Loops PE/TRD/GR/0101

Chain B

January, 2000

PCM Interface DDTI

BTS LAPD Concentration BSCB BTS

Solutions of Exercises

O&M/B bus

C O N T R O L

O&M/A bus

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

To/From OMC-R

TCU/MSC 20-6

Information path for incoming call.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

20-6

January, 2000

Solutions of Exercises Call-Established: Traffic Path

Hard Disk MMU-IDE

OMN Link Switch SLS2

Chain A Switching Control CPU-MPU

O&M Control CPU-OMU

BTSs Control CPU-BIFP

Multibus II

X.25 SICX

E Q U I P M E N T

SS7 CCS7

MPUA

SWitching Unit Switching Matrix Switch MSW Control V11/TTL SWE SWC

O&M and Synchro ECI

LAPD SICD8V

12.01/EN

Ethernet Inter SUP

Supervision SUP2

2 Mb <-> 64kb RCB

Chain status (MPU Status)

External Alarms ALA

TCU LAPD Concentration TSCB

External Loops PE/TRD/GR/0101

Chain B

January, 2000

PCM Interface DDTI

BTS LAPD Concentration BSCB BTS BTS

Solutions of Exercises

O&M/B bus

C O N T R O L

O&M/A bus

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

To/From OMC-R

TCU/MSC 20-7

Traffic path for established call.

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

20-7

January, 2000

Solutions of Exercises Student Notes:

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

20-8

January, 2000

Glossary

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Section 21

Glossary

PE/TRD/GR/0101

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Glossary

21-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12.01/EN

21-1

January, 2000

Glossary

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

Section 21

PE/TRD/GR/0101

Glossary

12.01/EN

January, 2000

Glossary

21-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12 01/EN

21-1

January, 2000

Glossary A A

Interface between MSC and TCU

Abis

Interface between BTS and BSC

ACCH

Associated Control CHannel: dedicated Slow (SACCH) or Fast (FACCH) radio signaling channel

ACSE

Association Control Service Element: service element providing the exclusive ability to set up and terminate application associations

ACU

Air Conditioning Unit (S8000 outdoor)

ACM

Address Complete Message

ADM

ADMinistration function enabled by OMC-R

ADSL

Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line: network access technology on copper pair

AGCH

Access Grant CHannel: common mobile radio channel used exclusively for assign commands sent over the network in response to mobile access requests

Air interface

See “Radio interface”

AIS

Alarm Indication Signal: PCM alarm LED (DTI/TDTI/DDTI boards)

ALA

ALArms collecting board, housed in the equipment cabinet supporting the alarm loops management (BSC 6000/12000)

ALAT

ALArm(s) collecting board, supporting BTS alarm management (BTS S4000 Indoor)

ALATO

ALArm(s) ouTdOor collecting board, supporting BTS alarm management (S4000 Outdoor BTS, S4000 Smart BTS and S2000 Indoor)

ALCO

ALarm COllecting board of the BTS S8000 first version (before CBCF)

ALPRO

ALarm PROtection board for external alarms and remote controls of the ALCO/RECAL board (BTS S8000)

AMI

Alternate Mark Inversion: bipolar coding standard in which 1 is alternatively positive or negative

AMNU

Advanced MaNagment Unit of the DRX: unit of the DRX processing AMRT frames

AMPS

Advanced Mobile Phone System: first analogue radio cellular telephone (800 MHz) standard in USA (1978)

ANM

ANswer Message

ANSI

American National Standards Institute

AoC

Advice of Charge

AoCC

Advice of Charge Charging

AoCI

Advice of Charge Information

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12 01/EN

21-2

January, 2000

Glossary APC

Application Processor Cabinet: (DMS)

ARFCN

Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number: corresponding to frequency value of the carrier

ASCI

Advanced Speech Call Items: three services standardized by ETSI in GSM Phase 2+ (eMLPP, VBS and VGCS)

ASIC

Application Specific Integrated Circuit: device customized for a specific application

Ater

Interface between BSC and TCU

ATM

Asynchronous Transfer Mode: cell based data transfer technique using switching mode

AuC

Authentication Center: management of security data (Ki) for authentication of subscribers (NSS function)

A3

Authentication algorithm

A5

Ciphering algorithm

A8

Ciphering key computation

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12 01/EN

21-3

January, 2000

Glossary B B

Interface between MSC and associated VLR

BAIC

Barring of All Incoming Calls

BAOC

Barring of All Outgoing Calls

BCC

Base station Color Code: Network cell color code = 3 last three BSIC code bits. The BCC is used to identify one of the cells sharing the same BCCH frequency. Neighboring cells may, or may not, have different BCC.

BCCH

Broadcast Control CHannel: common mobile logical channel used for broadcasting system information on the radio interface

BCF

Base Common Functions: common BTS control and switching unit (see CBCF and SBCF)

BDA

BSC Application Database: contains all the information objects describing the BSS

BDE

Exploitation Data Base (OMC-R): contains all the information objects describing the BSS under OMC-R management control, and the objects required to manage OMC-R functionality

BDT

Part of the DRX: regenerates GSM TIME bus signals

BER

Bit Error Rate: method of measuring the quality of radio link transmission

BFI

Bad Frame Indicator: flag indicating the quality of a received traffic frame

BHCA

Busy Hour Call Attempts: Unit of telecommunications traffic intensity

BIC-Roam

Barring of all Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the home GSM network

BIFP

Base Interface Front-end Processor board of BSC managing the interface with BTS - see CPU-MPU

BIST

Built-In Self Test: system built into most BTS and BSC boards which automatically executes self tests when the boards are initialized or configured

BOIC

Barring Outgoing International Calls

BSC

Base Station Controller

BSIC

Base Station Identity Code: used to identify a base station which allows mobile stations to distinguish the cells sharing the same BCCH frequency. A BSIC is defined by an (NCC, BCC) combination

BSS

Base Station Subsystem: Radio Cellular Network radio subsystem made up of Base Station Controllers, one or more remote TransCoder Units and one or more Base Transceiver Stations

BSSAP

BSS Application Part of the BSS A interface protocol stack (BSSMAP + DTAP)

BSSMAP

BSS Management Application Part of the A interface protocol stack charged with managing BSS radio resources and transferring calls

BSSOMAP

Application Part of the A interface protocol stack charged with BSS O&M

BTS

Base Transceiver Station: radio base station managing one or more cells

B8ZS

Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution Coding: bipolar coding standard used on T1 PCM "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12 01/EN

21-4

January, 2000

Glossary C C

Interface between MSC and HLR

CA

Cell Allocation: radio frequency channel allocated to a cell

CAMEL

Customized Application for Mobile network Enhanced Logic: IN based mechanisms for GSM

CBCF

Compact BCF: new BCF module of the S8000 Indoor and Outdoor

CBCH

Cell Broadcast CHannel: logical channel used inside a cell to broadcast short messages in unacknowledged mode

CC

Call Control: sublevel of layer 3 on the radio interface charged with managing call processing Country Code

CCBS

Completion of Calls to Busy Subscribers

CCCH

Common Control CHannel: common bidirectional mobile control channel, used for transmitting signaling information on the radio interface

CCF

Call Control Function (IN)

CCH

Control CHannel: common or dedicated control channel

CCITT

Comité Consultatif International Télégraphique standardization organization replaced by ITU

CCS

Common Channel Signaling: MSC/VLR subsystem of common channel signaling links

CCS7

Common Channel Signaling CCITT No. 7: BSC common channel signaling No. 7 interface board (A interface)

CDMA

Code Division Multiple Access:

CD-ROM

Compact Disc-Read Only Memory: for SUN system software installation

CFB

Call Forwarding on Busy subscriber

CFNRc

Call Forwarding on MS Not Reachable

CFNRy

Call Forwarding on No Reply

CFU

Call Forwarding Unconditional

CGI

Cell Global Identifier: identifier of a mobile network cell. containing the Location Area Code (LAC), the Mobile Country Code (MCC), the Mobile Network Code (MNC) and the cell identifier in the Location Area

CIC

Circuit Identity Code: communications

CIR

Carrier on Interference Ratio: new name for C/I

CLIP

Calling Line Identification Presentation

CLIR

Calling Line Identification Restriction

terrestrial

circuit

et

reference

Téléphonique:

used

for

A

previous

interface

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12 01/EN

21-5

January, 2000

Glossary CM

Configuration Management: network O&M function enabled by OMC-R Connection Management Level 3 of radio interface assembling call processing procedures (CC), short messages (SMS), and supplementary services (SS)

CMCF

Compact Main Common Function: main board of the CBCF (S8000)

CMIP

Common Management Information Protocol: OSI level 7 protocol for network management

CMIS

Common Management Information Service: OSI Application level service

CMISE

Common Management Information System Element:

CNAP

Calling Name Presentation

COAM

Centralized Operation Administration and Maintenance: new BCF architecture from V10 (S2000H&L) or V12 (S4000 and S8000)

CoLP

Connected Line Identification Presentation

CoLR

Connected Line Identification Restriction

COMICO

COMbiner InterCOnnection module for the RF combiners (S8000)

CPCMI

Compact PCM Interface: PCM interface board of the CBCF (S8000)

CPU

Central Processing Unit: processing boards (BSC 6000/12000)

CPU-MPU/BIFP CPU - Main Processing Unit/Base Interface Front-end Processor: BSC processing boards CPU-OMU

CPU - Operations & Maintenance Unit: BSC Operation and Maintenance board

CRC

Cyclic Redundancy Check: method for detecting errors in serial data transmission (CRC4 and CRC6) Also: PCM alarm LED (DTI/TDTI/DDTI boards)

CSMA/CD

Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection: bus access mechanism of Ethernet LAN

CSPDN

Circuit Switched Public Data Network

CSU

Control Switching Unit (S4000 BTS)

CSW

Control and Switching: BTS control and switching unit made up of CSW1 and CSW2 boards

CSW1

BTS control board (S4000)

CSW2

BTS switching board (S4000)

CSWM

Control and SWitching Module: manages the BCF and contains the connection matrix in the BTS S8000 first version (before CBCF)

CUG

Closed User Group: group of subscribers communicating only among themselves

CW

Call Waiting

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12 01/EN

21-6

January, 2000

Glossary D D

Interface between HLR and VLR

DACS

Direct Ambient Cooling System: System Cooling Unit (BTS S8000 Outdoor)

DAT

Digital Audio Tape: cartridge used for backing up and storing data

DC

Direct Current

DCC

Data Channel Concentrator: board of BCF unit (BTS S4000)

DCCH

Dedicated Control CHannel: dedicated radio signaling channel with one SDCCH + one SACCH

DCE

Data Circuit terminating Equipment: modem for example

DCU or DCU4

Dual Channel Unit: FP unit designed to process TDMA frame time slots

DCU8

Digital Control Unit for 8 channels: signal processing module, part of the DRX

DD

Dynamic Data: dynamic attribute of an operational database object updated by BSC applications

DDTI

Dual Digital Trunk Interface: BSC interface board controlling two external PCM links with BTS (interface Abis) or TCU (interface Ater)

DLCI

Data Link Connection Identifier

DLNA

Duplexer Low Noise Amplifier: radio module (BTS e-cell)

DLU

Downloadable Logical Unit: configuration file for software customization (BTS)

DMS

Digital Multiplex switching System: Nortel switch equipment used for MSC (NSS)

DP

Permanent Data: permanent attribute of an operational object managed in BDE and BDA databases

DRAM

Dynamic Random Access Memory: type of read/write memory equipping central processing units (BSC 6000/12000)

DRX

Discontinuous Reception: used on Radio interface Driver and Receiver unit: signal processing unit for radio transmission and reception (BTS S8000 and S2000H&L)

DSC

Data Signaling Concentration: BCF signaling concentration board (BTS S8000)

DSP

Digital Signal Processor: device dedicated to signal digital treatment

DTAP

Direct Transfer Application Part: application of the A interface protocol charged with transferring transparent messages between mobile stations and MSC

DTE

Data Terminal Equipment: end equipment of a communication path; PC or server for example

DTI

Digital Trunk Interface: BTS board controlling one external PCM link

DTMF

Dual Tone Multiple-Frequency: dialing method using a combination of two frequencies among a standardized set of frequencies

DTX

Discontinuous Transmission: used on Radio interface

DUP

Data User Part: interface with PAD (PSDN) "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12 01/EN

21-7

January, 2000

Glossary E E

Interface between two MSCs

EA

Early Assignment

EC

Echo Canceler

ECI

Equipment Cabinet Interface: supervision board of several Equipment cabinet boards (BSC 6000/12000)

EFR

Enhanced Full Rate: high quality speech vocoder (MS and TCU)

EFT

Transferable File Element: sets of files used between OMC-R and BSS, controlled by the FTAM function

E-GSM

Extended GSM: new frequency band allowed to extend the GSM 900

EIR

Equipment Identification Register

EIRP

Equivalent Isotropic Radiated Power

EIU

Ethernet Interface Unit: LPP board of the DMS

EMC

Electro-Magnetic Compatibility

EMI

Electro-Magnetic Interference

eMLPP

enhanced Multi-Level Precedence and Preemption: supplementary service allowing priority levels and resources preemption (ASCI service used in GSM-R)

ENET

Enhanced NETwork: switching matrix of the DMS (Nortel MSC)

EOS

End Of Silence allowing normal voice frame transmission (see DTX)

EPROM

Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory: type of on-board memory

EQPD

EQuiPment cabinet shelf housing DDTI boards (BSC 6000/12000)

EQPI

EQuiPment cabinet shelf housing ALA, RCB and TSCB boards (BSC 6000/12000)

Erlang

Unit of telecommunications traffic intensity representing the average number of resources or circuits occupied during the peak traffic hour

ERP

Effective Radiated Power

ESF

Extended Super Frame: PCM T1 multiframe (24 basic frames and CRC6)

ETSI

European Telecommunication Standards Institute

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12 01/EN

21-8

January, 2000

Glossary F F

Interface between MSC and EIR

FAC

Final Assembly Code

FACCH

Fast Associated Control CHannel: dedicated signaling channel (Um interface)

Fb

Radio transmission Frequency bit

FCCH

Frequency Correction CHannel: common frequency synchronization channel

FCH

Frequency CHannel: common frequency synchronization channel

FCS

Frame Check Sequence: LAPDm

FE

Frame Error: frame alignment error counter alarm Also: PCM alarm LED (DTI/TDTI/DDTI boards)

FEC

Frame Error Counter: on DTI board, FEC counts frame lock error

FH

Frequency Hopping

FH bus

FH bus: BTS data transmission bus between the FP and TX (S4000)

FM

Fault Management: O&M network function enabled by MD-R or OMC-R

FN

Frame Number

FP

Frame Processor: TDMA radio frame processor in BTS

FP-RX bus

BTS data transmission bus between FP and RX (S4000)

FPRX

TDMA radio frame processor and receiver function

FR

Full Rate: normal quality speech vocoder (MS and TCU)

FRU

Field Replaceable Unit

FTAM

File Transfer Access and Management: ISO file transfer and remote file management protocol used by the EFT

G G

Interface between one VLR and another VLR

GMSC

Gateway Mobile Switching Center: MSC dedicated for incoming calls

GMSK

Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying: radio modulation used by GSM

GPP

GSM PassPort: Nortel PassPort switch customized for IWF

GSM

Global System for Mobile communications

GSM-R

GSM network for Railway companies

GSM time

GSM system clock in BTS

GTW

GaTeWay board between the BCF and the DRXs of the S8000 first version (before CBCF) "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12 01/EN

21-9

January, 2000

Glossary H HDB3

High Density Bipolar 3: bipolar PCM link coding standard 3

HDLC

High-level Data Link Control: data link protocol family: LAPB (X.25), LAPD (ISDN), LAPDm (GSM), MTP-2 (SS7)

HLR

Home Location Register: data base for permanent subscribers information (profile, billing, location, etc.)

HO

HandOver: automatic call transfer implemented between the radio channels of the same or different cells without interrupting transmission

HSI

High-Speed Interface (X.25 SUN server board)

HSN

Hopping Sequence Number (see Frequency Hopping)

HOLD

Call Hold service

H2D

Hybrid Coupleur 2 ways with integrated Duplexer

H4D

Hybrid Coupleur 4 ways with integrated Duplexer

I IAM

Initial Address Message

IDE

Integrated Disk Electronic: hard disk interface between CPU-OMU and MMU_IDE boards (BSC 12000HC)

IEEE

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IEEE 802.3

Recommendation IEEE 802.3: standardization of Ethernet, using the CSMA/CD access method and bus topology LAN

IMEI

International Mobile Equipment Identity: permanently stored in the MS

IMSI

International Mobile Subscriber Identity: primary identification of the subscriber

IN

Intelligent Network: open system for universal networks services (personal number, prepaid calling, sponsored calling, location enquiry, VPN, etc.)

IOM

Input Output Module: (DMS)

IP

Internet Protocol: level 3 Intelligent Peripheral: IN node

ISDN

Integrated Services Digital Network

ISM

Integrated Service Module: (DMS)

ISO

International Standards Organization

ISPBX

Integrated Services Private Branch eXchange

ISUP

ISDN user part: subsystem supporting CCITT signaling No. 7

ITU

International Telecommunication Union: standardization organization

IWF

InterWorking Function: functions for data services (NSS)

protocol

usually

used

above

Ethernet

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12 01/EN

21-10

January, 2000

Glossary K kb

kilobyte (1024 bytes)

Kc

Key of ciphering: encrypting key assigned to a mobile subscriber

kHz

kiloHertz

Ki

Identification key

kW

kiloWatt

L L1

BTS software element handling the LAPD Level 1 protocol

L1M

Layer one Management: measurements

L2

BTS software element handling the LAPD Level 2 protocol

L2ML

Abis interface layer level 2 management function

LAC

Location Area Code: code used to identify a location area

LAI

Location Area Identity: geographic identity of a group of cells used to locate a mobile station

LAN

Local Area Network: local OMC Ethernet network

LAP

Link Access Protocol family: LAPB, LAPD, LAPDm

LAPB

Link Access Protocol Balanced: X.25 link signaling protocol

LAPD

Link Access Protocol on D channel: signaling protocol used on the Abis interface between BTS and the BSC and on the Ater interface between BSC and TCU

LAPDm

Link Access Protocol on D channel, modified: signaling protocol used on GSM radio interface

LBO

Line Build Out: PCM T1 line attenuation

LDB

Operating system: one of the three BSC core system software levels

LED

Light Emitting Diode

LFA

Loss of Frame Alignment: PCM alarm LED (DTI/TDTI/DDTI boards)

LIU

Link Interface Unit: LPP board DMS

LMS

Local Message Switch: LPP board of the DMS

LNA

Low Noise Amplifier

LNA-splitter

Low Noise Amplifier-splitter: used for separation of signals received in the BTS

LOS

LOSs of PCM frame alignment alarm signal

LPD box

Lightning Protection and Distribution box (S4000 Smart)

LPP

Link Peripheral Processor: main interface equipment of the DMS

Processor

functional

unit

handling

BTS

radio

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12 01/EN

21-11

January, 2000

Glossary M MA

Mobile Allocation: table of channel associated frequency allocations

MAIO

Mobile Allocation Index Offset: reference of channel associated frequencies

MAP

Mobile network Application Part protocol

Mb

Megabyte (1024 kb)

MCC

Mobile Country Code

MCGS

Meridian Cabinet Global Switch: main cabinet of the Micronode DMS

MCIP

Meridian Cabinet Interface Power: cabinet of the Micronode DMS

MD-R

Mediation Device OMC-Radio

ME

Mobile Equipment: Mobile Station without SIM

MEU

Masthead Electronics Unit: remote TX amplifier located close to the antenna

MHz

MegaHertz

MIB

Management Information Base: data base containing managed objects in Q3 format

MM

Mobility Management: radio handling mobile locations

MMI

Man Machine Interface enabling message exchanges between OMC-R and users

MMU

Mass Memory Unit: SCSI hard disk board (BSC 6000/12000)

MMU_IDE

Mass Memory Unit_IDE hard disk board (BSC 12000HC)

MNC

Mobile Network Code

MNP

Microcom Network Protocol: protocols designed by Microcom to support error control and data compression for asynchronous modem transmission, standardized in V42 and V42bis

MNU

MaNagement Unit board: management board of FP unit (BTS S4000)

MoU

Memorandum of Understanding

MPTy

Multiparty service

MPU

Main Processing Unit: set of processor boards (BSC 6000/12000)

MS

Mobile Station: mobile voice and data terminal or handset

MSC

Mobile services Switching Center: GSM switch equipment (NSS)

MSISDN

Mobile Station ISDN: number used by the calling party to reach a GSM subscriber

MSRN

Mobile Station Roaming Number

MSW

Main SWitching: switching matrix board of the SWU (BSC 6000/12000/12000HC)

MTP

Message Transfer Part: CCITT signaling system No. 7 part (A interface)

Multibus II

Data bus between the different BSC processing boards (Intel standard, equivalent to IEEE standard 1296) Multibus II is a registered trademark of Intel "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12 01/EN

21-12

January, 2000

Glossary N NACK

Negative ACKnowledgement

NCC

Network Color Code: first three bits of the BSIC code. Each country is assigned a NCC

NDC

National Destination Code

NFS

Network File System: standard network file management system; set of level 5 to 7 protocols enabling transparent file sharing between several machines (possibly heterogeneous) connected in a local network

NIU

Network Interface Unit: LPP board of the DMS

NMC

Network Management Center: linked to all the OMC, to manage the entire GSM network as a whole

NOS

NO Signal: PCM alarm LED for no frame signal received (DTI/TDTI/DDTI boards)

NRZ

Non Return to Zero: coding scheme used for binary signal (internal PCM)

NSS

Network and switching SubSystem: subsystem including an MSC, main HLR, VLR, EIR and AUC

NTPs

Nortel Technical Publications: Nortel Networks product documentation

O OACSU

Off-Air Call SetUp: procedure for setting up calls with allocating a radio channel during the call routing time

OAM

OMN Access Management: functional enabled by OMC-R

OE

Managed object: Object managed by OMC-R on the OMN interface, modeling an entity, set, function or BSS equipment

OEM

Original Equipment Manufacturer

O&M

Operation and Maintenance

O&M bus

Operation and Maintenance bus (BTS-BSC 6000/12000-TCU 6000)

OMC

Operation and Maintenance Center

OMC-R

Operation and Maintenance Center – Radio: for BSS

OMC-S

Operation and Maintenance Center – Switching: for NSS

OML

Operation and Maintenance Link: LAPD link supporting BSS Operation and Maintenance functions

OMN

Operation and Maintenance Network: interface used for transferring messages between OMC-R and connected BSC

OMU

See CPU-OMU board

OSI

Open System Interconnection: standard model for computer communications, organized into seven layers, each containing several protocols

OSS

Operation SubSystem: operations subsystem including the OMC-R and OMC-S "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12 01/EN

21-13

January, 2000

Glossary P PA

Power Amplifier

PAD

Packet Assembler/Disassembler (X.25)

PC

Personal Computer

PCH

Paging CHannel: common subscriber radio paging channel

PCM

Pulse Code Modulation: PCM link connecting either BSC to BTS (Abis interface), or BSC to TCU (Ater interface) E1 : 2.048 Mbit/s (2 Mbit/s physical link supporting 32 x 64 kbit/s time slots (TS)) T1 : 1.544 Mbit/s (1.5 Mbit/s physical link supporting 24 x 64 kbit/s time slots (TS))

PCM bus

Pulse Code Modulation bus: Internal BTS PCM distribution bus

PCMI

PCM Interface board supporting two PCM interfaces between BTS and BSC

PCU

Power Control Unit (BTS S8000)

PDTC

Pcm-30 Digital Trunk Interface (DMS)

P-GSM

Primary GSM band: new name of the basic GSM 900 band

PIN

Personal Identity Number

PLL

Phase Locked Loop: to maintain the synthetizer frequency

PLMN

Public Land Mobile Network

PM

Performance Management: function enabled by OMC

POD

Physical Object Dictionary used as a configuration file by the Fault Management function (OMC-R)

PPCM

Pico PCM Interface: BTS e-cell board controlling two external PCM links with BSC (Abis interface)

PROM

Programmable Read-Only Memory

PSCMD

Power Supply CoMmanD board for the converters of the BCF first version (BTS S8000)

PSDN

Packet-Switched Data Network

PSPDN

Packet Switched Public Data Network

PSTN

Public Switched Telephone Network

PSU

Power Supply Unit

Q QoS

Quality of Service

Q3 interface

Standard communication interface between a manager and agent in Telecommunication Management Network (TMN) architecture

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12 01/EN

21-14

January, 2000

Glossary R RACH

Random Access CHannel: common mobile logical channel, reserved for random access requests transmitted by mobile stations on the radio interface

Radio interface Interface between the mobile station (MS) and BTS RAM

Random Access Memory: read and write memory

RAND

RANDom binary word generated by AUC for authentication algorithms

RCB

Rate Converter Board enabling PCM rate conversion for LAPD (BSC 6000/12000)

RECAL

REmote Control Alarm: new board used with the Compact BCF to replace ALCO inside each S8000 cabinet

RF

Radio Frequency

R-GSM

Railway GSM: new GSM 900 band (4 MHz) allocated to Railway companies

RISC

Reduced Instruction-Set Computer: computer which provides the ability to process an optimized set of instructions

RLP

Radio Link Protocol

ROM

Read Only Memory

ROSE

Remote Operations Service Element: OSI layer 7 protocol for network management

ROT

Remote Operations Terminal: remote OMC-R operations terminal

RR

Radio Resource: layer 3 radio interface sublevel handling radio resources

RRA

Receiver Remote Alarm: PCM alarm LED (DTI/TDTI/DDTI boards)

RSL

Radio Signaling Link

RX

Receiver part of the TRX (BTS)

RXD

BTS diversity receiver

RXM

BTS main receiver

RX-Splitter

Reception Multicoupler

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12 01/EN

21-15

January, 2000

Glossary S SABM

Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode: initialization LAPD frame

SACCH

Slow Associated Control CHannel: slow logical control channel associated with a traffic channel during a communication

SAPI

Service Access Point Identifier (LAPD)

SBCF

Small BCF: BCF module of the S2000H&L BTS

SCC

Supernode Combined Core: main cabinet of the SNSE DMS

SCCP

Signaling Connection Control Part (CCITT No. 7)

SCE

Service Creation Environment: IN station

SCF

Service Control Function: IN function

SCH

Synchronization CHannel: common time division synchronization channel

SCP

Service Control Point: IN node

SCSE

Communication Service with managed Systems: application handling communications with systems managed by OMC-R

SCSI

Small Computer System Interface: hard disk interface between the MMU and CPUOMU boards (BSC 6000/12000)

SDCCH

Standalone Dedicated Control CHannel: dedicated radio signaling channel temporarily allocated during call set up. There are 2 types of SDCCH = SDCCH/8 and SDCCH/4, on which the logical channels are grouped by 4 and by 8 respectively and combined with CCH

SDF

Service Data Function: (IN function)

SDO

OMC-R data server (Serveur de Données Objet)

SF

Super Frame: PCM T1 multiframe (12 basic frames without CRC)

SFH

Slow Frequency Hopping: FH used in GSM

SICD

Serial Interface Controller LAPD: LAPD controller board for Abis and Ater interface (BSC 6000/12000)

SICD8V

SICD board evolution for 8 channels

SICX

Serial Interface Controller X.25 (BSC 6000/12000)

SID

SIlence Descriptor: silence frame used in discontinuous transmission (DTX)

SIGN

SIGNalization unit: signalization unit processing two time slots

SIM

Subscriber Identity Module: smart card containing information on the subscriber

SKP

SKiP indication received: PCM alarm LED (DTI/TDTI/DDTI boards)

SLS

Serial Link Switch board supporting the link with OMC-R (BSC 6000/12000)

SLS2

Serial Link Switch board supporting the link with OMC-R (BSC 12000HC)

SM

Security Management: software management function supported by OMC-R "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12 01/EN

21-16

January, 2000

Glossary SMS

Short Messages Service: service for sending and receiving short messages between Radio Cellular Network mobile stations. Point to point short messages include short SMS-MO/PP messages and short SMS-MT/PP messages. Service Management System: IN server

SMS-CB

Short Message Service-Cell Broadcast

SMS-SC

Short Message Service-Service Center: point to point message center equipment

SNSE

SuperNode Size Enhanced: compact SuperNode DMS

SPU

Signal Processor Unit: radio signal processor for one time slot (BTS)

SRES

Signed RESult: binary word generated by AUC for authentication algorithms

SRF

Specialized Resource Function: (IN function)

SRU

Set of Rectifier Units of the BTS S8000

SS

Supplementary Services: radio interface layer 3 sublevel handling supplementary services

SS7

Signaling System 7: functional unit handling the Signaling System No. 7 (Ainterface)

SSA

SPARC Storage Array: SUN hard disk unit of the OMC-R

SSF SSP STP SUP SUP2

Service Switching Function: IN function Service Switching Point: IN node Signaling Transfer Point SUPervision board supervising a processing unit (BSC 6000/12000) SUPervision board supervising a processing unit (BSC 12000HC)

SWC

SWitching Controller board of the SWU (BSC 6000/12000/12000HC)

SWE

SWitching Extension board enabling V11/TTL conversion for internal PCM (BSC 6000/12000)

SWG

SwitchinG shelf (Equipment cabinet) housing the SWU (SWC, MSW and SWE) and the ECI boards (BSC 6000/12000)

SWU

SWitching Unit regrouping 6000/12000/12000HC)

SYNC

SYNChronization board (BTS S4000 indoor)

SYNO

SYNchronization Outdoor board (BTS S4000 outdoor)

SWC,

MSW

and

SWE

boards

(BSC

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12 01/EN

21-17

January, 2000

Glossary T TAF

Terminal Adaptation Function

TC

Terrestrial Circuit: PCM link time slot used to support traffic on A interface

TCAP

Transaction Capabilities Application Part (CCITT SS7)

TCB

TransCoding Board, enabling speech transcoding (FR) and data rate adaptation up to 9.6 kbps (TCU 6000)

TCB2

TransCoding Board, enabling speech transcoding (FR and EFR) and data rate adaptation up to 14.4 kbps (TCU 6000)

TCH

Traffic CHannel: radio traffic channel

TCH/F

Traffic CHannel/Full rate

TCH/H

Traffic CHannel/Half rate

TCP

Transmission Control Protocol: level 4 protocol usually used above IP

TCP/IP

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol: levels 4 and 3 of the OSI reference model

TCU

TransCoder Unit: Nortel name for the Transcoder Rate Adapter Unit equipment

TDMA

Time Division Multiple Access: abbreviation used to designate a transmission frame on the radio interface, divided into eight time slots (TS) or channels

TDTI

Transcoder Dual Trunk Interface: board handling PCM links (TCU 6000)

TEI

Terminal Equipment Identifier: address allocated to site entities (BCF and TRX), or to a TCU used to route messages to and from the BSC on the Abis or Ater interface (LAPD protocol)

TFH

Microwave terminal

TIB

BCF part of the TIL application

TIF

TRX part of the TIL application

TIL

Terminal for Local Intervention: TML application dedicated to BTS on-site maintenance

TA

Timing Advance: alignment process designed to compensate propagation time between a mobile and BTS

TMG

Traffic ManaGement: processor functional unit enabling BSC traffic handling capabilities

TML

Local Maintenance Terminal: specialized software running on a PC, used to test the different entities of the BSC and the BTS

TMN

Telecommunication Management Network: operation, maintenance and administration functions for networks management, normalized by ITU

TMSI

Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity

TRAU

Transcoder Rate Adaptor Unit (see TCU)

TRX

Transmission/reception subsystem of the BTS "Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12 01/EN

21-18

January, 2000

Glossary TS

Time Slot: a TDMA radio frame contains eight contiguous time slots

TSCB

Transcoder Signaling Concentration Board concentrating LAPD signaling channels between BSC and TCU into a single channel (BSC 6000/12000)

TUC

Transcoder Unit Controller board designed to monitor other boards and internal PCM cross connections (TCU 6000)

TUP

Telephone User Part

TX

Transmitter part of TRX (BTS)

T2

Period at which Permanent, Instrument panel and Temporary observation counters are recovered to generate observation reports, and also to back up Permanent and Temporary observation reports

T3

Temporary observation counter time

T4

30 mn reference period used to obtain uniform daily statistics (synchronized activation of permanent and instrument panel observations)

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12 01/EN

21-19

January, 2000

Glossary U UA

Unnumbered Acknowledgement: acknowledgement LAPD frame

UL

Underwriters Laboratory: North American standard

Um interface

See “Radio interface”

V VAD

Voice Activity Detection (see DTX)

VBS

Voice Broadcast Service: ASCI supplementary service allowing speech distribution into a geographical area

VCO

Voltage Controlled Oscillator: type of oscillator in which the frequency may be adjusted by a control voltage

VCXO

Voltage Controlled crystal-Oscillator

VEA

Very Early Assignment: procedure for setting up calls with allocating a radio channel at initial assignment

VGCS

Voice Group Call Service: ASCI supplementary service adding to VBS the change of the calling subscriber (full duplex channel) to another subscriber

VLR

Visitor Location Register: MSC data base for subscribers moving within its coverage area (NSS)

VMS

Voice Mail System

VPN

Virtual Private Network

VSWR

Voltage Standing Wave Ratio

V.35

ITU recommendation

V.42

ITU recommendation for error control procedures

V.42bis

ITU recommendation for data compression technique used with V42

V.110

ITU recommendation for data transmission

W WS

WorkStation: OMC stations linked to servers via an Ethernet LAN

X X.25

ITU recommendation for terminals using packet transmission over PSPDN

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101

12 01/EN

21-20

January, 2000